Los Alamos Research Explains How 5G Terahertz Waves Tear Apart DNA & Why We Must Stop The 5G Wireless Network February 17 2019 | From: CollectiveEvolution / Sott / Various
What are Terahertz waves? They’re the radiation that fills the spot between microwaves and infrared waves on the electromagnetic spectrum.
These waves can pass through non-conducting materials like clothes, brick, wood, paper, etc.
As a result, they can be utilized within cameras to look inside an enclosed structure, or sealed envelopes, into living rooms in order to “frisk” people at a distance.
In Brief:
The Facts: A model of the way the THz waves interact with DNA explains how DNA damage may occur and why evidence has been so hard to gather. This is simply a model, it's not experimental, but it does raise cause for concern.
Reflect On: Why are so many technologies approved for use without conducting the appropriate safety tests first? Studies have already shown cause for concern, yet too often the research goes ignored.
It’s not just Terahertz waves, it’s multiple sources of electromagnetic radiation. In the past, there were no artificial sources of electromagnetic radiation. Now, we are bombarded with them.
Cell phones, wifi, 5G and numerous other sources are all heavily present in our environment, and the corporations putting out this technology have not done any appropriate safety testing.
The studies that have emerged about this subject are eye-opening and very concerning.
The statement below emphasizes my point, which comes from Dr. Sharon Goldberg, an internal medicine physician. Dr. Goldberg announced this at Michigan’s 5G Small Cell tower legislation hearing. You can watch that here.
"Wireless radiation has biological effects. Period. This is no longer a subject for debate when you look at PubMed and the peer-review literature.
These effects are seen in all life forms; plants, animals, insects, microbes. In humans, we have clear evidence of cancer now: there is no question.
We have evidence of DNA damage, cardiomyopathy, which is the precursor of congestive heart failure, neuropsychiatric effects…”
Dr. Martin Blank, Ph.D., from the Department of Physiology and Cellular Biophysics at Colombia University, is one of the leading experts in this area of study. He explained:
"Putting it bluntly they (EMFs) are damaging the living cells in our bodies and killing many of us prematurely.
There are thousands of peer-reviewed studies on this subject, and hundreds of scientists have been petitioning the United Nations to pay attention.
The problem is the industry and how they’ve taken over medical science. Information about harmful technological products that make a very small group of people billions of dollars every year is somehow brushed under the rug. Corporate control over science and government health regulators like the FDA and CDC is completely out of control.
In this article, I’d like to focus on research conducted by Boian S. Alexandrov et.al. at the Center for Nonlinear Studies at Los Alamos National Laboratory in New Mexico.
It revealed that these Terahertz waves could “…unzip double-stranded DNA, creating bubbles that could significantly interfere with processes such as gene expression and DNA replication.”
This is concerning because Terahertz waves are used, as previously mentioned, to peer through things. Airport scanners are a perfect example. That does not mean that airport scanners can rip apart DNA, but it does suggest we need further testing on these instruments.
These Terahertz waves are absorbed and emitted can also be used to determine the chemical composition of a material. Even though they don’t travel far inside the body, there is hope that the waves can be used to spot tumours near the surface of the skin.
The author of the study states;
"With all the potential, it’s no wonder that research on terahertz waves has exploded in the last ten years or so.”
He then asks the question;
"But what of the health effects of terahertz waves?
At first glance, it’s easy to dismiss any notion that they can be damaging.
Terahertz photons are not energetic enough to break chemical bonds or ionise atoms or molecules, the chief reasons why higher energy photons such as x-rays and UV rays are so bad for us. But could there be another mechanism at work?”
Apparently, the evidence that Terahertz radiation (which is different from the wireless and other EMF radiation that’s put out by multiple devices) damages biological systems is mixed. Alexandrov outlines how some studies reported significant damage, while others showed none.
This is concerning, regardless of how many studies have shown no DNA damage. The fact is that there are studies that do show damage. Even if only one study proved that there could be DNA damage, it’s confusing as to why this technology would be approved.
Alexandrov and his team created a model to investigate how the fields interact with double-stranded DNA. What they found was remarkable.
"They say that although the forces generated are tiny, resonant effects allow THz waves to unzip double-stranded DNA, creating bubbles in the double strand that could significantly interfere with processes such as gene expression and DNA replication.
It’s important to note that this particular study was a model, it wasn’t actually experimental. However, the team still presented enough information to suggest this technology could be dangerous to our health, especially given the hazardous biological effects of other waves on the electromagnetic spectrum.
"This should set the cat among the pigeons. Of course, terahertz waves are a natural part of environment, just like visible and infrared light. But a new generation of cameras are set to appear that not only record terahertz waves but also bombard us with them.
And if our exposure is set to increase, the question that urgently needs answering is what level of terahertz exposure is safe.”
The last point made in the quote above is important to note. We’ve never been bombard this much - our exposure has never been so high.
North America also seems to be running behind, as multiple countries have completely banned wifi technology and cell phones in nursing homes and elementary schools because of the dangerous effects these technologies can have on our health.
It’s concerning that we are approving technology that use these types of waves when one of the only studies on this subject outlines how “research in this field has only just begun, both at home and abroad.
In this paper, research progress with respect to THz radiation, including its biological effects, mechanisms and methods of protection, will be reviewed.” (source)
That paper goes on to emphasize that, although many biological effects are unknown, tremendous advancements in medical technology could come from their use.
This wouldn’t be the first time we’ve seen potentially dangerous technologies being used in the healthcare system, such as mammograms.
Who knows! I guess we will have to wait and see until more research emerges. At the end of the day, a lot of technology and pharmaceuticals we use have not gone through appropriate safety testing, and so we may be seeing the same thing here.
If you want to see some of this science, the best place place to start your research is with the Environmental Health Trust.
Although it’s unclear what will happen here, there is still so much electromagnetic radiation in our environment that it’s important to protect yourself.
There are many things you can do to combat electromagnetic radiation. You can have a wired internet connection, unplug all of your devices before you sleep, purchase EMF protective clothing, and even paint your walls with EMF protective paint.
You can live a healthy lifestyle, but I believe the mind body connection is so strong that anything can be mitigated through the deepest levels of healing.
Never forget that this is a 'two way street' in that those countries who control the satellites basically will incredibly control all people on Earth.
The global deployment of the fifth-generation wireless network,(5G) constitutes an experiment on humanity and the environment that is nothing less than a crime under international law.
Yet the subject of the the enormous dangers of the imminent and rapid deployment of 5G technology was not mentioned when world leaders gathered earlier this month in Poland for the UN 'Earth' conference.
An inconvenient truth perhaps that our leaders could argue was not part of the overall subject in Poland of the well being of the Earth and all its inhabitants. Give me a break.
In Poland details of an important scientific report, commissioned by the UN, were released that stated the world has under 12 years to drastically cut emissions to avert catastrophe - that appeared to create a sense of urgency causing this closing statement.
"To waste this opportunity in [Poland] would compromise our last best chance to stop runaway climate change," UN Secretary General Antonio Guterres said. "It would not only be immoral, it will be suicidal."
What is more suicidal, insane is a more appropriate word, is not to address the terrible impact on the Earth of the introduction of 5G.
Some of the world's largest companies, with the support of their governments, are poised, over the next two years, to roll out 5G. This is set to deliver what is acknowledged to be "unprecedented societal change" on a global scale.
As if that will not increase the potential in future for more cyber attacks by States and potentially terrorist organisations as well as further contribute to the ever emerging disturbing social networks consequences of 'people manipulation' by huge corporations and States led by by mainly psychopathic and inept political leaders.
The great writer Aldous Huxley, imagined such forms of 'technological progress' in his famous book Brave New World written nearly a 100 years ago.
The late Stephen Hawkins before he died said the greatest threat to mankind was artificial intelligence (AI) - well 5G is the road that will eventually lead us to AI domination.
5G will bring us "smart" homes, "smart" businesses, "smart" highways, "smart" cities and self-driving "smart" cars. Virtually everything we own and buy, from TVs to refrigerators and washing machines to milk cartons, hairbrushes and infants' nappies, will contain antennas and microchips and will be connected wirelessly to the Internet.
Every person on Earth will have instant access to super-high-speed wireless communications from any point on the planet, even in rainforests, mid-ocean and the Antarctic.
Never forget that this is a 'two way street' in that those countries who control the satellites basically will incredibly control all people on Earth. An almost unimaginable prospect.
This will allow the ultimate potential for the manipulation of the entire world's populace by essentially only 'Super Power' countries, dominated by American corporations who seem led by, what has become the acknowledged term, 'the Deep State' and not by the American President.
Trump cannot get his own Administration to heed his orders; witness the supposed Syrian troop withdrawal as being but one example.
The planned density to achieve global 5G of radio frequency transmitters is unfathomable. In addition to millions of new 5G base stations on Earth and 20,000 new satellites in space, an estimated 200 billion "transmitting objects", will be part of the Internet of "things" by 2020, and one trillion further "things" a few years later.
Commercial 5G at lower frequencies and slower speeds was deployed in Qatar, Finland and Estonia in mid-2018. The rollout of 5G at extremely high (millimetre wave) frequencies has now begun this month making the immediacy to reverse this plan absolutely essential.
Despite widespread denial, the evidence that radio frequency (RF) radiation is harmful to life is already overwhelming. The accumulated clinical evidence of sick and injured human beings, experimental evidence of damage to DNA, cells and organ systems in a wide variety of plants and animals, and epidemiological evidence that the major diseases of modern civilisation; cancer, heart disease and diabetes are in large part caused by electromagnetic pollution, forms a literature base of well over 10,000 peer reviewed studies.
If 5G is implemented, no person, no animal, no bird, no insect and no plant on Earth will be able to avoid exposure, 24 hours a day, 365 days a year, to levels of RF radiation that are tens to hundreds of times greater than what exists today, without any possibility of escape anywhere on the planet.
Each 5G phone will contain dozens of tiny antennas, all working together to track and aim a narrowly focused beam at the nearest cell tower. In America, the US Federal Communications Commission (FCC) has permitted the effective power of those beams to be as much as 20 watts, ten times more powerful than the levels permitted for current phones using 3G and 4G.
At least five international companies, including defense companies like BOEING, are proposing to provide 5G from space from a combined 20,000 satellites in low and medium Earth orbit that will blanket the Earth with powerful, focused, steerable beams.
The alteration of the Earth's electromagnetic environment may be an even greater threat to life than the radiation from ground-based antennas where the harmful effects of radio frequency radiation have already been proven.
The WHO's International Agency for Research on Cancer (IARC) produced recently overwhelming evidence, including the latest studies on cell phone use and brain cancer risks, indicating that RF radiation is proven carcinogenic to humans and should now be classified as a "Group 1 carcinogen" along with tobacco smoke and asbestos.
As dramatic as it sounds, the deployment of 5G satellites and their accompanying earth stations must be stopped now.
This is a last chance situation so people must take to the streets all over the world, as they did in Paris, and force, or change, their governments.
2019 could be the year of revolutions as we the people become ever increasingly disenchanted with our incompetent and, in most cases, corrupt bureaucrats and politicians along with hopeless and useless world institutions like the UN and the EU.
Comment: The dangers of 5G are simply jaw-dropping when looked at in any detail, yet the people seem to be so enamored with the prospects of self-driving cars and refrigerators that order your groceries, that they willingly ignore the serious threat to their health. The world is about to become a lot more dangerous, once 5G is unleashed.
Trump To Sign Border Security Bill And Declare Emergency Over Wall & A Tale Of Two Walls - One Funded By The US Taxpayer In Israel, One Not Funded By Nancy Pelosi In The USA February 16 2019 | From: BBC / UNZ Various
US President Donald Trump will declare a national emergency to fund his planned border wall with Mexico, the White House says.
He is to sign a border security bill to avert a government shutdown - but also act to bypass Congress and use military funds for the wall, a statement said.
Senior Democrats have responded by accusing him of committing a "gross abuse of power" and a "lawless act".
Congress must first pass the bill before it is signed by the president.
Building the wall was a key election promise but Mr Trump has so far been unable to get the necessary funding.
What Did the White House Say?
"The president is once again delivering on his promise to build the wall, protect the border, and secure our great country," White House Press Secretary Sarah Sanders said in a statement on Thursday.
She added he would "take other executive action - including a national emergency - to ensure we stop the national security and humanitarian crisis at the border".
The compromise legislation includes $1.3bn (£1bn) in funding for border security, including physical barriers, but it does not allot money towards Mr Trump's wall. Mr Trump had wanted $5.7bn for the wall.
When Mr Trump warned that he might declare a national emergency over his wall earlier this year, some Republicans argued it would set a dangerous precedent.
Speaking on the Senate floor on Thursday, however, Republican Majority Leader Mitch McConnell indicated his support for the move, saying the president was taking action with "whatever tools he can legally use to enhance his efforts to secure the border".
In a 83-16 vote, the Senate on Thursday passed the border security bill, which is now due to go to the House of Representatives.
How Have Democrats Responded?
Speaker of the House Nancy Pelosi has already suggested a legal challenge from Democrats should the president make an emergency declaration.
She and Senate Democratic leader Chuck Schumer also issued a strongly worded joint statement condemning the move.
"Declaring a national emergency would be a lawless act, a gross abuse of the power of the presidency and a desperate attempt to distract from the fact that President Trump broke his core promise to have Mexico pay for his wall," they said.
"He couldn't convince Mexico, the American people or their elected representatives to pay for his ineffective and expensive wall, so now he's trying an end-run around Congress in a desperate attempt to put taxpayers on the hook for it."
The Democrats vowed that Congress would "defend our constitutional authorities".
Getting Around Congress, Not Through it
A month ago, in the midst of the federal government shutdown crisis, a consensus had emerged that the easiest way out for the president was to back down from his demands for congressional border wall appropriations while declaring a "national emergency" to commandeer funds from other sources.
It took a while, but the path of least resistance was the one Donald Trump followed.
He extricated himself from a predicament of his own making, while taking action that he can cite to supporters as evidence that he's fulfilling his "build the wall" campaign promise.
Of course, the drawbacks to this course that were apparent in January are still there.
Republicans fear this will set a precedent for presidential power that Democrats can someday use to circumvent the will of Congress.
The emergency declaration is sure to get bogged down in court challenges, which means it may not have much tangible benefit anytime soon.
And, as much as the president may like to spin this as a victory by other means, he still backed down in the face of Democratic resistance in Congress.
The shutdown fight was always about more than just the wall - it was a battle over who would set the political agenda for the next two years of the Trump presidency.
And if this resolution is any indication, if the president wants to get his way he's largely going to have to find ways around Congress, not through it.
What is a National Emergency?
A state of emergency is declared in times of crisis. In this case, Mr Trump says the crisis is being caused by migrants arriving on the US-Mexico border.
Experts say declaring a national emergency would give the president access to special powers that effectively allow him to bypass the usual political process.
He would be able to divert money from existing military or disaster relief budgets to pay for the wall.
Other presidents got money for a border barrier - why not Trump?
However there is debate about whether the situation at the southern US border constitutes such an emergency.
On the one hand, more than 2,000 people were turned away or arrested at the border each day during November alone. Supporters say this equals an emergency.
Others argue the figure is far lower than a decade ago, and many of the thousands of people who travelled north from countries like Honduras are presenting themselves as asylum seekers, looking to enter the country legally.
A Tale Of Two Walls - One Funded By The US Taxpayer In Israel, One Not Funded By Nancy Pelosi In The USA
The demand of President Donald Trump that congress should appropriate money to build a wall securing the nation’s southern border has resulted in the longest federal government shutdown in history with no end in sight.
There is considerable opposition to the wall based on two quite different perceptions of border security.
The generally “progressive” view is that there is no border threat at all, that the thousands of migrants heading for the U.S. can be assimilated and indeed should be allowed entry because of U.S. government policies in Central America that have created the ruined states that the would-be immigrants have been fleeing.
There is certainly some truth to that argument, though it suggests that the United States should essentially abandon sovereignty over its own territory, which most Americans would reject.
The alternative viewpoint, which has a much broader bipartisan constituency, consists of those who do feel that border security is a national priority but are nevertheless critical of building a wall, which will be expensive, possibly ineffective and environmentally damaging.
They prefer other options, to include increased spending on the border guards, more aggressive enforcement against existing illegals and severe punishment of businesses in the U.S. that hire anyone not possessing legal documentation.
Some also have argued in favor of a national ID issued only to citizens or legal permanent residents that would have to be produced by anyone seeking employment or government services.
Whether the wall will ever be built is questionable, but one thing that is certain is that there is more than enough hypocrisy regarding it to go around.
Democratic Presidents including Bill Clinton and Barack Obama when campaigning have called for better border security, as have Democratic Congressional leaders who are now smelling blood and attacking Trump for seeking to do what they have long at least theoretically sought.
Apart from that, many of the Democrats who are currently criticizing the southern border wall on moral grounds have failed to apply the same standard to another infamous wall, that which is being built by Israel.
Israel’s “separation wall” is arguably being constructed at least in part using “aid” and charitable money provided by Washington while also being enabled politically by the U.S. government’s acquiescence to the Israeli violations of international law.
And if the moral argument for not having a wall to aid suffering refugees has any meaning, it would be many times more so applied to the Israeli wall, which is an instrument in the maintenance of apartheid in areas under Israeli control while also making permanent the stateless status of the more than one million Palestinian refugees, far more in number than the would-be immigrants marching through Mexico.
The Israeli wall is at many points larger and more intimidating than that planned by Trump, and it is also designed to physically and economically devastate the Palestinian population adjacent to it.
Israel’s wall is undeniably far more damaging than anything being considered for placement along the U.S. - Mexican border as it operates as both a security measure and a tool for confiscating more Arab land by including inside the barrier illegal West Bank settlements.
There are both physical similarities and differences relating to the two walls. Judging from prototypes, Trump currently appears to favor prefabricated mostly metal sections with barbed wire coils on top that would be high and intimidating enough to deter climbing over.
The sections would be set in foundations sufficiently deep to deter most tunneling and there would be sensors at intervals to alert guards to other attempts to penetrate the barrier.
Israel’s wall varies in terms of structural material, including large concrete blocks 28 feet high in some areas while other less populated stretches that are considered low security make do with multiple lines of barbed wire and sensors.
It is interesting to note that some Israeli companies have apparently expressed interest in building the Mexico wall and, as one of the many perks Israel receives from congress includes the right to bid on U.S. government contracts, they might well wind up as a contractors or subcontractors if the barrier is ever actually built.
As noted above, the principal difference between the U.S. wall and that of Israel is that the American version is all on U.S. land and is engineered to more or less run in a straight line along the border.
The Israeli version is nearly 90% built on Palestinian land and, as it is designed to create facts on the West Bank, it does not run in a straight line, instead closing off some areas to the Palestinians by surrounding Arab villages.
It therefore keeps people in while also keeping people out, so it is not strictly speaking a security barrier. Indeed, some Israeli security experts have stated their belief that the wall has been only a minor asset in preventing violence directed by Palestinians against Israelis.
If the Israeli wall had followed the Green Line that separated Israel proper from Palestinian land it would be only half the estimated 440 miles long that it will now be upon completion.
The extra miles are accounted for by the deep cuts of as much as 11 miles into the West Bank, isolating about 9% of it and completely enclosing 25,000 Palestinian Arabs from areas nominally controlled by the Palestinian Authority.
One often cited victim of the barrier is the Palestinian town of Qalqilyah, with a population of 45,000, which is enclosed on all sides by a wall that in some sections measures more than 25 feet high.
Qalqilyah is only accessible through an Israeli controlled military checkpoint on the main road from the east and a tunnel on the south side that links the town to the adjacent village of Habla.
The wall is therefore only in part a security measure while also being a major element in the Israeli plan to gradually acquire as much of the West Bank as possible – perhaps all of it – for Israeli settlers.
It is a form of collective punishment based on religion to make life difficult for local people and eventually drive them from their homes.
The human costs for the Palestinians have consequently been high. A United Nations 2005 report states that:
“… it is difficult to overstate the humanitarian impact of the Barrier. The route inside the West Bank severs communities, people’s access to services, livelihoods and religious and cultural amenities.
In addition, plans for the Barrier’s exact route and crossing points through it are often not fully revealed until days before construction commences.
This has led to considerable anxiety amongst Palestinians about how their future lives will be impacted… The land between the Barrier and the Green Line constitutes some of the most fertile in the West Bank.
It is currently the home for 49,400 West Bank Palestinians living in 38 villages and towns.”
“The fence/wall, in its present configuration, violates Israel’s obligations under international humanitarian law…
Since the summer of 2002 the Israeli army has been destroying large areas of Palestinian agricultural land, as well as other properties, to make way for a fence/wall which it is building in the West Bank.
In addition to the large areas of particularly fertile Palestinian farmland that have been destroyed, other larger areas have been cut off from the rest of the West Bank by the fence/wall.
The fence/wall is not being built between Israel and the Occupied Territories but mostly (close to 90%) inside the West Bank, turning Palestinian towns and villages into isolated enclaves, cutting off communities and families from each other, separating farmers from their land and Palestinians from their places of work, education and health care facilities and other essential services.
This in order to facilitate passage between Israel and more than 50 illegal Israeli settlements located in the West Bank.”
Of course, the situation has become far worse for Palestinians since the two reports dating from 2004 and 2005.
Israel has accelerated its settlement construction and the wall has expanded and shifted to accommodate those changes, making life impossible for the indigenous population.
Any pushback from the United States has been rare to nonexistent, with successive administrations only occasionally mentioning that the settlements themselves are “troubling” or a “complication” vis-à-vis a peace settlement.
The first direct criticism of the wall itself took place in 2003, when the Bush administration briefly considered reducing loan guarantees to discourage its construction.
“A nation is within its rights to put up a fence if it sees the need for one. However, in the case of the Israeli fence, we are concerned when the fence crosses over onto the land of others.”
On May 25, 2005, Bush repeated his concerns, noting that “I think the wall is a problem. And I discussed this with Ariel Sharon. It is very difficult to develop confidence between the Palestinians and Israel with a wall snaking through the West Bank.”
In a letter to Sharon he stated that it “should be a security rather than political barrier, should be temporary rather than permanent and therefore not prejudice any final status issues including final borders, and its route should take into account, consistent with security needs, its impact on Palestinians not engaged in terrorist activities.”
Congress is, of course, Israeli occupied territory so its response was directed against Powell and Bush in support of anything Israel chose to do.
“The administration’s threat to cut aid to Israel unless it stops construction of a security fence is a heavy-handed tactic.
The Israeli people have the right to defend themselves from terrorism, and a security fence may be necessary to achieve this.”
In 2005, Senator Hillary Clinton declared her support for the wall by claiming that the Palestinian Authority had failed to fight terrorism:
“This is not against the Palestinian people. This is against the terrorists. The Palestinian people have to help to prevent terrorism. They have to change the attitudes about terrorism.”
Senator Charles Schumer, also from New York, added “As long as the Palestinians send terrorists onto school buses and to nightclubs to blow up people, Israel has no choice but to build the Security Wall.”
So, for many in Washington a legal and relatively apolitical wall by the United States to protect its border is a horrible prospect while the Israeli version built on someone else’s land with the intention to damage the local Arab population as much as possible is perfectly fine.
The reality is that America’s Establishment, which is dominated by veneration of Israel for a number of reasons, is completely hypocritical, more prepared to criticize actions taken by the United States even when those actions are justified than they are to condemn Israeli actions that amount to crimes against humanity.
That is the reality and it is playing out in front of us right now.
Energy Depletion In A Human Being February 15 2019 | From: JonRappoport
Energy. As in: energy depletion. Without energy, the individual feels trapped. In that state, he seeks to conform, fit in, survive long enough to die of old age.
Body and mind deploy various feedback mechanisms to inform a person about his “available supply of energy,” and when these signals are taken as absolute truth, trouble comes.
“I can sense my energy is dwindling. So I have to…settle for less, or see a doctor, or give up, or accept that I’m getting older, or change my values, or tune up a victim-story, or join a group, or…”
On and on it goes. In this twilight zone, the individual is unwilling to consider solutions that could restore his vitality. He’s already opted for a lower level of life. In particular, he’s unwilling to explore the one aspect of his capability that works like magic: Imagination.
That’s out. No dice. Preposterous. Absurd. After all, imagination is just that spring rain he felt as a child, that unknown space that held all the promise in the world. That was then; this is now. Now is sober reflection. Now is routine. Now is habit. Now is empty.
Once upon a time, he read a science fiction novel and, at the end of it, he felt as if he were standing, triumphant, in deep space at the crossroad of a hundred solar systems. Now he knows there is no such place. Now he is intelligent. And now he has no energy. The light that once flared is gone.
The idea that his own imagination could lead him to discoveries beyond anything he knows is fool’s gold. Yes, once when he was twenty, he woke up in the middle of the night and walked to his window and looked out over a city and knew he was on the cusp of an endless future…but what can he do about that now? There is no returning.
So his imagination waits. It idles. Yet…if he took a chance, if he began to dream again, if he started up the engine, if he considered offloading the interlocking systems that have become his daily life, what might happen? What layers of dead thought might peel away? What abiding convictions might dissolve? What energies might be restored?
Is there a huge space beyond his common neurological impulses and rigid survival habits, where vision can be played out on a vast scale? Is there a different kind of life he can enter?
Can he take a route around the banners and facades of his former reality after opening the door to his imagination? There is, in fact, a silent channel that winds through the entire time-scale of the human race.
History does not officially record it, because history is written by winners for losers, and this silent channel has nothing to do with pedestrian notions of victory or defeat.
The route of imagination has no truck with conventional space or time. It invents its own, and eventually introduces them into the world.
How many stories are there about journeying knights who cross the boundary from ordinary events into a realm of magic? The stories are messages…sent to ourselves, to remember. This place, this day, this moment is a platform from which to embark.
Adventure, with no end. Imagination. Energy.
Washington DC’s Role Behind The Scenes In Hollywood Goes Deeper Than You Think February 14 2019 | From: Independent
On television, we found more than 1,100 titles received Pentagon backing – 900 of them since 2005, from 'Flight 93' to 'Ice Road Truckers' and 'Army Wives.'
Federal agencies in the US have sponsored thousands of hours’ worth of entertainment time, including individual episodes of ‘24’
But just how dependant are these two centres of American influence? Scrutiny of previously hidden documents reveals that the answer is: very. We can now show that the relationship between US national security and Hollywood is much deeper and more political than anyone has ever acknowledged.
It is a matter of public record that the Pentagon has had an entertainment liaison office since 1948. The Central Intelligence Agency (CIA) established a similar position in 1996.
Although it was known that they sometimes request script changes in exchange for advice, permission to use locations, and equipment such as aircraft carriers, each appeared to have passive, and largely apolitical roles.
Files we obtained, mainly through the US Freedom of Information Act, show that between 1911 and 2017, more than 800 feature films received support from the US Government’s Department of Defence (DoD), a significantly higher figure than previous estimates indicate. These included blockbuster franchises such as Transformers, Iron Man, and The Terminator.
When we include individual episodes for long running shows like 24, Homeland, and NCIS, as well as the influence of other major organisations like the FBI and White House, we can establish unequivocally for the first time that the national security state has supported thousands of hours of entertainment.
For its part, the CIA has assisted in 60 film and television shows since its formation in 1947. This is a much lower figure than the DoD’s but its role has nonetheless been significant.
The CIA put considerable effort into dissuading representations of its very existence throughout the 1940s and 1950s. This meant it was entirely absent from cinematic and televisual culture until a fleeting image of a partially obscured plaque in Alfred Hitchcock’s North By Northwest in 1959, as historian Simon Willmetts revealed last year.
The CIA soon endured an erosion of public support, while Hollywood cast the agency as villain in paranoid pictures like Three Days of the Condor and The Parallax View in the 1970s and into the 1980s.
When the CIA established an entertainment liaison office in 1996, it made up for lost time, most emphatically on the Al Pacino film The Recruit and the Osama bin Laden assassination movie Zero Dark Thirty.
Leaked private memos published by our colleague Tricia Jenkins in 2016, and other memos published in 2013 by the mainstream media, indicate that each of these productions was heavily influenced by government officials. Both heightened or inflated real-world threats and dampened down government malfeasance.
One of the most surprising alterations, though, we found in an unpublished interview regarding the comedy Meet the Parents. The CIA admitted it had asked that Robert De Niro’s character not possess an intimidating array of agency torture manuals.
Nor should we see the clandestine services as simply passive, naive or ineffectual during the counterculture years or its aftermath. They were still able to derail a Marlon Brando picture about the Iran-Contra scandal (in which the US illegally sold arms to Iran) by establishing a front company run by Colonel Oliver North to outbid Brando for the rights, journalist Nicholas Shou recently claimed.
The (CIA) Director’s Cut
The national security state has a profound, sometimes petty, impact on what Hollywood conveys politically. On Hulk, the DoD requested “pretty radical” script alterations, according to script notes we obtained through Freedom of Information.
These included disassociating the military from the gruesome laboratories that created “a monster” and changing the codename of the operation to capture the Hulk from “ranch hand” to “angry man”. Ranch Hand had been the name of a real chemical warfare programme during the Vietnam war.
In making the alien movie Contact, the Pentagon “negotiated civilianisation of almost all military parts”, according to the database we acquired.
It removed a scene in the original script where the military worries that an alien civilisation will destroy Earth with a “doomsday machine”, a view dismissed by Jodie Foster’s character as “paranoia right out of the Cold War”.
The role of the national security state in shaping screen entertainment has been underestimated and its examination long concentrated in remarkably few hands. The trickle of recent books has pushed back but only fractionally and tentatively.
An earlier breakthrough occurred at the turn of the century, when historians identified successful attempts in the 1950s by a senior individual at the Paramount film studio to promote narratives favourable to a CIA contact known only as “Owen”.
The new FOI documents give a much better sense of the sheer scale of state activities in the entertainment industry, which we present alongside dozens of fresh cases studies. But we still do not know the specific impact of the government on a substantial portion of films and shows.
The American Navy’s Marine Corps alone admitted to us that there are 90 boxes of relevant material in its archive. The government has seemed especially careful to avoid writing down details of actual changes made to scripts in the 21st century.
Why The War On Conspiracy Theories Is Bad Public Policy February 13 2019 | From: UNZ
On January 25 2018 YouTube unleashed the latest salvo in the war on conspiracy theories, saying“we’ll begin reducing recommendations of borderline content and content that could misinform users in harmful ways - such as videos promoting a phony miracle cure for a serious illness, claiming the earth is flat, or making blatantly false claims about historic events like 9/11.”
At first glance that sounds reasonable. Nobody wants YouTube or anyone else to recommend bad information. And almost everyone agrees that phony miracle cures, flat earthism, and blatantly false claims about 9/11 and other historical events are undesirable.
But if we stop and seriously consider those words, we notice a couple of problems. First, the word “recommend” is not just misleading but mendacious. YouTube obviously doesn’t really recommend anything. When it says it does, it is lying.
When you watch YouTube videos, the YouTube search engine algorithm displays links to other videos that you are likely to be interested in.
These obviously do not constitute “recommendations” by YouTube itself, which exercises no editorial oversight over content posted by users. (Or at least it didn’t until it joined the war on conspiracy theories.)
The second and larger problem is that while there may be near-universal agreement among reasonable people that flat-earthism is wrong, there is only modest agreement regarding which health approaches constitute “phony miracle cures” and which do not.
Far less is there any agreement on “claims about 9/11 and other historical events.” (Thus far the only real attempt to forge an informed consensus about 9/11 is the 9/11 Consensus Panel’s study - but it seems unlikely that YouTube will be using the Consensus Panel to determine which videos to “recommend”!)
YouTube’s policy shift is the latest symptom of a larger movement by Western elites to - as Obama’s Information Czar Cass Sunstein put it - “disable the purveyors of conspiracy theories.”
Sunstein and co-author Adrian Vermeule’s 2008 paper “Conspiracy Theories,” critiqued by David Ray Griffin in 2010 and developed into a 2016 book, represents a panicked reaction to the success of the 9/11 truth movement. (By 2006, 36% of Americans thought it likely that 9/11 was an inside job designed to launch wars in the Middle East, according to a Scripps poll.)
Sunstein and Vermuele begin their abstract:
"Many millions of people hold (sic) conspiracy theories; they believe that powerful people have worked together in order to withhold the truth about some important practice or some terrible event.
A recent example is the belief, widespread in some parts of the world, that the attacks of 9/11 were carried out not by Al Qaeda, but by Israel or the United States.
Those who subscribe to conspiracy theories may create serious risks, including risks of violence, and the existence of such theories raises significant challenges for policy and law."
Sunstein argues that conspiracy theories (i.e. the 9/11 truth movement) are so dangerous that some day they may have to be banned by law.
While awaiting that day, or perhaps in preparation for it, the government should “disable the purveyors of conspiracy theories” through various techniques including “cognitive infiltration” of 9/11 truth groups.
Such “cognitive infiltration,” Sunstein writes, could have various aims including the promotion of “beneficial cognitive diversity” within the truth movement.
What sort of “cognitive diversity” would Cass Sunstein consider “beneficial”? Perhaps 9/11 truth groups that had been “cognitively infiltrated” by spooks posing as flat-earthers would harbor that sort of “beneficial” diversity? That would explain the plethora of expensive, high-production-values flat earth videos that have been blasted at the 9/11 truth community since 2008.
Why does Sunstein think “conspiracy theories” are so dangerous they need to be suppressed by government infiltrators, and perhaps eventually outlawed - which would necessitate revoking the First Amendment?
Obviously conspiracism must present some extraordinary threat. So what might that threat be?
Oddly, he never explains. Instead he briefly mentions, in vapidly nebulous terms, about “serious risks including the risk of violence.” But he presents no serious evidence that 9/11 truth causes violence. Nor does he explain what the other “serious risks” could possibly be.
Why did such highly accomplished academicians as Sunstein and Vermuele produce such an unhinged, incoherent, poorly-supported screed? How could Harvard and the University of Chicago publish such nonsense? Why would it be deemed worthy of development into a book?
Why did the authors identify an alleged problem, present no evidence that it even is a problem, yet advocate outrageously illegal and unconstitutional government action to solve the non-problem?
The too-obvious answer, of course, is that they must realize that 9/11 was in fact a US-Israeli false flag operation. The 9/11 truth movement, in that case, would be a threat not because it is wrong, but because it is right.
To the extent that Americans know or suspect the truth, the US government will undoubtedly find it harder to pursue various “national security” objectives.
Ergo, 9/11 “conspiracy theories” are a threat to national security, and extreme measures are required to combat them. But since we can’t just burn the First Amendment overnight, we must instead take a gradual and covert “boil the frog” approach, featuring plenty of cointelpro-style infiltration and misdirection.
“Cognitive infiltration” of internet platforms to stop the conspiracy contagion would also fit the bill.
It is quite possible, perhaps even likely, that Sunstein and Vermeule are indeed well-informed and Machievellian. But it is also conceivable that they are, at least when it comes to 9/11 and “conspiracy theories,” as muddle-headed as they appear.
Their irrational panic could be an example of the bad thinking that emerges from groups that reflexively reject dissent. (Another, larger example of this kind of bad thinking comes to mind: America’s disastrous post-9/11 policies.)
The counterintuitive truth is that embracing and carefully listening to radical dissenters is in fact good policy, whether you are a government, a corporation, or any other kind of group. Ignoring or suppressing dissent produces muddled, superficial thinking and bad decisions. Surprisingly, this turns out to be the case even when the dissenters are wrong.
Scientific evidence for the value of dissent is beautifully summarized in Charlan Nemeth’s In Defense of Troublemakers: The Power of Dissent in Life and Business (Basic Books, 2018).
Nemeth, a psychology professor at UC-Berkeley, summarizes decades of research on group dynamics showing that groups that feature passionate, radical dissent deliberate better, reach better conclusions, and take better actions than those that do not - even when the dissenter is wrong.
Nemeth begins with a case where dissent would likely have saved lives: the crash of United Airlines Flight 173 in December, 1978. As the plane neared its Portland destination, the possibility of a problem with the landing gear arose.
The captain focused on trying to determine the condition of the landing gear as the plane circled the airport. Typical air crew group dynamics, in which the whole crew defers to the captain, led to a groupthink bubble in which nobody spoke up as the needle on the fuel gauge approached “E.”
Had the crew included even one natural “troublemaker” - the kind of aviator who joins Pilots for 9/11 truth - there almost certainly would have been more divergent thinking. Someone would have spoken up about the fuel issue, and a tragic crash would have been averted.
Since 9/11, American decision-making elites have entered the same kind of bubble and engaged in the same kind of groupthink. For them, no serious dissent on such issues as what really happened on 9/11, and whether a “war on terror” makes sense, is permitted. The predictable result has been bad thinking and worse decisions.
From the vantage point of Sunstein and Vermeule, deep inside the bubble, the potentially bubble-popping, consensus-shredding threat of 9/11 truth must appear radically destabilizing.
To even consider the possibility that the 9/11 truthers are right might set off a stampede of critical reflection that would radically undermine the entire set of policies pursued for the past 17 years.
This prospect may so terrify Sunstein and Vermeule that it paralyzes their ability to think. Talk about “crippled epistemology”!
Do Sunstein and Vermeule really think their program for suppressing “conspiracy theories” will be beneficial? Do YouTube’s decision-makers really believe that tweaking their algorithms to support the official story will protect us from bad information?
If so, they are all doubly wrong. First, they are wrong in their unexamined assumption that 9/11 truth and “conspiracy theories” in general are “blatantly false.”
No honest person with critical thinking skills who weighs the merits of the best work on both sides of the question can possibly avoid the realization that the 9/11 truth movement is right.
Second, and less obviously, those who would suppress conspiracy theories are wrong even in their belief that suppressing false conspiracy theories is good public policy.
As Nemeth shows, social science is unambiguous in its finding that any group featuring at least one passionate, radical dissenter will deliberate better, reach sounder conclusions, and act more effectively than it would have without the dissenter. This holds even if the dissenter is wrong - even wildly wrong.
The overabundance of slick, hypnotic flat earth videos, if they are indeed weaponized cointelpro strikes against the truth movement, may be unfortunate.
But the existence of the occasional flat earther may be more beneficial than harmful. The findings summarized by Nemeth suggest that a science study group with one flat earther among the students would probably learn geography and astronomy better than they would have without the madly passionate dissenter.
We could at least partially solve the real problem - bad groupthink - through promoting genuinely beneficial cognitive diversity.
YouTube algorithms should indeed be tweaked to puncture the groupthink bubbles that emerge based on user preferences.
Someone who watches lots of 9/11 truther videos should indeed be exposed to dissent, in the form of the best arguments on the other side of the issue - not that there are any very good ones, as I have discovered after spending 15 years searching for them!
Exposure to even those “truthers” who are more passionate than critical or well-informed would benefit people who believe the official story, according to Nemeth’s research, by stimulating them to deliberate more thoughtfully and to question facile assumptions.
The same goes for other issues and perspectives. Fox News viewers should get “suggestions” for good material, especially passionate dissent, from the left side of the political spectrum.
MSNBC viewers should get “suggestions” for good material from the right. Both groups should get “suggestions” to look at genuinely independent, alternative media brimming with passionate dissidents - outlets like the Unz Review!
Unfortunately things are moving in the opposite direction. YouTube’s effort to make “conspiracy videos” invisible is being pushed by powerful lobbies, especially the Zionist lobby, which seems dedicated to singlehandedly destroying the Western tradition of freedom of expression.
Nemeth and colleagues’ findings that “conspiracy theories” and other forms of passionate dissent are not just beneficial, but in fact an invaluable resource, are apparently unknown to the anti-conspiracy-theory cottage industry that has metastasized in the bowels of the Western academy.
The brand-new bible of the academic anti-conspiracy-theory industry is Conspiracy Theories and the People Who Believe Them (Oxford University Press, 2019).
Editor Joseph Uscinski’s introduction begins by listing alleged dangers of conspiracism:
"In democracies, conspiracy theories can drive majorities to make horrible decisions backed by the use of legitimate force.
Conspiracy beliefs can conversely encourage abstention. Those who believe the system is rigged will be less willing to take part in it.
Conspiracy theories form the basis for some people’s medical decisions; this can be dangerous not only for them but for others as well. For a select few believers, conspiracy theories are instructions to use violence.”
Uscinski is certainly right that conspiracy theories can incite “horrible decisions” to use “legitimate force” and “violence.” Every major American foreign war since 1846 has been sold to the public by an official theory, backed by a frenetic media campaign, of a foreign conspiracy to attack the United States.
And all of these Official Conspiracy Theories (OCTs) - including the theory that Mexico conspired to invade the United States in 1846, that Spain conspired to sink the USS Maine in 1898, that Germany conspired with Mexico to invade the United States in 1917, that Japan conspired unbeknownst to peace-seeking US leaders to attack Pearl Harbor in 1941, that North Vietnam conspired to attack the US Navy in the Gulf of Tonkin in 1964, and that 19 Arabs backed by Afghanistan, Iraq, Iran, and everybody else Israel doesn’t like conspired to attack the US in 2001 - were false or deceptive.
Well over 100 million people have been killed in the violence unleashed by these and other Official Conspiracy Theories. Had the passionate dissenters been heeded, and the truths they told about who really conspires to create war-trigger public relations stunts been understood, none of those hundred-million-plus murders need have happened.
Though Conspiracy Theories and the People Who Believe Them generally pathologizes the conspiracy theories of dissidents while ignoring the vastly more harmful theories of official propagandists, its 31 essays include several that question that outlook.
In “What We Mean When We Say ‘Conspiracy Theory’ Jesse Walker, books editor of Reason Magazine, exposes the bias that permeates the field, pointing out that many official conspiracy theories, including several about Osama Bin Laden and 9/11-anthrax, were at least as ludicrously false and delusional as anything believed by marginalized dissidents.
In “Media Marginalization of Racial Minorities: ‘Conspiracy Theorists’ in U.S. Ghettos and on the ‘Arab Street’” Martin Orr and Gina Husting go one step further:
“The epithet ‘conspiracy theorist’ is used to tarnish those who challenge authority and power. Often, it is tinged with racial undertones: it is used to demean whole groups of people in the news and to silence, stigmatize, or belittle foreign and minority voices.” (p.82)
Unfortunately, though Orr and Husting devote a whole section of their article to “Conspiracy Theories in the Muslim World” and defend Muslim conspiracists against the likes of Thomas Friedman, they never squarely face the fact that the reason roughly 80% of Muslims believe 9/11 was an inside job is because the preponderance of evidence supports that interpretation.
Another relatively sensible essay is M R.X. Dentith’s “Conspiracy Theories and Philosophy,” which ably deconstructs the most basic fallacy permeating the whole field of conspiracy theory research: the a priori assumption that a “conspiracy theory” must be false or at least dubious:
"If certain scholars (i.e. the majority represented in this book! - KB) want to make a special case for conspiracy theories, then it is reasonable for the rest of us to ask whether we are playing fair with our terminology, or whether we have baked into our definitions the answers to our research programs.” (p.104).
Unfortunately, a few pages later editor Joseph Uscinski sticks his fingers in his ears and plays deaf and dumb, claiming that:
"The establishment is right far more often than conspiracy theories, largely because their methods are reliable. When conspiracy theorists are right, it is by chance.”
He adds that conspiracy theories will inevitably “occasionally lead to disaster” (whatever that means). (p.110).
I hope Uscinski finds the time to read Nemeth’s In Defense of Troublemakers and consider the evidence that passionate dissent is helpful, not harmful. And I hope he will look into the issues Ron Unz addresses in his American Pravda series.
Then again, if he does, he may find himself among those of us exiled from the academy and publishing in The Unz Review.
Q-Phenomenon For More Consciousness February 12 2019 | From: FinalWakeupCall
Two different governments at work simultaneously: The Draining of the Swamp - Sleeping masses delay the Plan & The Plan Exposed
Wake Up Folks: President Donald Trump has a role to play in exposing the Deep State cabal; the “dark” criminal people who are doing everything possible to keep humanity from waking up.
They’re desperate and they are pulling out all the stops to prevent the change into a better world for all of us.
The cabal hate humanity because they fear humanity as they know what humanity’s true capabilities are and that’s why they’ve gone all out to destroy us through Big Pharma’s poisoning pills; so-called “Health care’s” obstructive methods to healing; toxic fluoridated water; processed foods with toxic chemicals; soft drinks with dangerous sugars and sweeteners; chemtrails that destroy the environment; an education system full of lies, to name just a few facts.
They want followers, not leaders. They don’t want people questioning anything, while we should in actual fact question everything!
President Donald Trump is fulfilling the most dangerous and difficult task ever; the draining of the Deep State swamp, while being surrounded by and dealing with gangs on every level in government at home and abroad.
He has to deal with criminal financial, political, professional, and military gangs.
All these gangs are the result of worldwide corruption in governments, the criminal monetary system, corrupt financial institutions and immoral corporate interests, motivated and guided through secret societies.
President Donald Trump went through the very difficult and dangerous process of testing the “state of mind” of those closest to him, with the aim of determining who is telling the truth, who is compromised, who is corrupt, who is a viable ally, and most important, who is a deceitful enemy.
The powerful forces within the Deep State are massively organised against Trump and the population. They control most of the mainstream media and most of the Security Community.
Even Donald Trump’s administration has a nest of warmongers that together constitutes a full-blown war cabinet. These forces are always involved with their self-created battles, wars, taxes and tariffs.
They also enforce prohibitions; do-this and don’t-do-that. They operate on old-fashioned mind control programming. A trade war is just as phony as a war on drugs, a war on crime, or a war on terror. None are worth fighting.
And none are winnable. They are all designed to reward the elites at the peoples’ expense.
Two Different Governments at Work Simultaneously
The Deep State Shadow Government wants war. Consequently, their puppets in Congress promote war. The impression that is given, is that the Trump administration is preparing for war, which isn’t the case.
Remember there are two different governments at work; the Deep State Shadow - and the Trump administration. This makes it very difficult for the not fully awakened outsiders to understand what really is going on.
As both are acting as though they are the legal Government at almost the same time and level.
For example; the attack on Syria two years ago executed by the Trump administration, was secretly targeted at an empty airfield, to provide the Khazarian government the impression they were in control.
Now, again with Venezuela; the Khazarians want to send in the army to confiscate the oil reserves as their compensation for the losses in the Middle East.
The Trump administration countered this evil by recognising the Khazarian puppet Juan Guaido as a possible next president, to avoid the intervention of Khazarian mercenaries.
Intervention in Venezuela’s internal affairs is meant, being able to repeat the infamous regime changes similar to that which spread chaos in Libya and Iraq.
Nevertheless, Trump and the patriots keep pushing their own agenda in Venezuela, like in North Korea and Syria, by giving the Khazarian Deep State what they want.
Venezuela has over 300 billion barrels worth of oil, the world’s largest oil reserves, which is the reason why efforts are undertaken to remove first Chavez, and now President Nicolas Maduro from power.
Because this oil is needed by the Khazarian mafia to backup their petrodollar system, in order to maintain control of the international financial system, that they already have lost, as President Trump is in possession of the financial magic wand.
The entire government has been corrupted and undermined by banksters. The populace has been misled, deceived, and plundered by banksters.
World currencies have been manipulated for political and economic advantage by bankers, which are consequently approved by corrupt governments and supported and enforced by corrupt military and law enforcement officials.
Above and beyond currencies, other commodity supplies like precious metals and oil also have been rigged in the same way with same results and for the same reasons.
The elite bankers and their political and military parasites get rich and everyone else has to foot the bill. The source of all this evil is their love for money and power.
People have been deluded and deceived by these clowns and have been fed a steady diet of disinformation and false history, like the propaganda in public schools, to the degree that a great part of the population is living in a world that literally does not exist, except in their minds.
Wake up, and see what is really happening around you. Everyone of us needs to be freed from debt slavery once and for all.
The Draining of the Swamp
All this assorting and sieving yields loads of gross disinformation, propaganda and outright lies that are being pumped in the direction of Trump from every corner of the globe. It takes time to cut through all the garbage, which is being drained at a record pace.
Rest assured, in two years’ time, over hundreds of years of accumulated garbage and deception has been practically fully cleaned out.
Last year, Trump tweeted about shutting down the Federal Reserve, as the Federal Reserve has been operating without a licence since 2009 and should have been shut down a decade ago, if not never established in the first place. However, Obama allowed them to continue merrily, taxing the people on the one hand and counterfeiting and inflating the currencies on the other.
President Trump’s goal is to completely “drain the swamp” in Washington, D.C. But it has been a legal nightmare for the Trump administration, as officially, there’s not much the president can do.
There are hundreds of thousands of employees that work inside the government and many are Deep State operatives that diligently work against the Trump Team at every turn.
It’s almost impossible to fire government employees. It simply doesn’t matter how incompetent, disloyal or lazy a federal employee is.
Once in a job, it is extremely difficult to remove them, unless federal employees remain absent from their posts for a period of over 30 days; this in accordance with the law.
With this in mind, President Trump and team made a very clever move by closing the government for more than 30 days.
So, after 30 days, thanks to this law, the Trump administration is now free to discharge anyone they want from their contract legally, and this pertains to approximately 80% of the ‘work force’.
The White House can do so without reason, which saves a lot of paperwork; without threats of lawsuits, mass walkouts, or strikes. President Trump can finally start the large-scale draining of the swamp.
Meanwhile the plan has slightly been changed to trap Nancy Pelosi and Chuck Schumer in their own anti-border wall campaign.
They only wanted to negotiate with President Trump if the government were reopened. So, Trump trapped the Deep State Pelosi on their own wall issue by reopening the government for three weeks. No matter which path they are choosing, the wall is going to be built.
Sleeping Masses Delay the Plan
Take into consideration and understand how difficult it is to live in a world of people which are fast asleep.
Most of Trump’s time is spent waking up the masses by speaking repeatedly about the Federal Reserve Bank, the Clinton Foundation, the fake news media, the phony political partisan games and many more important fraudulent activities.
This is all done so that people become familiar with the reality of that which has been going on for far too long.
Evil thrives and flourishes when people are ignorant and doing nothing to investigate and uncover the truth! Indeed, unfortunately too many people are doing nothing.
All they seem to be able to do, is to criticise President Trump for doing too little, even go so far as accusing Trump of being part of the cabal clan.
This really is quite appalling. If they had made the effort to do a little research themselves, they would have known better.
Their state of deep slumber gives rise to no more and no less than a propagated belief system, while they too have the power to change things. By ignoring the evil, they remain on the side lines, being easily deceived by the lies and propaganda.
For example; Bankers are crooks who make money out of thin air. Likewise; Lawyers are people that make laws out of thin air. Both are headquartered in The City of London, a separate City State, like the Vatican and Washington DC.
Politics diverts peoples’ attention away from the Truth, by purporting beliefs made up out of thin air.
Pope Francis and all his predecessors, have their fingers deep in the monetary fraud scheme pie. They and Queen Elisabeth II, the privately-owned Vatican Bank, the national Banks of England, Scotland, France, Canada, and many other banks, have benefited themselves at the taxpayers’ expense via this institutionalised fraud scheme.
The taxpayers’ hard-earned money is transferred through The Rothschild-owned Central Bank to their privately-owned Bank of London, where it then is given to the privately-owned Vatican Bank and from there it is dispersed over their other Central Banks across the globe.
In the process, insiders’ pockets are lined handsomely and those of large corporations. Thereafter, these tax monies have to be borrowed back to finance their own governments with interest attached.
In other words; taxpayers have to borrow back their own - previously - paid tax money, but with interest charges added.
Be assured that almost every allied government has been involved in this scam, which will be proven once the central bank books are independently audited worldwide.
The Plan includes taking down the Deep State, including the Rothschild Banker Cabal’s money system, that owns and runs the Federal Reserve, and all other central banks worldwide, the IRS, tax agencies, treasuries, the IMF, BIS, World Bank, UN and countless other cabal-owned institutions: This will end the Deep State’s resources, their funding and thereby ultimately, their influence.
The Vatican Bank has been underwriting a corrupt banking system under its ancient Ruling Laws pertaining to unoccupied commonwealth properties. Multi-national banks were operating as security investment firms, whereas each bank controls patents and certain portions of the overall system.
Our overwhelming, uncontrollable and unstoppable mass awakening is what the world’s ruling elite fears the most, since we greatly outnumber them and their associates. They do not know how to deal with us, even with their advanced technologies.
So, the real question is, how do we become conscious? Actually, it is quite simple; you become conscious by choosing it. By acting on meaningful coincidences: Act on all that moves and inspires people. Act on and take action by listening to your inner-voice, coming from your soul; pay attention to intuitive feelings and drive.
Consciousness means coming from the heart, getting in touch with your intuition and consequently reaching a state of intuitive knowing. Hence, in contrast to accessing the internet, consciousness allows us to access our ‘inner net.’
Choosing to become conscious means detaching from the mind control programming; escaping the effects of the physical, mental, emotional and spiritual prison woven around us by governmental oppression.
The Conspiracy Theorists
The term “conspiracy theory” was created in the 1960’s with the purpose of deterring people from questioning the “official storyline” regarding President JFK’s assassination.
That has continued to be used with regard to UFO’s, alien life on Earth and elsewhere, 9/11, the Secret Space Programs, Black Budget money, the Deep State cabal, to name but a few. There are simply far too many subjects to name them all.
The terminology is used to discredit people who shine a light on the dark. It has been quite effective for those who are still asleep, sailing through life in blissful unawareness. It seems to strike fear in these people, so they walk away from anyone trying to show them or tell them the truth by shining a light on the dark.
The “un-awakened” and “unaware” even become angry and critical of those trying to show them the truth. They have been very well-trained to be faithful “sheep”, even warriors of the grand deception, thanks to frequent “mind-control” techniques.
Most of the people go to work on a daily basis and come home to watch their brainwashing TV’s to persist inside the perpetual cycle of their debt slavery system, which is a far cry from reality to say the very least.
Wake up and notice; that always and everywhere, the real purpose of government is, to enable the few to exploit the many. The money system is a clever way of doing so; President Trump’s trade barriers are much less subtle. The modern world of industry, commerce, and investment works on win-win software.
Never before in world history has such a great responsibility fallen onto the shoulders of a single person as was accepted by Donald Trump.
Never before have ‘We the People’ been called upon to act in unison with deliberation to prevent the outbreak of world war.
Hopefully, the provided background facts will improve people’s consciousness and inspiring readers to investigate news, using discernment and neglecting all negative information circulating about President Trump, the Patriots and Q-Anon.
Be positive and happy in Truth, understanding that finally, after tens of thousands of years, our slavery is coming to an end. It will become a better world for all of us.
However, unfortunately many people don’t want to hear the truth! The best thing one can do at this point in time is to inform oneself by undertaking the necessary research.
A good guide with detailed explanations and countless links for in-depth research, can be found here. Share this information with anyone who is, or can be, awake you know about.
The earlier we all are liberated. For the time being, the sleepers are still the biggest obstacle to the success of this historical revolution.
Judge Implicates Rothschild Family Partners In Elitist Sex Cult February 11 2019 | From: CollectiveEvolution / Various
In March of last year, Smallville actress Allison Mack was ‘outed’ for being a member of a cult and working in a management capacity.
Apparently, Mack’s job was to lure women into the program under the false pretense of female empowerment and self-help workshops.
The Facts: Smallville actress Allison Mack, and others are being 'protected' by billionaire Clair Bronfman, a family that has close ties to the Rothschild family, in the form of a defense fund. A judge has ordered a full disclosure of all who are contributing.
Reflect On: How many examples need to come out of politics, Hollywood, the Vatican, etc. for this topic not to be conspiracy and to spark a full, open and transparent investigation? What are our 'leaders' and 'role models' actually engaged in?
They were then convinced them to sign up for a more “advanced program” called Dominus Obsequious Sororium, which required these women to basically turn their lives over to the leader, Keith Raniere.
Dominus Obsequious Sororium is a quasi-Latin phrase that roughly translates to “Master Over The Slave Women.”
Raniere owns a company called NXIVM, which supposedly offers executive success programs, but clearly, that’s not the case. Raniere was also arrested, along with Mack, in March 2018 in Mexico on charges of sex trafficking.
He stands accused of raping girls as young as 12 years old, imprisoning a woman for 18 months, and more. He has been kept in federal custody in New York.
A few months after these revelations, billionaire Clare Bronfman was indicted on racketeering charges. These charges were connected to her role as “Operations Director” for NXIVM. Clare Bronfman is the daughter of Charles Bronfman, a Canadian / American businessman and philanthropist.
The Bronfman family has been referred to as the “The Rothschilds of the New World” by author Peter C. Newman, a well-known Canadian journalist and writer.
The Bronfman family has also been in business with the Rothschild family for quite some time.
One of many examples is their wealth management company, Bronfman Rothschild, which began in 1997 as Virchow Krause Wealth Management. After being rebranded as Baker Tilly Investment Advisors in 2009, the firm was then purchased together by the Bronfman and Rothschild families in 2013.
This is interesting to note because of the rumours regarding elite families like the Rothschilds and their involvement in elite level sex trafficking, pedophilia, and ritualistic abuse, which is a growing issue amongst global leaders and elitist groups including the Vatican.
Proof of the Vatican’s ties to these types of crimes has already emerged, with George Pell being the latest example; however, concrete proof of the Rothschilds and the Rockefellers involvement has yet to surface. But I feel it’s important to note these connections.
The most recent update in regards to the NXIVM case is that the prosecutors have now come forward saying that this billionaire heir (Clare) is protecting her partners with massive amounts of money through a defence trust fund.
As many of you reading this may know, these powers completely control mainstream news, which is why you won’t see much of this discussed by their media mouthpieces.
Nevertheless, it’s become too public to hide or try to cover up.
Prosecutors have said Bronfman set up the irrevocable trust to keep her fellow cultists in line as they head to trial by paying for top-notch defense attorneys.
Judge Nicholas Garaufis held an initial hearing on the issue last month, where he ruled that documentation related to everyone contributing to the trust must be turned over."
The key statement here is “everyone contributing to the trust.”
Bronfman has been outed as aiding cult leader Raniere to run his “self help” group, which prosecutors are alleging contained a secret inner circle of masters and slaves.
It will be interesting to see who else is contributing to the trust if their names are disclosed to the public.
Ritual Abuse
Although it’s not mentioned, what we are seeing here is ritualistic abuse at elite levels being sponsored by the richest people in the world.
Anybody who has looked into this subject knows just how big this issue has become, and how it drips all the way from the top, from the Vatican to the Royal Families, bleeding down into the world of the financial elite and into various sectors of governments. At least that’s my opinion based on my research.
This is why former United States Department of State official Steve Pieczenik recently tweeted that elite level pedophilia rings are “not shocking.” You can read more about that tweet here.
This information is also being exposed in the mainstream like never before.
One example is the NBC news report that implicated Hillary Clinton in covering up a massive pedophile ring in the heart of the State Department, and another is that multiple ex-high ranking political officials claimed that both of the Clintons have engaged in sex with minors, pointing toward their close relationship with Jeffrey Epstein (who also has Royal Family connections).
Epstein is now a registered sex offender, and thanks to his ‘Lolita Express,’ he’s exposed many other political figures and elitists involvement in these crimes as well.
Why is this important to know? It gives us insight into who leaders, politicians and people we give our power away to are in their current state. This is crucial in our awakening as you’ll see in these videos.
When it comes to the Vatican, similar activities have been going on for several years.
Right now, the Pope’s right-hand man, George Pell, is in court fighting sexual assault charges, and a massive pedophile ring has been exposed where hundreds of boys were tortured and sexually abused, and Pope Benedict’s brother was at the forefront of all of that controversy.
Vladimir Putin has also made comments in regards to Satanism and pedophilia within Western politics. You can read more about that here.
Not long ago, Australian Prime Minister Scott Morrison provided insight on this topic:
"The crimes of ritual sexual abuse happened in schools, churches, youth groups, scout troops, orphanages, foster homes, sporting clubs, group homes, charities, and in family homes as well."
Child sexual abuse is often systemic, organized, and highly promoted in many corners of the world by a central power structure that remains hidden from sight.
The thing about it is that governments are often part of the problem, and the institutions we’re supposed to trust to stop these acts refuse to do anything about it.
Allison Mack may be at the forefront of this sex cult, but she could also be a victim. For all we know, she could simply be taking the fall and is just another brainwashed slave that needs help, not punishment.
One thing that can’t be denied is that this type of activity has been going on in elitist circles for decades, including the people we elect and call our leaders. Many of these people are those in power and those who control our resources.
Despite all of these atrocities coming to light, it’s truly amazing to see this level of transparency surfacing within the mainstream.
The veils that were once used to blind and manipulate the masses are finally beginning to thin.
It can be hard to imagine any benefits resulting from such disheartening crimes, but the interview linked above with Anneke goes deep into the spiritual aspects of this issue and the overall transition that’s happening on this planet.
Disclosure is increasing, and not just regarding sex crimes, but in many other industries including Big Pharma and Big Food.
All of this is helping people get a clearer picture of what’s actually happening on our planet, who is in control, and why we need to shift power away from the financial elite and corrupt politicians and back to the people who have humanity’s best interests at heart.
Mainstream Media Assaults On Freedom Of Speech: “The Truth” Is No Longer “Important” & Google: Time To Kill Free Speech February 10 2019 | From: GlobalResearch / RedHeartland / Various
Alternative news sources have come under sustained attacks.
The New York Times unveiled a new slogan early in 2017 titled, “The truth is more important now than ever.”
It has acquired a seemingly noble motto but a perhaps contentious one if we examine the Times’ recent history.
Two international law specialists, Howard Friel and Richard Falk, published a book after the 2003 Invasion of Iraq called The Record of the Paper, which has scarcely been reviewed.
Friel and Falk focused on the Times due to the newspaper’s importance.
The authors point out that in 70 Times editorials on Iraq – from September 11, 2001 to March 20, 2003 – the words “international law” and “UN Charter” were never mentioned. The “truth” did not seem terribly “important” as the Times stood idly by in the destruction of Iraq.
Such was the barrage of propaganda directed at the American public that 69% believed Saddam Hussein was “personally involved” in the September 11 attacks.
That is a significant achievement in manipulation. The poll results must have been news to the Iraqi dictator himself, a forgotten one-time American ally.
Why Hussein would take it upon himself to orchestrate a surprise attack on the United States, of all nations, is anyone’s guess. Perhaps if he had a death wish but as later events proved he was not the suicidal type.
The Times was not alone in its position of selling the Iraq war to the American people, as television networks from Fox News to CBS and CNN were overwhelmingly pro-war.
Fox News, owned by Rupert Murdoch – who strongly backed the illegal conflict – placed a permanent US flag in the corner of the screen.
Fox employees were compelled to describe the invasion as “Operation Iraqi Freedom”, with hundreds of thousands of Iraqis later being killed.
The pattern continues into other illegitimate interventions as the liberal Guardian newspaper championed the demolition of Libya in 2011, with editorials imploring, “The quicker Muammar Gaddafi falls, the better.”
The Guardian encouraged NATO “to tip the military balance further against Gaddafi”, while later that year summarising that “it has turned out, so far, reasonably well” – by that point thousands had been killed.
In 2015 Ian Birrell, then deputy editor of the Independent, still assured his readers, “I would argue that Britain and France were right to step in [in Libya]. The failures came later on.”
Apparently it was fine for two old imperial powers to “step in” to shatter a sovereign nation, then afterwards absolve the invaders of blame with “the failures” only coming “later on”.
It’s a rare thing indeed to hear a prominent commentator question the balance of Western mainstream coverage.
The same voices can be heard piping up when alternative news sources take a different line not so palatable to their tastes.
Nick Cohen, writing in the Guardian, accused the network Russia Today (RT) of being a “propaganda channel” and that Russia was “prostituting journalism”. In the following sentence, Cohen describes the BBC and New York Times as being “reputable news organisations”.
Cohen firmly supported the Iraq war, writing at the time that “the Left betrays the Iraqi people by opposing war”, and “an American invasion offers the possibility of salvation”.
He was deemed not to be “prostituting journalism” in backing this violation of international law, nor when later supporting other interventions in Libya and Syria.
The BBC’s reputation, which Cohen previously claimed to be “reputable”, was dealt a blow when it was revealed by Cardiff University that the network “displayed the most ‘pro-war’ agenda of any broadcaster” with its coverage on the Iraq invasion.
Steven Erlanger of the New York Times described RT as “an agent of Kremlin policy” used to “undermine Western democracies” and to “destabilise the West” – failing to back up the claims with any evidence.
To gain perspective on these attacks, it may be worth pointing out a key excerpt from the First Amendment of the US Constitution: “Congress shall make no law… abridging [curtailing] the freedom of speech, or of the press.”
This law does not exist in Western democracies but attempts at limiting freedom of expression continue apace, while attacks on alternative media outlets by institutions of power grow.
It has reached a point whereby the French president Emmanuel Macron, shortly after assuming office, publicly attacked legitimate news sources of “behaving like deceitful propaganda”.
Perhaps the hidden concern about RT, for example, is its continued increase in both popularity and scope – with the channel enjoying a total weekly viewership of 70 million people and rising.
RT is available to viewers in Western heartlands such as Britain and the US, with eight million Americans watching the station each week.
It represents quite an achievement that a channel with the word “Russia”, featured in its title, can attract viewers in their millions, despite the growing anti-Russian sentiment espoused by the powers-that-be.
It is revealing that elite figures like Hillary Clinton have lamented in the past;
“We are in an information war and we are losing that war.”
For the first time in history, populations have broad access to alternative news angles – points of view that they likely find of a more balanced nature. Gone is the unchallenged monopoly on the public mind.
According to an 85-page internal company briefing fittingly titled “The Good Censor,” the American tradition of free speech is not an option.
In the briefing, Google acknowledges that it and other Silicon Valley platforms “control the majority of online conversations” and have actively taken a “shift towards censorship” in the wake of the 2016 presidential election and the rise of the political right in Europe.
Google has since tried to play it off as internal research and not an official company position…you know, like it’s official company policy to not censor conservatives. We’ll take this an admission of guilt.
“An internal company briefing produced by Google and leaked exclusively to Breitbart News argues that due to a variety of factors, including the election of President Trump, the “American tradition” of free speech on the internet is no longer viable.
Despite leaked video footage showing top executives declaring their intention to ensure that the rise of Trump and the populist movement is just a “blip” in history, Google has repeatedly denied that the political bias of its employees filter into its products.”
But the 85-page briefing, titled “The Good Censor,” admits that Google and other tech platforms now “control the majority of online conversations” and have undertaken a “shift towards censorship” in response to unwelcome political events around the world.
Examples cited in the document include the 2016 election and the rise of Alternative for Deutschland (AfD) in Germany.
Responding to the leak, an official Google source said the document should be considered internal research, and not an official company position.
Cancer Industry Plotting To Destroy The New Cancer Cure Developed By Israeli Scientists - The Attacks Have Already Begun February 9 2019 | From: NaturalNews
The moment that Israeli scientists announced they had discovered a universal cancer cure that worked with a single injection and required no toxic chemotherapy, radiation therapy or surgery, I said to myself, “The cancer industry is going to destroy this team of scientists.”
In exactly the same way that the scientists who announced the discovery of cold fusion in 1989 were vilified and slandered out of existence, the cancer establishment will destroy, discredit and defame any scientist who dares go public with the truth about reversing or curing cancer. (Read Cancer.news for daily news updates on cancer therapies that work.)
In fact, the attacks on the Israeli scientists have already begun (see below.)
“Our cancer cure will be effective from day one, will last a duration of a few weeks and will have no or minimal side-effects at a much lower cost than most other treatments on the market,” lead researcher Dan Aridor told the Jerusalem Post.
“We believe we will offer in a year’s time a complete cure for cancer.”
Almost immediately, the cancer establishment - run by wealthy, treacherous liars and villains who profit by denying humanity access to cancer prevention and cancer reversal treatments - began a massive negative P.R. campaign to smear the Israeli scientists.
This campaign will continue to escalate until these scientists are declared fraudsters and quacks, denied all funding and completely vilified on Wikipedia, Scientific American and everywhere else.
This is how the cancer establishment operates.
The cancer industry works overtime to vilify and destroy the careers of all scientists who discover cancer cures.
Have no doubts that these medical researchers will be vilified, de-funded, publicly smeared, defamed and ultimately labeled a fraud.
This is how the cancer industry - and the vaccine industry - always operates: Keep the disease going, and smear anyone who attempts to help humanity.
Why do you think Natural News is smeared by the cancer establishment? For all the same reasons: We help people reverse cancer, avoid cancer and stay healthy without resorting to toxic chemotherapy interventions that actually cause cancer.
Make no mistake: The last thing the cancer industry would ever want is a CURE for cancer. It would cost them billions in annual profits and put millions of people out of work worldwide.
In fact, the cancer industry does everything in its power to make sure cancer continues to get worse. Nearly every cancer “treatment” offered by the medical establishment, for example, is widely known to cause more cancer. (Chemotherapy and radiation.)
The cancer industry is a parasite on humanity, and it actively works against anyone who tries to educate the public about cancer prevention or help save lives with cancer reversal strategies that don’t make patients sick.
Watch my full report in this week’s hard-hitting Counterthink episode. Each week, I post a new Counterthink video that dares to tell the truth about a crucial issue that’s impacting our lives right now.
This week’s episode covers the Israeli cancer cure and why the for-profit cancer industry is working double time to try to discredit and destroy the work of the Israeli scientists who made their announcement.
European Union In Decay & More February 8 2019 | From: FinalWakeUpCall
The Yellow Vest Movement; The Destruction of Western Civilisation; Brexit is Inevitable; Our Liberation from the EU-World Prison; Changing the Monetary Guard
Maybe you are desperately trying to live by the mantra of “positivity thinking kills negativity,” or don’t want to appear like an ungrateful jerk when you receive the 3rd wedding invitation in the mail after your last messy breakup.
The unelected puppets in Brussels have every reason to be concerned about their future.
The Anti-EU forces are expected to greatly expand their grip. With Donald Trump as US President, the pro-European Muslim integration forces are facing big problems.
While trying to hold Eurosceptics at bay and with Europeans having had enough of being the slaves of Brussels, the establishment forces have to shift their policies towards national interests, a lesser role for the EU and its supranational structures.
People are unhappy; more than unhappy, they are angry.
They are demonstrating against Angela Merkel’s immigration policy, while the peaceful protesters are violently oppressed by police forces. Europe has become a highly authoritarian state of spineless cabal vassals.
Italy, Austria, Hungary, Bulgaria and Moldavia all voted for leaders who are against Merkel’s immigrant policy, called for the lifting of the sanctions and for improving relations with Russia.
Western big business has started to re-invest in Russia. They would never risk doing this if they were uncertain their investments would pay off.
EU is A Sinking Ship
Europeans can’t seem to imagine a libertarian alternative of private charities, limited government, minimal taxes, an unregulated economy, intellectual and psychological freedoms. This is another reason the EU-Continent is a sinking ship.
The average person is not even aware that the country known as Italy today was only created in 1861, as a consolidation of many completely independent and very different entities that had been separate states since the collapse of the Roman Empire.
Germany was only unified in 1871, out of scores of principalities, dukedoms, baronies, and so on. Both of the above mentioned unifications were very bad ideas; World Wars 1 and 2 are just the tip of the iceberg of a long list of reasons why that’s true.
There are over 200 nation-states in the world. The Globalist “elite,” the Deep State, and organisations like the EU in Brussels, would like to see a much smaller number of more powerful states, steadily moving forward towards a one-world government that they control.
But the actual trend, emanating from the spirit of the people, is in the opposite direction. The trend is the disintegration of nation-states everywhere.
There are separatist movements in big Western European countries, like the Basques and Catalans in Spain. And the Scots from the United Kingdom, who wish they weren’t quite so united with the UK.
There are many separatist movements, rarely reported in the mass media, truly dozens of secession movements throughout Europe and indeed, around the globe.
The Destruction of Western Civilisation
The breakup of the EU and the end of the Euro is just a matter of time and it could happen a lot faster than anyone expects.
The EU is already dying financially, with all the debt bankrupting governments, businesses and individuals. It is sinking economically, weighted down with oppressive regulations and taxation.
It also is being strangled demographically, with birth rates far below replacement levels, except among African and Muslim immigrants, who are not integrating and causing excessive tensions and apprehension among the Europeans.
The main reason for the social stress being that millions of migrants seem to expect free food, shelter, clothing, money, the rape of women, and hanging around in coffee houses all day long to complain.
The EU has long been a hotbed of religious, ethnic and racial wars. The Soros NGO-subsidised migration of Muslims and Africans into the EU is going to be one of the biggest problems for the next generation.
It’s a sure thing that not just millions, but tens of millions of “feet people” and “boat people” are going to try to overrun Europe. If they are accepted and resettled, it will destroy what’s left of Western Civilisation.
If it is prevented, it could result in millions of deaths, and be quite a scandal. It is not known how this will end, but it’s going to be a big, ugly catastrophe.
The Euro is doomed. It will reach its intrinsic value of zero. The euro will likely cease to exist by the end of the decade, most likely sooner than later. The best alternative for the protection of your euro-wealth, of course, is precious metals; gold and silver.
Draghi, who deserves the same fate bestowed on Hillary Clinton, is incompetent, and is acting in a completely predictable manner. It is important to minimise the quantity of your euro’s as much as possible, and to make a plan to get all out as quickly as possible when necessary.
It is likely to get a lot worse.
Rising interest rates, influenced by the stress in the debt markets and the imminent breakdown of the bond market, and higher real unemployment that will result in major problems in the global financial system, will be countered with massive money printing, which will lead to substantially higher levels of debt, as well as a vicious debt-cycle without an exit.
The Yellow Vest Movement
European business has lost all confidence in the Brussels EU Administration’s feeble and generally untrustworthy words.
Many breached their longstanding contracts with Iran, after the unsigned, crooked Iranian Nuclear Deal was not “renewed”, because of feared repercussions from Washington DC and the lack of trust in Brussels’ protection.
Case in point is the French-British petrol giant Total, which shifted its supply source from Iran to Russia, against Washington’s explicit wishes. However, the damage has been done. The EU-vassals are slowly committing suicide.
More than half of the Europeans want to get out of the maze of Brussels.
That’s why the ‘Yellow Vest” protesters are now up in arms and protesting everywhere in France, Germany, the UK, Belgium, the Netherlands, Italy, Hungary, Poland, New Zealand, with every week more countries following suit. It is being called the new French revolution, and this time, it is Global.
The latest in a series of US attacks on German businesses are the recent threats to German corporations with sanctions if they work on Nord Stream 2, the 1,200 km pipeline to double the capacity of Russian gas being brought to Europe, scheduled for completion by the end of this year.
In France, the Yellow Vests have been protesting since mid-November 2018 and up to now, they have endured 12 consecutive weekends of protests against Merkel’s slave dictator Macron, with his blatant arrogance for his citizenry.
The Yellow Vests and over 80% of the French population want nothing less than Macron’s resignation.
The number of Protesters are consistently and largely under-reported by the French media, as well as most of the world’s Fake Mainstream Media.
Most reporting on the various protests worldwide are kept at a bare minimum, with the emphasis invariably being placed on the number of protesters having been arrested, harmed or even killed.
This is all done by design to sow despondence in the hearts of people contemplating joining the protests.
One could look at this from a different viewpoint, namely; the media’s frenetic abstinence from reporting the truth on protests this widespread, while thousands of people are joining in this fight for our liberty, is a sure sign of their utter desperation.
This should serve as encouragement to persist. This grassroots movement is unstoppable.
To give an example of their fear of the power of the masses, to find out what transpires in the French yellow vest protests, one is forced to follow the RT-news crew where one can learn more about their ongoing efforts in detail.
The official French figure of protesters are 50,000 countrywide, when in reality this figure is at least three to four times higher.
They massage the numbers so that people believe that the Yellow Vest movement is diminishing, which it is not. Government-hired thugs cause violence, giving the police the green light to intervene with tear gas, water cannons and rubber bullets.
The riot police even shot a Yellow-vest protester in the Head from behind, proving they are carrying loaded, automatic weapons. In confirmation, President Macron is sending an increasing number of armed police to the streets to fight against the Yellow-vests.
RT reports: On Macron’s orders, the police are becoming more violent, using military suppression to control protesting French civilians. Thousands have been arrested, and hundreds injured by police brutality.
Nevertheless, the movement is gaining massive public support and the ‘Yellow Vest” idea is spreading throughout Europe and the globe at large, which is not being reported on in the MSM Polls show that over 80% of the French people back the Yellow Vest-movement and their idea of a Citizen Initiated Referendum (RIC), under which citizens could propose their own laws that would then be voted on by the general public.
The RIC could effectively bypass the French Parliament and even the EU and would be enshrined in the French Constitution. A similar law exists since 1848 in Switzerland and is regularly applied by Swiss citizens. It is a tool to Direct Democracy and any country calling itself a “democracy”, should include this in its Constitution.
Brexit is Inevitable
With respect to the ever-growing, louder debacle regarding BREXIT, nobody knows what Britain’s future is going to be. Propaganda and counter-propaganda is destined to further confuse the people.
Thousands are taking to the streets of London, organised by the People’s Assembly Against Austerity, calling for general elections to replace Theresa May and her failing Tory Government.
Out of solidarity, they are joined by numerous French Yellow Vests. Meanwhile, many of the UK protesters also wear the highly-conspicuous yellow vests.
Brexit is inevitable and is also irreversible as the Queen officially signed the bill last year under Earth Alliance demands for GESARA compliance.
Queen Elizabeth II has signed the official EU Withdrawal Bill into law, which will make Brexit irreversible and an ‘Act of Parliament’. This massive blow will completely derail George Soros’ campaign for a second referendum.
There is even a (Soros paid) movement of pro-EU-protesters, who demonstrate for the outcome of “remaining” in the EU, organised by Soros-funded members of the European Parliament.
For weeks, the Yellow Vest movement has spread across the globe. In Belgium and The Netherlands protests have been growing with the public’s discontent stemming from a similar disgruntlement – public discontent over austerity, EU-dictatorship over Belgian and Dutch sovereignty.
The Central Bank is scaring the people by maintaining that Brexit will be worse, with empty shelves in the shops and severe poverty. Think mirror, as it is always the opposite of what they say. Britain will prosper once freed from the EU-prison. And that will be an example for all other nations, that want to and are going to leave the EU.
The coalition of the 5-Star Movement in Italy and its smaller, right-wing brother, Lega Norte, is pulled to the far right by Lega’s Matteo Salvini, Deputy Prime Minister and Interior Minister.
Anti-immigration, Mr. Salvini is clearly calling the shots – and his alliance is firing strongly against Brussels and with good reason, as Brussels is attempting to impose rules on Italy’s budget, while the same rules do not apply equally to all EU member states.
For example, Macron, France’s Rothschild implant, has special privileges as far as budget overrun margins are concerned. Mr. Salvini’s anti-Brussels, anti-EU stance is no secret, and he has a lot of Italians behind him. A soon to manifest anti-EU Italian Yellow Vest movement is a real possibility.
The EU-Empire’s Vassal Castle is Crumbling
The former Soviet satellites, Hungary and Poland, have also turned against Brussels as they don’t appreciate the interference with their anti-immigration policy, and in Poland the interference regarding a controversial overhaul of the Judiciary system.
Discontent in Poland, as in Hungary of the public at large remains strong. Migration and the Judiciary are only the visible, false pretexts; the legendary tip of the iceberg.
The truth is on a deeper level, much deeper. These countries are both reminded of what they considered the Soviet Union’s handcuffs. “Freedom” will not be dictated by Brussels.
Governments talk endlessly about ‘Freedom’ and the ‘Free World’, all the while they are covertly selling us a prison without the bars.
What they are trying to sell to us is nonsense of course, but we, the people are being forced and coerced to believe it, for fear of us ultimately realising that in truth, we are living in a prison controlled by the few.
The most powerful form of dictatorship and control is the one you cannot see and are not aware of. As the saying of Johann von Goethe goes “None are more hopelessly enslaved as those who falsely believe they are free.”
People are given the illusion of freedom by being allowed to vote, but behind the scenes, the same few are in control whichever party of government is officially voted into office.
Democracy is supposed to be rule by the majority, which is a tyranny in itself, but it is not even that. It is the dictatorship by the few, hiding behind the smoke screen of a ‘free and open society’.
The hidden hand pulls the strings of those who appear to be in charge, making decisions.
The whole idea is to deceive the people into believing that they are free when they are fundamentally controlled. Nobody rebels about not being free when they believe that they are free.
If you are in a cell and you can’t see the bars, you think you are free to leave, until one day, you try that is, which most people never do. Now with Brexit, we are discovering that the Brits’ three-year-old referendum is being boycotted by Brussels on behalf of the Central Banks.
The curtain of the puppet masters has been drawn slightly and the true state of our non-existent democracy is being revealed. The masses are slowly waking up to the reality of our imprisonment.
If there is no Brexit deal and Britain leaves the EU, it would greatly prosper.
The cabal knows full well that every country would do much better without a Central Bank, and that is why they are so worried, meaning Brexit must be averted at all costs. Once one country shows they are doing better, all the other countries will want to follow.
In short; the Liberation of the People of the World is all about removing the cabal criminals and getting them out of the system.
Everything is related through a gigantic web of treason, paedophilia, financial corruption, and widespread criminality, facilitated through infiltration on every level and in all systems of society.
It is worth researching how much has already been accomplished in just two years of Trump in office. Remember, Trump and the patriots cannot bring too much attention to their plans.
The Q-movement was devised and introduced to prepare the people.
If they reveal more, then the enemy will know what the plans are too. By the same token, they don’t want to panic the people, which is why they are very careful about how to proceed.
Today’s Central Bank economy enslaves the people, which is why the transition into a people’s economy is already in progress, making sure we get rid of everything implemented by the old cabal guard.
Remember; President Trump has taken over the cabal’s magic wand, which leaves Central Banksters worrying about their independence. They are nervous about what is coming next as they are not anymore in the driver’s seat.
Trump Team knows the monetary system is breaking down. One can see it happening in real time in the housing market, as prices are falling. There will be a transition from old into new, from fiat Central Bank notes into sovereign gold backed monies.
President Trump and his Alliance are applying the Central Banks’ playbook against them. The CB-illusion is ending. New bilateral trade deals are being made, instead of cabal-WTO-deals.
These trade deals will better withstand the transition, while Trump is using the CB-plan to his advantage, for the good of the people.
In the meantime, many countries are moving away from the CB fiat debt dollar note in a synchronised fashion, with the knowledge that the C-Banks were preparing for an event which would thrust China into the seat of the next powerhouse, rendering the US the greatest loser.
As each country has the Deep State deeply entrenched in their money system; Trump Team must destroy the entire Rothschild CB monetary system worldwide by using gold in their move away from fiat currencies.
It is certain, there will be no continuation of the CB-plan, it is dead in the water. Many countries are taking on more gold, freeing themselves from their Central bank.
They know that Gold is a confidence builder. Once every country moves away from fiat money by using their own currency, backed by gold, silver or other hard assets, they will not need a Central Bank any longer.
China, Russia, India, Iran, as well as the US and countless others would be able to do it straight away. Gold will eventually destroy the private Rothschild CB-system worldwide. If major countries make this move in a synchronised way, the value of the gold will wipe out all the debt. Q has also stated that gold is going to destroy the Central Banks.
All this is of great importance, which is why everybody should become informed about what is changing, what is wrong and how it should or will be addressed.
Every awakened person who wants to join in this transition battle, by taking part in the process of breaking free from our prison and slavery, is encouraged to support President Trump, the Alliance team and the patriots worldwide.
Join the Q-movement in the crusade for the liberation of planet Earth from the globalists.
To better understand and learn what is truly going on in our world today, my book THE GREAT AWAKENING is an instructive guide, with countless links for individual, in-depth research.
This book has been purposely written as a crucial reinforcement guide for our liberation process, while it may certainly also prove to be very helpful for later cross-references.
The book covers a multitude of facets of today’s corrupt world, and offers a vast array of solutions for the necessary changes that will be needed and implemented.
To be continued, stay tuned.
Three Reasons Why Positive Thinking Is Making You More Miserable, And How To Have True Happiness In Life February 7 2019 | From: JulietTang
Are You Faking It? Have you ever forced yourself to be positive when you really wanted to punch a pillow or tell the world to screw off instead?
Maybe you are desperately trying to live by the mantra of “positivity thinking kills negativity,” or don’t want to appear like an ungrateful jerk when you receive the 3rd wedding invitation in the mail after your last messy breakup.
Perhaps you obsess over teachings from Law of Attraction gurus about cultivating positive thoughts so you can attract positive things, or feel ashamed to show your true feelings because every person on your social media is smiling like Christmas came early for them and makes you question your own sanity.
I have committed almost every single one of the “forced positivity” listed above in the past, and much more.
Don’t get me wrong, positive thinking is a beautiful thing, and it is essential for all of us to take care of our vibration for multiple reasons. However, being fixated on the idea “I must think positive regardless of how I am truly feeling” may just make you more miserable.
Why? And how to turn it around?
1. It Creates Bypassing
I cannot tell you how much spiritual bypassing forced positivity has created in many which often results in increased anxiety and self-blame leading to inevitable self-doubt of, “What is wrong with me and shouldn’t I be more grateful?”
In case you are not familiar with spiritual bypassing, it is when we skip the necessary self-work in order to chase after the end result of that work which usually is genuine joy, inner-peace, bliss, etc.
The goodness which we all desire in life is more of a result of having performed a deep emotional house cleaning to free ourselves from baggage. So when you are constantly avoiding the unwanted emotions stemming from past wounds and current experiences, you are actually skipping the work you need in order to get to that good feeling place!
Worse, that energy you try so hard to bypass is not going anywhere when you sweep it under the rug and will come back again and again to bite you in the butt until it is processed.
This is one of the reasons why those who rely solely on affirmations or meditation as means of escape without having confronted their inner demons find it difficult to achieve the same results after a while, and the reason is because they are not meant to be used as spiritual band-aids.
Solution: Let it Out
Emotion is Energy in Motion. As Einstein stated long ago, “Energy cannot be created or destroyed, it can only be changed from one form to another.”
That means, when you experience the energy of anger, fear or anything you deem unpleasant, if your first reaction is to engage the often-times unconscious defense mechanisms (dissociation, projection, denial, repression, etc) in order not to feel, that energy which has a specific frequency gets stored in the body and does not have any opportunity to be released, processed or integrated.
The more you avoid facing negative emotions, the more that energy gets trapped in your system which creates all kinds of havoc. When this is done chronically, it creates energy blockages in your energy centers which manifest as mental, emotional and physical ailments.
A burning question you may have as you are reading this is, “Doesn’t the act of dwelling in negativity damage my health?”
The answer is an absolute yes. So here is the difference: when you are constantly throwing pity parties, you are coming from an unconscious victim mentality and perpetuating the victimhood cycle.
If you, however, choose to set a time aside in a safe setting with the intention of honoring how you are feeling and being present with your emotions, you have stepped into the shoes of a conscious creator. These two vibrations are drastically different!!
Don’t be surprised to experience a pleasant shift in your energy when you truly embrace your emotions, and that is when you are more receptive to creative insights.
I personally find when I fully allow myself to feel whatever comes up, after a while, it usually leads to genuine calmness and inner peace.
2.It Creates More Negative
Many who have an incomplete understanding of Law of Attraction (technically, it is Laws of Attraction since there are multiple universal laws in operation when it comes to using thoughts to create reality) believe since like attracts like, we need to always be in a joyful state in order to attract more awesomeness into life.
While this is all true, what you may not be aware of is that all the goodness in life only gets attracted to you if you have the energy of genuine, as opposed to forced positivity.
Given over 90% of your mental capacity is dominated by the unconscious mind which is the seat of all beliefs, experiences, memories and intuition, and since beliefs and thoughts create corresponding emotions, it doesn’t really matter what you are attempting to do with the limited conscious mind if you cannot take care of what is going on in the unconscious.
That means when the guy next door successfully sells all the spots for his upcoming luxury spiritual retreat, and your first reaction is, “Who does he think he is, that materialistic fake,” but instead you shove concepts like “love thy neighbor” and “we are all swimming in a giant soup of Oneness” down your throat in order to avoid feeling the unpleasant emotions of judgment and jealousy, that energy which comes from an underlying and most likely unconscious belief of lack will always come back to haunt, and create more lack.
You do not attract what you think you need or want. You attract who you are - your most predominant energy.
Solution: Dive Deeper
After allowing yourself to feel, it is worth to do a bit of self-inquiry such as “Why am I feeling jealous? Is it because I believe life is unfair, or the guy is luckier and more capable than I am?
It may then become, “I wish my parents were rich and gave me their business so I don’t have to struggle in life.”
Keep going. Write down every layer of your thoughts. Bebrutally honest.
Eventually, ask yourself, “What is it that I must have to believe in about myself and the world in order to create my initial reaction? It probably will look something like, “I believe the world is full of lack and I cannot receive everything I want” or “I believe prosperity is only for nasty and greedy folks instead of the kind ones.”
Now the party really begins. It boils down to taking complete self-responsibility, and turning every light on in your emotional house and giving the space a thorough inspection to see what limiting beliefs are generating unpleasant emotions, and what you can do to reprogram them rather than forcing yourself to fake happiness and acceptance.
3. Negativity Serves a Higher Purpose
I use the terms good/bad and positive/negative rather loosely in my speech as everything is relative in life. There is no true positivity or negativity from the perspective of your higher self because it only sees perfection in all; in this life, however, there is what serves you, and what doesn’t.
Some of the best things in my life came out of embracing the most negative experiences.
When I was at my last soul-sucking job under two bosses that resembled the relentless Agents from the Matrix, I kept on telling myself to look at the positives such as “I got a pay check” (so I could put food on the table, have a roof to sleep under and wake up miserable again, yay) or “I worked close to home” (which enabled me to spend more time sulking and complaining about the Agents and the killer sentinels over texts with coworkers).
After a decade of forced positivity while having made myself a permanent home at rock bottom, I finally realized I was trying to conceal burning coals with a thin piece of paper that said, “This isn’t so bad, just look at the positives.”
Eventually, the fire blew up and led to a series of most scary yet miraculous decisions in my life that allowed me to reclaim my freedom in every way.
Along the path, I have encountered dear and courageous souls who after embracing the negativity in their lives be it cancer, addictions or failed suicide attempts, are dedicating their lives to service humanity by creating campaigns to support research for psychedelics or opening spiritual retreats to inspire and empower others.
Solution: Use Negativity as a Springboard
Contrary to the common belief, there is nothing frightening about negative emotions because emotions cannot hurt you. Emotions are components of your internal guidance system which is an extension of Universal Intelligence. Whenever you feel, you are literally receiving an intuition from your higher self as to whether you are heading in a direction that is aligned with it, or meandering too far from it.
Ultimately, every negative emotion and rock bottom serves the purpose of revealing to you that you alone have the power to choose the quality of your life whether it is to change the direction of your course, or change your perspective of how you experience things.
You can either continue to convince yourself to stay positive while bury your true emotions, or face whatever situation you are in head-on, own it with absolute sincerity and 100% responsibility, then do something about it.
Complete and utter liberation follows the moment you whole-heartedly own everything that shows up in your life as something you have created on some level whether consciously or unconsciously.
By confronting your worst nightmares and inviting the emotions as well as the lessons underneath into your life, you are reclaiming your infinite power of creation and announcing to the universe, "I created that, now I can use that power to create something else.”
Just like that, the negativity you have been afraid to face can now set you free.
Some Final Thoughts
We are taught to fear the shadow because we do not truly understand it. Those who dive into the shadow with curiosity and openness will always discover hidden keys to wisdom and greater liberation for the simple reason that darkness in life is not meant to crush you, it is meant to invite you into this space where the old can be destroyed so the new can be built.
It is meant to wake you up.
“The ego says, ‘I shouldn’t have to suffer,’ and that thought makes you suffer so much more. It is a distortion of the truth, which is always paradoxical. The truth is that you need to say yes to suffering before you can transcend it.”
– Eckhart Tolle
The Silver Bullet To Stop The Corporate State Pillage
February 6 2019 | From: Geopolitics / Various
Every year some US soldiers decide they don’t want to shoot people they don’t know so that ExxonMobil can have more oil or Lockheed Martin can make more cash or MSNBC/Fox News can give their hosts topics for their poetry books.
Basically, these soldiers do something horrifying, something terrible, something often called “treasonous” … They - wait for it - think for themselves! (Glass shatters. Woman screams. Baby cries.)
Nothing is more frightening for our endless war machine than a military grunt who thinks for him or herself.
They’re supposed to do nothing more than follow orders. They’re supposed to ask a superior officer for permission to wear a different color pair of socks.
That’s right - the biggest, toughest gladiators in our society have to get authorization to switch from boxers to briefs.
I’ll get to what this has to do with our inverted totalitarian corporate pillaging in a moment.
One of the more notable soldiers who stood up this year was Spenser Rapone - a second lieutenant discharged on June 18, 2018, for disparaging the US war machine online and promoting a socialist revolution.
(Clearly our enormous globe-spanning military complex can obliterate any possible enemies except independent thought, which promptly turns it to a mush akin to pea soup.)
Apparently reading about the true story of Pat Tillman pushed Rapone toward the realization that he was a pawn in the middle of a massive lie.
“Pat Tillman showed me I could resist the indoctrination,” Rapone said. “I did not have to let the military dehumanize me and turn me into something monstrous. When I learned how his death was covered up to sell the war, it was shocking.”
To sell the war. Why is it they would need to sell a war? Oh, I know - because it’s completely unjustifiable.
For activities people naturally agree with or enjoy doing, you don’t have to advertise them. Like you don’t see ads saying, “Hey, feed your kids… Don’t forget.” Or a commercial saying, “Try having sex some time. It’s fun!”
That stuff comes pretty naturally.
But you do need promotion (Read: media propaganda) for our endless war games because it does not come naturally to most of us.
War comes naturally to sociopaths, and then it’s sold to the rest of us, much like a used car or an ill-advised timeshare in Cleveland.
But the military is not the only place where conscientious objectors play a role.
It might be the only one where walking away can get you locked up in prison spending your days sewing McDonald’s uniforms, but there are a lot of moments in our messed-up world when you can turn your back and do the right thing.
For example, fewer and fewer people are willing to do the job of killing millions of animals every year. A recent report:
"Revealed that staff shortages at slaughterhouses [in the UK were] threatening Christmas sales. Some 10,000 positions are unfilled at major abattoirs…
The report explains that for most potential applicants, the industry’s low pay is not the problem but that ‘people simply do not want to do this work anymore.’”
Oh come on, you fragile snowflakes! “Ewww, I can’t handle chopping the heads off a thousand pigs a day. It hurts my feelings to end the life of hundreds of sentient beings who haven’t done anything to me to warrant such treatment.
WAAH! I don’t like loading buckets of adorable chickadees into the grinding colander so they can be turned into a meat milkshake that will ultimately be served to a labradoodle or a puggle. BOO HOO HOO!” (I might have made up the term “grinding colander.”)
In all seriousness, working at the killing fields of a factory farm has life-long impacts that no one talks about. (And by “no one,” I mean the media and our politicians and most everybody else.) As the Guardian reported,
Slaughterhouse work has been linked to a variety of disorders, including post-traumatic stress disorder and perpetration-induced traumatic stress.
One pig slaughterer said the ‘worst thing’ about the work is its ‘emotional toll’… A worker at a chicken plant said one of his colleagues was ‘hauled off to the mental hospital’ after he ‘kept having nightmares that chickens were after him.’”
(It’s tough to say what the chickens would’ve done with him had they caught him. Professional torture is made difficult by a lack of hands.)
These workers who have walked off the killing floors should be honored as conscientious objectors. They should be rewarded for realizing it’s better to get paid to hand out coffees at the coffeehouse than death sentences at the slaughterhouse.
And conscientious objection happens in the big tech world too. This past May, a dozen Google employees quit to protest the company’s role in drone-killing technology created for the Pentagon, and another 4,000 signed an internal petition to stop the partnership.
There have been many great objectors in our police forces, too. Captain Ray Lewis was in the Philadelphia police force for 23 years. Then he became an outspoken critic of police abuse, militarization, excess force and the inequality that has hollowed out our society like an aggressive virus.
He shows up to protests in full uniform and stands on the front lines to help remind the other cops what they should be protecting - and it’s not oil pipelines or Wall Street banks.
Perhaps most importantly, he does it all with a mustache that looks like it houses squirrels in the winter. It’s quite possible that without the facial hair, not a single police officer would give a s***. However, you can really reach a cop through his ‘stache. (Sorry, his or her ‘stache.)
Conscientious objectors even show up in the grand hallways of the famously lockstep mainstream media outlets.
Just last week, veteran national security journalist William Arkin left his job at NBC and MSNBC and basically blasted them in an open letter:
"For becoming captive and subservient to the national security state, reflexively pro-war… and now the prime propaganda instrument of the War Machine’s promotion of militarism and imperialism.”
Of course, anyone who regularly reads independent outlets like Truthdig would probably say Mr. Arkin is roughly 30 years late to this realization.
Yet it still takes nerve, gonads and a spine to turn against your employer while calling them out for manufacturing consent for hundreds of thousands of innocent deaths. (Certain types of deep-water fish are made up of only nerves, gonads and a spine, and they’re constantly being insolent to their employers.)
The truth is, we the people may not have that much power. We don’t control our democracy anymore now that every decision is based on money.
We can’t instantly change the entire system. But we have one very powerful tool - we have the power of our labor.
Millions of Americans, and hundreds of millions worldwide, work for corporations or organizations that do evil every single day. This list includes:
People at the big banks that fund the destruction of our world
Officials sent to steal children from their mothers and fathers
People working at big oil companies, pushing papers while knowing we only have 11 years left to completely change our behavior
Soldiers told to drone bomb a guy they’ve never met before
Merchants in charge of selling Kid Rock T-shirts
The list is endless, and ALL of these people have the ability to say “I object. I will not help with your villainy.”
If they all objected - we would see a different world overnight.
This column is based on a monologue Lee Camp wrote and performed on his TV show ‘Redacted Tonight’.
< Service Interrupted >
February 5 2019 | From: WakeUpKiwi
Occasionally one just runs out of resources.
Perhaps today, take the opportunity to delve deeper into the various sections of this website that you may not have visited before.
Or another website - and maybe if you can find something that you feel to be of worth sharing with others you may know, give it a nudge.
You can lead a horse to water, but you cannot make it drink.
We will all find the truth in the end.
Breaking The Shackles Of Social Conditioning February 4 2019 | From: TheUnboundedSpirit
What do a hooligan, a kamikaze, and a racist have in common? None of them use their brain.
What I mean by “they don’t use their brain” is that they don’t think - or, to be more precise, they don’t think critically.
But it’s not only they that don’t. In fact, most people are no different when it comes to this.
Sure, we all have our thoughts, and over the years have formed certain opinions. But how many of those opinions are merely beliefs resulting from social conditioning, and how many of them are based on our own understanding? And, of course, we know a lot of things, but how much of our knowledge comes from personal experience, and how much from parrot-like learning?
You see, from almost the day we were born, we were forced to not think. Take school, for example - an institution that supposedly helps children develop their intellect yet does quite the opposite.
School forces children to stay confined in a classroom for about 8 hours almost every single day for a total of (more or less) 12 years, where they are learning things they don’t enjoy learning, being forced to obey to authority figures, having to unquestionably accept what they’re being taught, not being allowed the freedom to do anything on their own without asking for permission first (even to go to pee).
As Pink Floyd would say, school conditions children to become “another brick in the wall”.
The official 1982 video clip of Pink Floyd’s Another Brick in the Wall.
I know, I’m generalizing here, since not all schools are the same. But the reality is that in most parts of the world school isn’t a place where critical thinking is stimulated - on the contrary, it is suppressed or simply ignored. Naturally, it atrophies and becomes weak, exactly like a muscle does when pressure isn’t exerted upon it.
Observe people around you and you might come to see the consequences of our educational system. They are living unconsciously, not knowing why they think and behave the way they do. They accept and act without second thought on what the media is presenting them as the truth.
They believe in and follow the religious dogmas without having any solid evidence supporting their beliefs. They wholeheartedly support political leaders and obey to the decisions they make without the slight resistance. I could go on forever giving similar examples, but these will suffice for now.
As a result of our social conditioning, corporations exploit our emotional insecurities so they can sell us their products and services, making us compete with our fellow human beings about who has more stuff. So-called journalists are selling us lies by utilizing propaganda tactics through the mainstream media, turning us into mindless puppets.
Priests and religious teachers of all sorts gain power by selling us heaven in the afterlife, dividing us into in-groups and out-groups that fight against one another in the name of god. Politicians gain power by selling us heaven on Earth, also splitting us into opposing groups that fight against each other in the name of ideology. And, again, these, are just a few examples.
Our social conditioning has turned us into mindless, obedient puppets
If we realize these consequences, and are truly willing to change our way of living for the benefit of ourselves and the world, we need to develop the courage to escape the herd mentality and start thinking for ourselves - and the sooner we do, the better.
Of course, that’s easier said than done, since our social conditioning has gone very deep and is affecting us in ways we can’t even recognize. However, with conscious, persistent effort, it’s definitely possible to do so. If you’re interested to know how exactly, here are some basic practical steps you can take right now:
Question Your Beliefs, no Matter How Much You Cherish them
In order to release yourself from the prison of social conditioning, the first and most crucial thing you need to do is question any beliefs that you unconsciously took on from your parents, teachers, and culture. That’s because beliefs can bring all kinds of limitations in life, such us irrational fear and the sense of having to live according to what’s right for someone else but not for you.
No matter how much you might cherish a belief, ask yourself the following questions:
“Where did this belief come from?”
“Is there any logical reason for holding it?"
“Is it limiting myself in any way or is it elevating the quality of my life?”
Take, for example, religious beliefs.
Assuming that you consider yourself religious, and you believe that the dogma of your religion is the only true and right one, and that those who hold different belief systems to yours are evil and doomed to go to hell, ask yourself:
“What is the logical basis for holding these beliefs?”
“Did I reach to them using critical thinking, or did I just accept them as truth merely because I was indoctrinated from my early education?”
“Are they serving my happiness or are they contributing to my suffering?”
These are some very important questions that you need to ask about any beliefs that you might hold in dear faith, whether they’re concerning religion, philosophy, politics, economics, or other field of knowledge.
By doing so, you’ll decondition yourself from negative social programming, which will allow you to grow in understanding, take in emerging information and make wiser choices. In addition, you’ll be able to better understand others’ beliefs without judging them based on a fixed mind-set.
Never be afraid to question your beliefs. To doubt what you think you know is a sign of intelligence, and only those who are courageous enough to do so can break free from the shackles of social conditioning and walk on the path of wisdom.
Rebel Against Authority and Accept Responsibility for Your Life
For most of us, it has become a habit to have others tell us what to think and how to behave. We don’t think for ourselves - instead, we let others do it for us and take responsibility for our lives. Not surprisingly, we are intellectually weak and have lost control over our actions.
It seems that we allow others to dictate us how to live because we don’t want to take the burden of responsibility on our shoulders - so we throw it on them. To be responsible for your life can be troublesome, because you have to use your mind a lot, take important decisions and face failure when you make the wrong choices.
To avoid that, most of us choose to let other people - such as politicians and religious leaders - do those things for us, as if they are our saviors.
Then, we blame them entirely for anything that’s going wrong with our lives - it’s only their fault, we claim, without stopping for a second and think that perhaps it’s actually ours.
Are you courageous enough to remove the blindfold of faith?
If you want to escape the matrix of social conditioning and reclaim your freedom, you need to stop letting others control you like a mindless automaton and instead start being responsible for your actions. This might be a difficult thing to do, yet it’s the only way to choose your own path in life.
Seek Truth,Regardless of How Arduous that Might be
If you’ve questioned your beliefs, chances are that you’ve come to the realization that most of them were just imposed on you by society and don’t in fact reflect your personal experiences and understanding.
And although this does wonders to help you develop your critical thinking skills and break down the walls of social conditioning, it doesn’t answer the question of whether those beliefs actually hold any truth or not. To answer that, we need to seek truth by doing research.
Let’s take drug addiction as an example. Our social conditioning has led most of us to believe that drugs are causing addiction.
This is a belief we hold since our early childhood but rarely one of us stops for a second to contemplate why that is so. If we do some basic research on the issue, we’ll come to find out that, although drugs do play a significant role in addiction, there aren’t actually causing it; rather, taking drugs is merely a symptom of addiction.
According to health experts, emotional trauma has been identified as the root cause of addiction, whether that is to pornography, video games, gambling, or drugs. If you weren’t aware of this, and would like to find out more about the nature of addiction, here’s a great Ted talk for you:
‘Everything you think you know about addiction is wrong.’ - Johann Hariss
The problem is that people don’t usually like to think for themselves and do any research. One reason for that is that they find it exhausting and not worth their time. Another reason is that they find it threatening to their worldview.
You see, when people are attached to certain beliefs that aren’t based on critical thinking and scientific understanding, doing research might prove them wrong, and so many choose not to know the truth at all, lest it will shatter their beliefs.
Thus, living in ignorance yet thinking they know, they can’t grow into wiser individuals and are unconsciously spreading untruths.
If you’re a lover of wisdom, you’ll need to actively search for truth, no matter how difficult that might be. You’ll need to think a lot and educate yourself. You’ll need to read books, watch documentaries, listen to talks, take part in discussions, or use other tools that can assist you in your journey to expanding your understanding of reality.
Lastly yet most importantly, you’ll need to be ready to accept the truth when you encounter it, no matter if it contradicts your long-held beliefs.
The journey to truth might at times be rough, but it’s definitely worth taking
By questioning your beliefs, rebelling against the herd and thinking for yourself, you’ll be able to free your mind from the constraints of blind conformity and dogmatic ideology.
This way you’ll be able to better understand yourself and the world you live in, as well as to take responsibility for your life, without being easily fooled, exploited or manipulated by power-hungry individuals who care about nothing but their personal gain.
Top Ten Facts About The Vaccine Industry That The Dishonest Media Refuses To Report February 3 2019 | From: NaturalNews / Various The mainstream media is largely funded by drug companies and vaccine manufacturers and demonstrates extreme conflicts of interest in reporting on vaccines.
Perhaps that’s why dishonest media outlets refuse to report the following ten stunning facts about the vaccine industry that are all provably true.
FACT #1.Mercury is still used in vaccines, and the CDC openly admits it. There is NO safe level of mercury for injecting into a human child. Not even “trace” levels.
There is NO evidence of safety for mercury at any dose whatsoever.
Any doctor who says the level of mercury in a vaccine is “safe” to inject into a child is only demonstrating their outrageous ignorance of scientific facts.
Mercury is arguably the most neurotoxic element on the entire Table of Elements. It is used in vaccines for the convenience of the vaccine manufacturer at the expense of the safety of the child. Any doctor who injects mercury into a child - at any dose! - should be immediately stripped of their medical license.
See the list of studies on the neurotoxicity of mercury at SCIENCE.naturalnews.com, now the largest relational research resource for chemicals, health, nutrients and drugs.
Additional FACT: There is no “safe” form of mercury as is often ridiculously claimed by vaccine pushers.
Both ethyl and methyl mercury are extremely toxic to the human nervous system. Neither should, under ANY circumstances, be deliberately injected into a human child at any dose whatsoever.
FACT #2. Injecting any substance into the human body makes it orders of magnitude more potentially toxic because it bypasses the protections of the digestive tract or the respiratory system.
Injecting mercury into a human being - at any dose - should be globally condemned as a criminal act.
That it is currently considered an acceptable act in the field of medicine only condemns the true destructive nature of modern medicine. Under the vaccine doctrine, “First do no harm” has become “Poison children for profit.”
FACT #3. For decades, polio vaccines injected into tens of millions of people actually contained hidden cancer viruses (SV40 and others). This was openly admitted by a top Merck vaccine scientist named Hilleman.
FACT #4.Top virologists working for Merck have blown the whistle and gone public with shocking revelations that claim the company routinely fabricated lab results to claim a 95% efficacy rate of its mumps vaccine in order to continue receiving government contracts on a vaccine that didn’t work.
See the False Claims document these scientists filed with the U.S. government here: naturalnews.com/gallery
FACT #6. The claimed history of vaccine “successes” against polio and other diseases is a pure fabrication. This is discussed and exposed in great detail in the powerful book, “Dissolving Illusions” by Dr. Suzanne Humphries. Click here to see the book at Amazon.com, or click here to visit the website (and view the charts).
As these charts show, measles was almost completely eradicated before the arrival of the measles vaccine. Why the decline?
Mostly due to improvements in public hygiene and sanitation. It’s no exaggeration to say that good plumbing saves more lives than vaccines ever did.
FACT #7.The vaccine industry refuses to conduct scientific tests on the health outcomes of vaccinated children vs. unvaccinated children. Why?
Because these test would no doubt show unvaccinated children to be healthier, smarter and far better off than vaccinated children in terms of behavioral disorders, allergies and even autoimmune disorders.
Check the people you know: Don’t you routinely find that the most heavily-vaccinated kids are the ones who get sick all the time?
FACT #8. The U.S. Supreme Court has already declared that the secret “vaccine court” is a higher power than the Supreme Court. The so-called “vaccine court” is granted extraordinary powers to operate utterly outside the Constitution, the Bill of Rights and completely outside the rules of due process and law.
The vaccine court itself - which isn’t even a court of law - is a violation of law and a violation of basic human rights. It must be abolished like Apartheid.
FACT #9.The mainstream media receives a significant portion of its revenues from the very same drug companies selling vaccines. This financial influence results in the media refusing to cover stories about vaccine-damaged children for fear of losing advertising revenues.
This is why the mainstream media frequently features guests and authors who ridiculously claim that all the vaccine damaged children across America do not exist or are “mere delusions” of their parents.
These despicable vaccine apologists are intellectual bullies who, like Hitler’s minions, relish in aiding and abetting a real-life holocaust that’s harming millions of children around the globe.
All of these substances are toxic to human biology when injected. All of them are still listed on the CDC website as vaccine additives.
There is no rational doctor or scientist in the world who can say they believe injecting infants and children with mercury, formaldehyde, MSG and aluminum is somehow “safe,” yet doctors inject children with these substances every single day in the form of vaccines.
Doctors who inject children with vaccines are delusional. They are practicing a medical holocaust against humanity while fraudulently calling it “immunization.” For the record, vaccination does not equal immunization. Click here to see the book of the same title.
Corporate-Controlled “Science” Isn’t Real Science At All
The real truth is that science never has a monopoly on facts, and science makes enormous mistakes (such as condoning smoking cigarettes) on a regular basis. Science is also for sale and easy corrupted by corporate interests.
Peer-reviewed science journals, too, are often little more than a collection of corporate-funded make-believe science tabloids.
“It is simply no longer possible to believe much of the clinical research that is published, or to rely on the judgment of trusted physicians or authoritative medical guidelines,” writes the former editor of The New England Journal of Medicine, Marcia Angell.
“I take no pleasure in this conclusion, which I reached slowly and reluctantly over my two decades as an editor of The New England Journal of Medicine,” she says in Drug Companies & Doctors: A Story of Corruption.
With that in mind, take a look at the similarities between Big Tobacco science lies and vaccine industry science lies: Related Articles:
Propaganda, Human Consciousness, And The Future Of Civilization February 2 2019 | From: Medium / Various
A duck floats past two fish, looks down and says “Morning boys! How’s the water?”
The fish swim on for a bit, then one of them turns to the other and says, “What the fuck is water?”
Corporatist propaganda is to western civilization what water is to fish. Our culture is saturated in it; it informs so many levels of our worldview and most of us never even examine any of them. It informs all aspects of culture, from our beliefs about what’s going on in the world to our understanding of history to what issues we think we’re supposed to care about on a given day to what opinions we think we’re allowed to choose from.
People think they know what’s going on in their society, why their country fought this or that war, how their nation’s government and economy operate, when really they don’t know any of those things. All their most basic assumptions about their world, their culture, and even who they are as individuals is fully pervaded by mass media propaganda narratives.
In early tribal cultures, humans depended on campfire stories passed on from one generation to the next to tell them what the world is and how to interpret their experiences in it.
Now that role has fallen exclusively to a few highly consolidated corporate media conglomerates whose billionaire owners have a vested interest in maintaining the warmongering plutocratic power establishment that is loosely centralized in the United States, because in that power establishment they get to live as kings.
The “Nazis are taking over America” moral panic is the most hysterical that the people of the United States have been since the November election results rolled in. Not even at peak Russia hysteria has the general public been so emotionally invested in something so grossly unsubstantiated.
Even most of the woke lefties who didn’t buy into the ridiculous Russia narrative swallowed the core message being promulgated by corporate media hook, line and sinker. Few questioned why the entire mass media had converged upon Charlottesville long before anyone died.
Few bothered researching to what extent white supremacist groups were holding demonstrations and committing hate crimes throughout the entire Obama administration or asking why those lacked similar coverage. It’s been a nationwide garment-rending psychotic break from coast to coast, and very few people stopped to ask themselves where their ideas were originating from.
There has just been a solar eclipse, so maybe people being outdoors with their neighbors and coworkers looking at something together was enough of a reality check to break the spell, but if the narrative hasn’t done its job already the talking heads on TV will be pushing them back into it by the morning.
This sort of thing is happening constantly. Virtually all political perspectives in mainstream America are formed by propaganda either directly or indirectly, but if you talk about the solution to the status quo being a shift in human consciousness people get impatient and dismissive.
They’ll accuse you of offering impractical airy-fairy spiritual-sounding solutions about “getting woke” that only have any relevance to a tiny fraction of the population. “We need real solutions! How do we organize? Should we start a new political party? We need a district-by-district plan!”
They’re fish in water. They don’t realize that every move they make is happening inside this ubiquitous bubble of deceit that is specifically designed to redirect energy and attention toward narratives which favor the establishment.
No matter how awesome and pragmatic your idea is, they’ll always be perceived by the general public through a filter of lies which contradict it, and it will have to be actualized within a society that is fully blinkered by narratives tilted to favor the ruling class.
Related:Houston Rescue Images Destroying Media’s Race Narrative
“Getting woke” is not some lofty, impractical attainment accessible only to a small clique who has read the right books and experimented with the right psychedelics and meditated at the feet of the right Hindu masters.
It’s a simple matter of seeing through untruths that you had previously mistaken for truths, and, at least on a political level, the bulk of the untruths that the average person carries around with them were put there either directly or indirectly by establishment propaganda. Facilitating a worldwide transformation of human consciousness is as simple as disrupting the stories that humans are being told by those in power.
Of course, just because something is simple doesn’t mean that it’s easy. As we discussed recently, there’s a century of high-budget research and development feeding into the science of these advanced social manipulations, and there’s an unfathomably powerful class with a vested interest in keeping those manipulations up and running.
But since the oligarchy rules by creating the illusion of freedom and democracy using propaganda it is by far the weakest point in its armor, and with the democratization of information available to our society via unprecedented internet access a populist information rebellion could definitely kill all public trust in the lie factory. This would ruin an essential foundation of the oligarchy.
There is no political solution to an oligarchy which owns the entire political system, but the oligarchy cannot rule without its propaganda machine.
Public trust in the mass media is plummeting, though it’s still far higher than it should be.
The closer we get that trust to zero, the greater the possibility that we can build a healthy world uninhibited by the manipulations of a few sociopathic billionaires.
The Trap Of Romantic Love February 1 2019 | From: TheUnboundedSpirit
The Search for Romantic Love: Most people - especially those brought up in the West - have been conditioned to believe that so-called romantic love is the most important pursuit in life and that only the ones who’ve found it are fulfilled.
From the tender age of one or two, we are told of fairy tales that end with two people of the opposite sex living “happily ever after”. As we age, novels, magazines, pop songs, television, Hollywood scripts, and self-help workshops reinforce the idea that romantic love is the ideal form of love.
We are led to believe that our happiness heavily depends on romantic love, and that our personal worth is reflected in how good we are with our romantic relationships. Not surprisingly, when we’re single or we don’t experience love as it’s usually portrayed, we wonder if there’s something wrong with us.
We think that we’re missing out on true love and are anxiously praying for that moment when the fair maiden or prince will save us from our desperate situation.
As we are, we feel emotionally empty - something is lacking within our psyche that needs to be filled, yet we can’t do that on our own. Only another person can do it, and unless we are lucky enough to connect with him or her, we won’t ever discover pure joy and lasting contentment.
The belief that we’re not complete as we are and that we need someone else to fill in our sense of existential emptiness isn’t a modern one. In fact, it’s ancient.
In Plato’s ~2,500 year-old philosophical text Symposium, the comic playwright Aristophanes describes the origins of humanity. As he points out, the original form of man was a four-legged, four-armed, double-sexed entity.
Zeus, however, was afraid that humans might steal the power of the gods, so he decided to take away their power by having them sliced in half. According to Aristophanes, their heads turned “towards the wound, so that each person would see that he’d been cut and keep better order.”
This, he explains, is why each human being is craving for a significant other to complete them. In his own words: “Now, since their natural form had been cut in two, each one longed for its own other half, and so they would throw their arms about each other, weaving themselves together, wanting to grow together.”
If taken literally, Aristophanes’ recount is total nonsense, yet metaphorically it shows the central role that romantic love plays in our lives: We are in an endless search for that “special someone” - the soulmate - the universe created just for us, and we are willing to give up anything to “lose ourselves” in his or her embrace.
Romantic Love as Addiction
The moment we fall in love, the world turns into a magical place. Suddenly, life becomes more beautiful, adventurous, meaningful… in short, life becomes worth-living again.
The only problem is that, having experienced the emotional high of romantic love, we want more of it, yet no matter how much of it we get, our thirst for it is never quenched.
In other words, romantic love is addictive. In fact, research has shown that falling in love can have a similar impact on the brain as cocaine. To study the brain function of people engaged in romantic love relationships, biological anthropologist Helen Fisher put a group of participants through MRI brain scans.
Interestingly, what she found was that they behaved just like addicts: They had obsessive thoughts, participated in risk-taking activities and found it hard to deal with withdrawals.
The brain of people in love secretes an ample amount of hormones like dopamine, norepinephrine and serotonin — hormones that boost their pleasure and confidence levels. Feeling the exhilarating psychological effects of this hormonal boost, everything seems perfect to the romantic love addict.
The promises of fairy tales have come true. At last, life is as it’s supposed to be. Yet, once the initial high fades, everything changes. Life becomes mundane, ordinary, boring once again.
This return to “normal” reality is usually enough to bring a relationship to an end. Once that happens, the romantic love addict will soon come face-to-face with that sense of inner emptiness which has forever been torturing his/her psyche. Then, to deal with his/her withdrawal symptoms, the romantic love addict will go off in search of a new hit, and the story will repeat itself one more time.
Romantic Love: A Dangerous Self-Delusion
As you can understand, romantic love is temporary - it comes quickly and goes away just as fast. No matter how strong the feelings of lust and passion in new relationships might be, they are soon bound to disappear into thin air, as the power of romantic love loses grip over our emotional world.
But while we’re possessed by romantic love, it’s so overwhelming that it distorts our perception and often leads us into making choices that we will later regret.
For example, projecting their long-yearned fantasies upon their “other half”, it’s a common phenomenon for people in fresh romantic love relationships to exaggerate the positive traits of their partner and reduce or deny the negative ones.
This illusion makes them believe they’ve found their one and only perfect match. Feeling a sense of total acceptance and adoration for their partner, they are under the impression that their love is going to last forever. As a result, they tend to make quick, immature choices, such as hurrying to marry, only to find years later that they resent their partner for failing to meet their expectations.
Romantic love is a blind self-delusion - it only exists in the realm of fantasy, an imaginary world that we’ve cultivated with the help of the romantic tradition, mainly through media programming. Just like pornography fools us into believing that perfect sex exists, the romantic tradition fools us into believing that perfect relationships exist.
Yet, romantic love isn’t just delusional - it can also be dangerous once we’ve fallen into its trap. Not just because of the wrong choices it can urge us to make, as mentioned earlier, but first and foremost because it creates an ideal out of love that nobody can possibly reach (because it doesn’t exist in the first place - in fact, that’s the very reason why it’s called ideal).
Hence, no matter how nice, compatible people we date, the yearning for the perfect romantic relationship with the fairy tale Dream Lover will always lead us to disappointment. Obsessed with a fantasy world, we can’t enjoy reality.
Escaping the Trap of Romantic Love
To escape the trap of romantic love is quite difficult, considering that we have a billion-dollar industry that is day in and day out promoting a misrepresentation of actual love relationships, in effect making a profit from the exploitation of our deep-rooted emotional need to love and be loved.
You see, capitalism doesn’t give a damn about love. In fact, the less we love one another, the better it is for capitalism. From the market’s standpoint, it’s good that we’re unhappy with our relationships, because then happiness can be sold to us through products and services that promise to substitute for the loss of connection that we long for.
Unfortunately, we’re so desperate that we’ve bought into those promises. This is reflected in our efforts to show our partners love through the act of buying stuff. Take, for example, Valentine’s day, when couples have been persuaded to blindly consume things, thinking that this will elevate their relationship.
But how can an expensive ring substitute for a tight, filled-with-loving-warmth hug? And how can a ready-made meal in a high-class gourmet restaurant substitute for a sincere, intimate look into the beloved’s eye?
What we need isn’t more stuff, just like we don’t need more romantic movies. Neither, of course, do we need the Ideal Lover from the dreamworld. All of these offer us nothing of what we need, and only mess up with our hearts.
What we actually need is more understanding.
We need to understand that there’s no person out there who will complete us.
If we feel a sense of emptiness within, we’re going to keep on experiencing it no matter how many romantic love partners we spend our time with. That’s because our inner emptiness is nothing but a lack of self-love.
Therefore, unless we’re able to love and accept ourselves, we’ll always feel incomplete, regardless of how much love is shown to us.
We need to understand that we can’t love another unless we first love ourselves.
Healthy love relationships can only exist between two already complete, fulfilled people who decide to enrich their lives by sharing their overflowing-with-love hearts.
Unfortunately, most of us are emotional beggars seeking for completion in another person, only to find that our emptiness is actually deepening once we wake up to the fact that our partner is just as empty as we are.
We need to understand that love relationships are based on freedom.
Normally, partners are trying to fit each other into their fantasy image of how the Ideal Lover should look and behave like, not realizing that by doing so they’re depriving them of their freedom to be themselves.
This inevitably results in a constant state of conflict that ultimately turns relationships into prisons of emotional torture.
Just like birds need freedom of space so that they can soar into the skies, partners in an intimate relationship need the freedom to be themselves so they can spread their wings of love and fly to the peaks of consciousness.
We need to understand that healthy relationships require a lot of work.
There’s no great relationship without a lot of work behind it. In other words, great relationships don’t happen to be - they are slowly built with care and effort.
No matter how special a relationship might be, hardships to one degree or another are going to be a natural of part it, and the important question is how you deal with them: Is it through discussion and understanding or through fighting and judging?
Lastly, we need to understand that the Perfect Relationship doesn’t exist.
Contrary to what the romantic tradition has made us believe, the Perfect Relationship doesn’t exist other than in our imagination.
No actual living person is without flaws, we need to stop projecting our fairy tale fantasies on our partners, if we actually want to build genuine love relationships on the foundation of honesty, understanding and acceptance.
In addition, love relationships aren’t all passionate sex and romantic walks on sandy beaches under the filled-with-stars night sky. They’re not forever-lasting, either. In fact, they’re usually quite ephemeral. So let’s not make promises of perfect and eternal love.
Let’s be honest to one another, and keep our love real. I know, this is not the stuff movies and books are made of, but the reality nonetheless, and we better accept it before we’re slapped by it hard in the face.
Love relationships can’t be perfect, but they can still be amazingly beautiful. So let’s make the most of them, by celebrating what we do have, instead of worrying about what we don’t.
Here Are The 147 Transnational Companies That Run The World January 31 2019 | From: TechnocracyNews
A study by the Swiss Federal Institute of Technology in Zurich found that a mere 147 corporations control the world – orchestrating events and controlling governments.
These companies are run by Technocrats who are all busy perfecting the the ultimate and interconnected global supply chain. The list is not necessarily perfect, but it is representative of a class of super-companies who are running the global show.
The analysis, which looked at the relationships between 43,000 transnational corporations, identified that only a tiny handful of mega-corporations, mostly banks, had a disproportionate amount of power over world events.
Newscientist.com reports: “Reality is so complex, we must move away from dogma, whether it’s conspiracy theories or free-market,” says James Glattfelder. “Our analysis is reality-based.”
Previous studies have found that a few TNCs [Trans-National Corporations] own large chunks of the world’s economy, but they included only a limited number of companies and omitted indirect ownerships, so could not say how this affected the global economy – whether it made it more or less stable, for instance.
The Zurich team can. From Orbis 2007, a database listing 37 million companies and investors worldwide, they pulled out all 43,060 TNCs and the share ownerships linking them. Then they constructed a model of which companies controlled others through shareholding networks, coupled with each company’s operating revenues, to map the structure of economic power.
The work, to be published in PLoS One, revealed a core of 1318 companies with interlocking ownerships. Each of the 1318 had ties to two or more other companies, and on average they were connected to 20.
Top 10 Evil Corporations
“Thought big companies got to the top by being nice? This video might make you think again, starting with IBM.”
What’s more, although they represented 20 per cent of global operating revenues, the 1318 appeared to collectively own through their shares the majority of the world’s large blue chip and manufacturing firms – the “real” economy – representing a further 60 per cent of global revenues.
When the team further untangled the web of ownership, it found much of it tracked back to a “super-entity” of 147 even more tightly knit companies – all of their ownership was held by other members of the super-entity – that controlled 40 per cent of the total wealth in the network.
“In effect, less than 1 per cent of the companies were able to control 40 per cent of the entire network,” says Glattfelder. Most were financial institutions. The top 20 included Barclays Bank, JPMorgan Chase & Co, and The Goldman Sachs Group.
John Driffill of the University of London, a macroeconomics expert, says the value of the analysis is not just to see if a small number of people controls the global economy, but rather its insights into economic stability.
Concentration of power is not good or bad in itself, says the Zurich team, but the core’s tight interconnections could be. As the world learned in 2008, such networks are unstable. “If one [company] suffers distress,” says Glattfelder, “this propagates.”
“It’s disconcerting to see how connected things really are,” agrees George Sugihara of the Scripps Institution of Oceanography in La Jolla, California, a complex systems expert who has advised Deutsche Bank.
Yaneer Bar-Yam, head of the New England Complex Systems Institute (NECSI), warns that the analysis assumes ownership equates to control, which is not always true. Most company shares are held by fund managers who may or may not control what the companies they part-own actually do. The impact of this on the system’s behaviour, he says, requires more analysis.
Crucially, by identifying the architecture of global economic power, the analysis could help make it more stable. By finding the vulnerable aspects of the system, economists can suggest measures to prevent future collapses spreading through the entire economy.
Glattfelder says we may need global anti-trust rules, which now exist only at national level, to limit over-connection among TNCs. Sugihara says the analysis suggests one possible solution: firms should be taxed for excess interconnectivity to discourage this risk.
One thing won’t chime with some of the protesters’ claims: the super-entity is unlikely to be the intentional result of a conspiracy to rule the world. “Such structures are common in nature,” says Sugihara.
Newcomers to any network connect preferentially to highly connected members. TNCs buy shares in each other for business reasons, not for world domination. If connectedness clusters, so does wealth, says Dan Braha of NECSI: in similar models, money flows towards the most highly connected members.
The Zurich study, says Sugihara, “is strong evidence that simple rules governing TNCs give rise spontaneously to highly connected groups”. Or as Braha puts it:
“The Occupy Wall Street claim that 1 per cent of people have most of the wealth reflects a logical phase of the self-organising economy.”
So, the super-entity may not result from conspiracy. The real question, says the Zurich team, is whether it can exert concerted political power. Driffill feels 147 is too many to sustain collusion. Braha suspects they will compete in the market but act together on common interests. [Comment: If you are reading this then you should already know what's going on.]
Resisting changes to the network structure may be one such common interest.
The Top 50 of the 147 Superconnected Companies
1. Barclays plc
2. Capital Group Companies Inc
3. FMR Corporation
4. AXA
5. State Street Corporation
6. JP Morgan Chase & Co
7. Legal & General Group plc
8. Vanguard Group Inc
9. UBS AG
10. Merrill Lynch & Co Inc
11. Wellington Management Co LLP
12. Deutsche Bank AG
13. Franklin Resources Inc
14. Credit Suisse Group
15. Walton Enterprises LLC
16. Bank of New York Mellon Corp
17. Natixis
18. Goldman Sachs Group Inc
19. T Rowe Price Group Inc
20. Legg Mason Inc
21. Morgan Stanley
22. Mitsubishi UFJ Financial Group Inc
23. Northern Trust Corporation
24. Société Générale
25. Bank of America Corporation
26. Lloyds TSB Group plc
27. Invesco plc
28. Allianz SE 29. TIAA
30. Old Mutual Public Limited Company
31. Aviva plc
32. Schroders plc
33. Dodge & Cox
34. Lehman Brothers Holdings Inc*
35. Sun Life Financial Inc
36. Standard Life plc
37. CNCE
38. Nomura Holdings Inc
39. The Depository Trust Company
40. Massachusetts Mutual Life Insurance
41. ING Groep NV
42. Brandes Investment Partners LP
43. Unicredito Italiano SPA
44. Deposit Insurance Corporation of Japan
45. Vereniging Aegon
46. BNP Paribas
47. Affiliated Managers Group Inc
48. Resona Holdings Inc
49. Capital Group International Inc
50. China Petrochemical Group Company
If You Hate Poverty, You Should Love Capitalism
A look into why Capitalism is the best thing that ever happened to average citizens.
Arthur Brooks, president of the American Enterprise Institute, explains how Capitalism is struggling to attract new followers despite helping millions of average people control their own destinies and accumulate wealth through hard work.
How To Open The Doors Of Perception At Will Without Psychedelics January 31 2019 | From: CollectiveEvolution / Various
What if you found out there was a key that would enable you to open and close your doors of perception at will, void of psychedelics?
What if you found out you not only held the key, but you were the key? Would you unlock the doors, or keep them shut?
The Facts: Use of psychedelics are not necessary in the journey of opening the doors of personal and collective perception. In fact, one can go much deeper with sober practice.
Reflect On:
What do you do on a regular basis to expand or explore your consciousness? If you have used psychedelics before, have you implemented what they showed you? If you keep going back to psychedelics, why?
“The door to the soul is unlocked; you do not need to please the doorkeeper, the door in front of you is yours, intended for you, and the doorkeeper obeys when spoken to.”
- Robert Bly
What if you found out there was a key that would enable you to open and close your doors of perception at will, void of psychedelics?
What if you found out you not only held the key, but you were the key? Would you unlock the doors, or keep them shut?
Well, you are the key, and whether or not you choose to enter through the doors is a choice that, although invisible, is life changing.
You are the vehicle for the trip, consider this but a mere travel summary.
And for a detailed itinerary? Well, that can only be fetched by you -not the part of you reading this, but the altered dream state part of your consciousness that will travel beyond the doors of perception to the wildness of the world where there is a livingness to all things - as it can only be found in a place with exclusive access.
A place where you can travel, but no one may follow - not even the conscious, waking state version of yourself scanning these very words.
If you have experimented with psychedelics, you most likely know what it is like to sense the type of “livingness” to all things of which I speak.
Even if you haven’t used psychedelics, though, you almost certainly have still experienced this same livingness to all things in the world around you to a noticeable degree at least once, but probably various times as a child - a moment where the world around you took on a shimmery glow, colours suddenly appeared brighter, sounds louder and clearer, physical sensations amplified and, most notably, you could FEEL the world around you.
I am not referring to the physical, touching type of feeling, but to the intangible, energy sense of feeling where you could almost feel the luminosity of the world around you within, and you and the luminous rested in harmony as if you were one.
You were present, your perceptions altered, your senses heightened. In short, your sensory gating channels opened to some degree, a process more commonly referred to as opening your doors of perception.
Sensory Gating Explained: The Science Behind the Doors of Perception
The “doors of perception” are the part of our brain and central nervous system responsible for filtering input from all external stimuli, involving all of your senses -feeling (both physical and nonphysical), sight, sound, taste and smell.
This process, known as “sensory gating,” enables us to decipher the difference between “me” and “not me.” Through sensory gating, we are able to manage and comprehend the constant stream of sensory data from the external environment.
Without it, we would be unable to filter out what matters and what doesn’t, and all sensory data would touch us deeply and ultimately, we would become overstimulated and overwhelmed and go “crazy” - according to modern medicine, that is.
You see, many of the people who are now referred to as “schizophrenics” have wide sensory gating channels that they do not know how to close, causing an overload in stimulus.
In indigenous cultures, these people would have instead been called SHAMANS, and would have been taught how to control their doors of perception and open and close them as need be.
There are ways to begin opening the doors of perception, or sensory gating channels, without using psychedelics.
Of course, the experience will not be as intense or immediate, but nor will it be short lived.
Rather, by utilizing practices that help open your sensory gating channels to some degree by altering your state of consciousness, you learn to open the doors of perception into the metaphysical background of the world and continuously uncover deeper truths to yourself and the world around you.
In essence, playing with the doors of perception in this manner, rather than through the use of mind altering substances, allows you to do more than have a life changing experience in which you see the deeper meanings to life for a brief period of time (i.e. a “trip”), but to change your life where every moment is an experience in a continuous journey into further, unexplored depths of life.
Listen to Aldous Huxley’s in depth description of the doors of perception, and the mechanisms through which the mind opens and closes them here.
Hypnosis and Meditation
“ …those who have experimented with hypnosis find that, at a certain depth of trance, it happens not too infrequently that subjects, if they are left alone and not distracted, will become aware of an immanent serenity and goodness that is often associated with a perception of light and of spaces vast but not solitary.”
Practicing hypnotherapy and/or meditation on a regular basis is an excellent way to begin dabbling into the metaphysical backgrounds of yourself and of the world by tapping into your subconscious, into otherwise ignored parts of your mind.
These practices help open doors in the mind where things such as past traumas that are holding you back have remained imprisoned for years, desperately waiting for you to free them and thus yourself.
Meditation and hypnotherapy are also great tools for getting in touch with your intuition, helping you to see the bigger picture of current problems, allowing you to focus on the deeper truths and lessons they withhold rather than getting trapped in the mundane surface details of your problems.
In fact, when observed in this light, they eventually cease to be problems and are instead rendered avenues of inner exploration and growth. Here are some guided hypnosis and meditation sessions that may be of benefit.
The Sixth Sensory Channel: The Feeling Capacity
The 6th sensory channel, also known as the feeling capacity, refers to the ability of humans to feel, as opposed to touch.
It refers to the invisible type of feeling, as opposed to the feeling sense of physical touch embodying the ingredients of the five senses of human beings.
One is invisible and subjective, the other solely portrays the mostly objective experience of physical touching, of feeling the texture of a person or object.
The feeling sense referring to the ability to feel the invisibles describes the feelings that stir within as we encounter various experiences in our day to day life, sometimes called a sixth sense, or the sixth sensory channel.
To better understand the sixth sensory channel, consider the following example: you come home from work and ask your partner what’s wrong.
“Nothing,” they brashly reply.
But, by the tone of their voice, you know nothing means everything, and that you better respond with something along the lines of, “please tell me what’s wrong,” unless you want to endure a silent dinner - one that also evokes a feeling sense, as the silence speaks volumes and is filled with tension, making you uneasy - and sleep on the couch that night.
Simply put, awakening to the feeling sense that is not often spoken of as it is not included in the five senses that we are taught we have, cultivates your feeling capacity, your ability to feel the invisible, unspoken and unseen meanings of situations, and of things both yourself and others do and say.
In order to develop your feeling capacity, pay attention to the way things feel.
Interpret situations with your heart first, then your thoughts.
For a deeper understanding of the sixth sensory channel and how you can begin to reclaim your feeling sense, consider listening to this in this interview with Stephen Buhner.
France’s Yellow Vest Protesters: Unleash Chaos By Withdrawing All Money From Banks & How The 1% Profit Off Of Racial Economic Inequality January 28 2019 | From: MoneyAndMarkets / TheGuardian / Various
Activists from a French protest movement encouraged supporters recently to set off a bank run by emptying their accounts, while the government urged citizens to express their discontent in a national debate instead of weekly demonstrations disrupting the streets of Paris.
Activists from the yellow vest movement, which started with protests over fuel tax increases, recommended the massive cash withdrawals on social media.
One protester, Maxime Nicolle called it the “tax collector’s referendum.”
“We are going to get our bread back … You’re making money with our dough, and we’re fed up,” Nicolle said in a video message.
The movement’s adherents said they hoped the banking action will force the French government to heed their demands, especially giving citizens the right to propose and vote on new laws.
Meanwhile, Prime Minister Edouard Philippe gave details Wednesday of a “big debate” the government plans to start next week in all the regions of France.
“We want it to be rich, impartial and fruitful, to be able to take it into account in the period now beginning,” Philippe said.
The debates will focus on four main topics: climate change, democratic issues, taxes and public services, the prime minister said.
Anyone can propose a local event and an internet platform will provide another venue for discussion, he said.
President Emmanuel Macron proposed the debate as a way for the government to hear and to respond to the movement’s central complaints.
Macron also announced 10 billion euros ($11.5 billion) worth of measures to boost the purchasing power of French households.
About 200 protesters, including trade union members and participants in the yellow vest movement, gathered Wednesday in Creteil, a Paris suburb as Macron visited a handball facility dedicated to handball gymnasium.
Police officers used tear gas to keep the crowd at a distance from the French leader.
The yellow vest movement was named after the fluorescent garments French motorists must carry so they are visible if they need to get out of their vehicles in a place that could be unsafe.
The protests started in November to oppose fuel tax hikes and have expanded into broader public rejections of Macron’s economic policies, deemed to favor the rich.
How The 1% Profit Off Of Racial Economic Inequality
The racial wealth divide is bringing down median wealth, while wealth at the very top soars.
An economy that’s rigged to benefit the richest 1% has left most of America behind. While wages for workers have remained flat for decades, expenses for healthcare, housing, and most basic needs have risen. Alongside record concentrations of income and wealth at the top, America’s racial wealth divide has persisted – or worsened.
As people of color make up a larger share of the diversifying US population, that persistent racial wealth divide is bringing down America’s median wealth. But while wealth at the middle falters, it’s soaring at the top.
In other words, the 1% are profiting off ongoing racial economic inequality.
All this is happening against a backdrop of seemingly good economic news. Black and Latino unemployment rates reached historic lows in 2018, and median income has slowly inched up for all households in the last few years.
But measures of wealth – what you own minus what you owe – tell a very different story. Those were our findings in Dreams Deferred, a new study on the racial wealth divide for the Institute for Policy Studies.
Since the early 1980s, median wealth among black and Latino families has been stuck at less than $10,000.
The median black family today owns $3,600 – just 2% of the $147,000 of wealth the median white family owns. The median Latino family has assets worth $6,600 – just 4% of the median white family.
In other words, the median white family has 41 times more wealth than the median black family and 22 times more wealth than the median Latino family.
“Median wealth” refers to the household at the exact middle of wealth distribution – with half of households above and half below. That’s different from “average wealth”, which skews the numbers by including the wealth of the richest 1%. (Average white wealth, for example, was $930,000 in 2016. But the ordinary white person isn’t close to being a millionaire.)
Changes in median wealth give us a multi-decade understanding of economic security and wellbeing. Since 1983, median wealth for all US households declined by 3%, adjusting for inflation. Over this same period, the median Black family saw their wealth drop by more than half.
Meanwhile, the number of households with $10m or more soared by 856%.
If the trajectory of the past three decades continues, by 2050 the median white family will have $174,000 of wealth, while Latino median wealth will be just $8,600 – and black median wealth will head downward to $600. In fact, the median black family is on track to reach zero wealth by 2082.
While the middle stagnates and the very top soars away, there’s also surging growth at the bottom end of the spectrum.
A growing number of households are “underwater” when it comes to wealth. The proportion of all US households – of any race – with zero or “negative” wealth (meaning their debts exceed the value of their assets) has grown from one in six in 1983 to one in five households today.
Thirty-seven percent of black families and 33% of Latino families have zero or negative wealth, compared to just 15.5% of white families
Families of color are much likelier to be in this precarious financial situation. 37% of black families and 33% of Latino families have zero or negative wealth, compared with just 15.5% of white families.
These racial wealth divisions are damaging to the economy as a whole. Low levels of black and Latino wealth, combined with their growing proportion of the population, are a significant contributor to the overall decline in American median household wealth.
Meanwhile, efforts to close the racial economic divide have been thwarted by the larger economic inequalities surging through the economy.
Billionaire-bankrolled outfits like the Koch network, for example, have invested heavily in politicians that have made the tax code more unequal than ever.
Public policies aimed at reducing both overall inequality and the racial wealth divide in particular will be critical to creating a more equitable economic system.
Such policies could include the expansion of first-time homeownership programs and the creation of a “baby bond” program, to seed an asset account for each newborn.
But we also must address the overall challenges of inequality with policies to raise the minimum wage and expand healthcare, while taxing the 1% to fund education and infrastructure that create an economy that works for everyone, not just the super-rich.
Left-Wing Media Run By Actual Demon-Possessed Anti-Human Evil Entities January 28 2019 | From: NaturalNews / Various
If you’re wondering why the left-wing media is infused with absolute evil, a seething, anti-human hatred of life, truth, healthy babies and human liberty, the answer is far larger than what you might have supposed.
An increasing number of so-called “journalists” working for the anti-human media are actually demon-possessed entities working to destroy human life, Christianity and belief in God.
Beyond a mere political war, we are engaged in a spiritual war of cosmic importance, as pure evil has taken over nearly the entire left-wing media, government bureaucracies, universities and public schools, Hollywood and the pop culture media, and even the ranks of “science” and medicine.
“They first cropped up seemingly out of nowhere about six years ago, adorned in black capes with curved devil horns affixed to their heads, holding posters and black American flags as they shouted ‘Hail, Satan’ on the steps of government institutions,”reports the UK Daily Mail in a story documenting the rise of Satanism in America.
“And they were growing, exponentially. Since The Satanic Temple’s founding in 2012, the organization has increased from a handful of members to tens of thousands, with chapters all over the US and the globe, from Stockholm to London and Los Angeles to Texas.”
Satanism is on the rise in the United States and around the world. Human-looking entities that were born as humans and previously possessed human souls are now entirely possessed by demonic spirits working to serve their dark lord Satan.
“The next thing I came to understand was they weren’t pretending to be Satanists to make a political point. They were Satanists,” says one observer quoted in the story. Read how Satanists define their movement:
“To us, Satan is the symbol that best suits the nature of we who are carnal by birth – people who feel no battles raging between our thoughts and feelings, we who do not embrace the concept of a soul imprisoned in a body.
He represents pride, liberty, and individualism – qualities often defined as Evil by those who worship external deities, who feel there is a war between their minds and emotions..”
Satan worshipers are now running the pop culture of America, where everything from Superbowl half-time shows to star-studded music videos now features overt Satanic imagery and symbolism as a form of mass indoctrination.
These Satanists relish evil and the destruction of all that is good.
How to Spot a Demon in Human Form – Watch the Mini-Documentary
How can you tell the difference between an actual human being with a divine soul vs. a human vessel that has been occupied and taken over by a demonic dark spirit?
In the following mini-documentary, I explain how you can “spot a demon” in human form.
Some of the more obvious signs are that demons in human form relish the thought of murdering babies (abortion), injecting people with vaccines made from aborted human babies (aborted human fetal tissue is one of the primary ingredients used in modern vaccines), attacking Christians and seeking harm upon children through toxic medicine, physical violence (the recent Covington Catholic School hoax) and mental indoctrination.
The goal of the Satanists is to attack all human vessels and possess them with demonic spirits by driving out divine human souls.
This war is already well under way. Many of the “people” you meet in society today are no longer humans on the inside. They are literal demon souls that have possessed and now operate human bodies like biological puppets.
These demonic entities appear human, but answer only to Satan. They operate at the highest levels of society, having infiltrated politics, media, entertainment, finance, science, medicine and even organized religion.
When you see people celebrating abortion and “shouting” praise for the murder of unborn babies, rest assured you are looking at a demon spirit which has possessed and taken over a human body.
They are anti-human for the simple reason that they are not human themselves.
Professor: “God-Like” Google Has Been “Weaponized” For Political Purposes
& Experts From UK Take A Look At US Social Media January 27 2019 | From: Infowars / ArnoldIT
Cyber security expert warns employees are punishing sites that conflict with their politics. Professor of cyber security Kevin Curran says that Google now has “God-like” power which has been weaponized for political purposes.
Responding to a story about how Google considered banning Breitbart from its lucrative ad network for vague, unspecified “hate speech,” Curran, professor of cyber security at the Faculty of Computing, Engineering and Built Environment at Ulster University, warned that the Silicon Valley giant is out of control.
"The newly released leaked emails, which demonstrate Google employees plotting to ban Breitbart from Google AdSense, show again the God-like power companies like Google have in modern life,” said Curran.
“Here we have a company with employees who’d seen to remove the ads from a company, which relies on the dominant search engine of the Internet,” Curran told Sputnik.
“Removal from the search ad market on Google would severely damage their business. It seems that Google employees were seeking to weaponize Google search for left-wing political purposes.”
Calling for greater transparency, Curran said that Google employees were abusing their power to “to punish sites which conflict with their politics” and that a “company culture” existed at Google which turns a blind eye to this abuse.
As we previously reported, following Donald Trump’s election win, Google employees discussed gaming their own search results to bury conservative media outlets.
"How many times did you see the Election now card with items from opinion blogs (Breitbart, Daily Caller) elevated next to legitimate news organizations?” asked Google engineer Scott Byer, adding,“That’s something that can and should be fixed.”
A video of a Google meeting shortly after the election which leaked in September also revealed “an atmosphere of panic and dismay amongst the tech giant’s leadership” and a willingness to not let Trump win again.
According to Dr. Robert Epstein, Google helped shift 2 to 3 million votes in Hillary Clinton’s favor with bias search algorithms during the presidential election.
"Who on Earth gave these private companies the power to make decisions about what everyone in the world is going to see or not see?” asked Epstein.
“These companies shouldn’t have that power, period.”
"Social media have gone from being the natural infrastructure for sharing collective grievances and coordinating civic engagement to being a computational tool for social control, manipulated by canny political consultants and available to politicians in democracies and dictatorships alike,” the authors of the report wrote.
The idea is that technology is neutral until a person figures out how to use it as a weapon or to his or her advantage.
In the case of social media, the companies managed as if they were high school science clubs’ entries in a Science Fair, have created some interesting tools.
A few of the tools are similar to the wizard who creates a death ray, uses it to cook a burger, and gives the gizmo away at a yard sale. A clever person picks it up and starts vaporizing the pets and the neighbors.
Remember that technology is neutral mantra. That’s something repeated by individuals who have not read The Technological Bluff by Jacques Ellul.
Does one want to access “all the world’s information”? Not me. Selectivity, editorial controls, policy controls, and informed decision making are helpful.
Anyone remember that Pandora’s box thing? In January 2019, Beyond Search is switching focus, and we are introducing a Web log to complement our video series “DarkCyber.”
Prepare For Emergency Action In The World: The Orchestrated Assault On Your Mind, The West And President Trump Is Approaching Its Final Chapter January 26 2019 | From: NaturalNews / Various
An urgent alert to all Westerners: Prepare for emergency action in the 3D world.
New information has come to light that indicates the “final solution” of the globalist agenda to destroy America [Read: The West] and enslave its citizens is drawing near.
The entire corporate-run media is a fact-free mental poisoning operation that fabricates fake news on a daily basis to lie about vaccines, GMOs, pharmaceuticals, pesticides and everything else that’s poisoning your body and mind.
The New York Times, Washington Post, CNN, BuzzFeed and all the rest are committing orchestrated treason against America, and they’re following orders from a rogue branch of the CIA which has, for decades, specialized in toppling foreign regimes and installing political puppets as “leaders.”
For the last two years, their goal has been to carry out a political coup against President Trump, no matter what the cost.
The media has sacrificed every last shred of credibility to achieve this goal and now exists as nothing more than a delusions factory that produces daily fiction rigorously mislabeled “news.”
"Political strategist Roger Stone says that the deep state is planning to remove both President Trump and VP Mike Pence from office so that they can install Nancy Pelosi as President as part of a coup that will eventually see Hillary Clinton return as President.
“The deep state seeks to fabricate some misdeed by the Trump campaign that is sold as Russian collusion,” said Stone.
“That way they can remove both Donald Trump and Vice President Mike Pence, paving the way for Nancy Pelosi to become president.”
“Pelosi will then appoint Hillary Clinton to the vacant Vice Presidency after which Pelosi would resign as president allowing Hillary to take the White House which alluded her grasp in 2016.”
A Plan Will Be Initiated to Arrest and Handcuff President Trump, Staged for CNN Cameras
The media hacks have been ordered by globalist controllers to demand the impeachment of President Trump.
With the help of anti-Trump insiders, they are planning to stage a physical coup to arrest and handcuff the President, then “perp walk” him in front of CNN’s cameras in a staged, theatrical ploy to make the president look guilty even when it’s the treasonous traitors who are the guilty ones.
They have been ordered to pull out all the stops and do anything and everything necessary to eliminate Trump before Ginsburg is removed from the Supreme Court.
Rumors are circulating that Ginsburg is already dead and that her death is being covered up to provide enough time for the deep state to arrest and remove President Trump from office, but those rumors have not been confirmed and may be mere conjecture.
In any case, Ginsburg’s passing is very near, and this has underscored the perceived emergency on the Left which is willing to do absolutely anything to maintain authoritarian power over the American people.
Simultaneously, the evil tech giants have gone into full-blown censorship mode and have transformed into rogue tech companies that conspire to silence all pro-America, pro-Trump speech across the ‘net.
Comment:Read about the Alliance that has been working behind
the scenes for decades to take down the 'Cabal' within the work of David Wilcock.
Some of those reading this may be confused because the cabal-controlled mainstream media is doing everything within it's
power to denigrate Trump - as he is part of the effort to take the Illuminati down once and for all.
It has become an urgent national security matter to now arrest the CEOs of Google, Facebook, YouTube, Twitter and other tech giants, as they are now committing treason on a daily basis, conspiring to see America’s democracy overturned while demanding that America itself be overrun with communists and illegal aliens in a mass land invasion.
Google, Apple and Facebook, in particular, have become the true “enemies of the state” and now answer solely to Communist China.
These rogue corporate monstrosities must be dismantled and prevented from ever rising up again. They now operate as criminal enterprises in total violation of basic human humans, freedom of speech and the rule of law.
Google is an enemy and must be destroyed if the West is to survive.
Prepare to Descend Upon Washington to Defend Your Nation, Your President and Your Future
Action item for all Americans: If this political coup is triggered, descend upon Washington and start taking action to defend your nation with every means available.
Defend your President. Defend your Constitution. Defend your borders. Under authorization from the Constitution itself, seek out and arrest the treasonous actors throughout the deep state and the CIA-run media who have orchestrated this planned destruction of our great nation.
It is now abundantly clear that the deep state cannot be defeated from within. It has become too strong, too dangerous and too bold to be restrained through any normal channel of law or regulation.
The deep state must be halted in the physical world, through processes outside the control of the corrupt bureaucracy. This can only happen through direct action in the “3D world,” as it’s called, and it is the President himself who can initiate the authorization for citizens to carry out this action.
There are two trigger events that provide authorization for the citizens of America to rise up in the 3D world and converge on Washington D.C. to take their country back from the deep state traitors who are systematically destroying it:
Trigger event #1. An arrest or assassination of President Trump. This would be proof of an illegal coup which would trigger the Second Amendment defense of America.
Trigger event #2. President Trump announces authorization for citizens’ action against the deep state traitors, effectively “deputizing” millions of Americans to locate and round up deep state traitors named by the President.
Will Trump Declassify Damning Evidence During His Upcoming State of the Union Address?
The upcoming State of the Union address may turn out to be President Trump reading and releasing previously-classified documents and calling for the mass arrest of traitors going all the way up to Barack Obama, a treasonous actor who conspired to destroy America while weaponizing the intelligence community to criminalize the incoming Trump administration. (The FBI actually inserted spies / actors into the Trump campaign in order to claim his campaign was “working with the Russians.”)
Haven’t you wondered why Nancy Pelosi is so desperate to stop Trump from speaking in a live, televised event?
My sources tell me an attempt at removing Trump from office will be made before the SOTU speech.
Should such an attempt take place, that is your authorization to take emergency action to save your nation from falling to the hands of the globalists and the poison-pushing news cartels that are now 100% aligned against our constitutional republic.
Pray for America and pray for the President. Just as importantly, prepare for emergency action in the 3D world, because that appears to be the last remaining option for saving America [Read: The West] from the poisoners, the propagandists, the globalists, the media liars and the political assassins.
Forgotten History: US Bankers Financing US Enemies - And Why It Is Important Now January 25 2019 | From: JonRappoport
In 1971, Gary Allen published his book, None Dare Call it Conspiracy. It quickly became an unofficial best seller. Over the years, several million copies have been sold.
Allen’s thesis was stark: super-rich American capitalists were financing socialism. This bizarre paradox was resolved when socialism was properly understood - not as “power to the people” - but as elite power over the people. In other words, as a hoax.
These days, the socialist hoax is still unknown to most of the population. Cloak a global power grab as progress for all of humanity.
Here, from chapter six of None Dare Call it Conspiracy, “The Rockefellers and the Reds,” is a devastating passage commenting on the period just after the Russian Revolution of 1917:
“The Rockefellers assigned their public relations agent, Ivy Lee, to sell the American public the idea that the Bolsheviks were merely misunderstood idealists who were actually kind benefactors of mankind.”
“’Quite predictably…[Ivy] Lee concludes that the communist problem is merely psychological. By this time he is talking about “Russians” (not Communists) and concludes “they are all right.”
He suggests the United States should not engage in propaganda; makes a plea for peaceful coexistence; and suggests the United States would find it sound policy to recognize the USSR and advance credits [give loans].’ (Antony Sutton, Western Technology and Soviet Economic Development, 1917-1930, Hoover Institution on War, Revolution and Peace, Stanford University, Calif., 1968, p.292)”
“After the Bolshevik Revolution, Standard [Oil] of New Jersey [Rockefeller] bought 50 per cent of the Nobel’s huge Caucasus oil fields even though the property had theoretically been nationalized [by Russia]. (O’Connor, Harvey, The Empire Of Oil, Monthly Review Press, New York, 1955, p.270.)”
“In 1927, Standard Oil of New York [Rockefeller] built a refinery in Russia, thereby helping the Bolsheviks put their economy back on its feet. Professor Sutton states: ‘This was the first United States investment in Russia since the Revolution.’ (Ibid, Vol.1, p.38)”
“Shortly thereafter Standard Oil of New York and its subsidiary, Vacuum Oil Company [Rockefeller], concluded a deal to market Soviet oil in European countries and it was reported that a loan of $75,009,000 to the Bolsheviks was arranged. (National Republic, Sept.1927.)”
“…Wherever Standard Oil would go, Chase National Bank was sure to follow. (The Rockefeller’s Chase Bank was later merged with the Warburg’s Manhattan Bank to form the present Chase Manhattan Bank.) In order to rescue the Bolsheviks, who were supposedly an archenemy, the Chase National Bank was instrumental in establishing the American-Russian Chamber of Commerce in 1922.
President of the Chamber was Reeve Schley, a vice-president of Chase National Bank. (Ibid, Vol.11, p.288) According to Professor Sutton: ‘In 1925, negotiations between Chase and [Russian] Prombank extended beyond the finance of raw materials and mapped out a complete program for financing Soviet raw material exports to the U. S. and imports of U. S. cotton and machinery.’ (Ibid, Vol.11, p.226) Sutton also reports that ‘Chase National Bank and the Equitable Trust Company were leaders in the Soviet credit business.’ (Ibid, p.277)”
“The Rockefeller’s Chase National Bank also was involved in selling Bolshevik bonds in the United States in 1928. Patriotic organizations denounced the Chase as an ‘international fence.’ Chase was called ‘a disgrace to America… They will go to any lengths for a few dollars profits.’ (Ibid, Vol.11, p.291) Congressman Louis McFadden, chairman of the House Banking Committee, maintained in a speech to his fellow Congressmen:”
“’The Soviet government has been given United States Treasury funds by the Federal Reserve Board and the Federal Reserve Banks acting through the Chase Bank and the Guaranty Trust Company and other banks in New York City.”
“’Open up the books of Amtorg, the trading organization of the Soviet government in New York, and of Gostorg, the general office of the Soviet Trade Organization, and of the State Bank of the Union of Soviet Socialist Republics and you will be staggered to see how much American money has been taken from the United States’ Treasury for the benefit of Russia.
Find out what business has been transacted for the State Bank of Soviet Russia by its correspondent, the Chase Bank of New York’. (Congressional Record, June 15, 1933.)”
“But the Rockefellers apparently were not alone in financing the Communist arm of the Insiders’ conspiracy. According to Professor Sutton ‘… there is a report in the State Department files that names Kuhn, Loeb & Co. (the long established and important financial house in New York) as the financier of the [Russians’] First Five Year Plan. See U. S. State Dept. Decimal File, 811.51/3711 and 861.50 FIVE YEAR PLAN/236.’ (Sutton, op. cit., Vol. II, p. 340n.)”
“Professor Sutton proves conclusively in his three volume history of Soviet technological development that the Soviet Union was almost literally manufactured by the U.S.A…”
“…Sutton shows that there is hardly a segment of the Soviet economy which is not a result of the transference of Western, particularly American, technology.”
“This cannot be wholly the result of accident. For fifty years the Federal Reserve-CFR-Rockefeller-lnsider crowd has advocated and carried out policies aimed at increasing the power of their satellite, the Soviet Union. Meanwhile, America spends $75 billion a year on defense to protect itself from the enemy the Insiders are building up.”
NOTE: The descendants of these bankers are now doing everything they can to build up the story that Donald Trump won the presidency by colluding with Russians. To call this an irony, in view of the above information, would be a vast understatement.
However, the motives of these men are clear: regardless of whether Trump meant to keep his promises to destroy Globalism (aka worldwide socialism), his mere mention of Globalism as the enemy, during the presidential campaign, and his declared opposition to Globalist “free trade” treaties, was sufficient to warrant an all-out attack on him.
The whole idea of nationalism as preferable to Globalism could act as a contagious germ spreading to the people of other countries - so Trump as the face and symbol of such sentiments had to be defamed and crushed.
Through various front organizations, cutouts, dupes, brainwashed useful idiots, and violent hired thugs, that operation to crush Trump is well underway.
Again - and this point must be understood - IT DOESN’T MATTER WHETHER TRUMP EVER MEANT TO KEEP HIS PROMISE TO BURY GLOBALISM. THE MERE MENTION OF GLOBALISM AS THE ENEMY WAS AND IS SUFFICIENT TO WARRANT UNCEASING ATTACKS AGAINST HIM.
Many, many of Trump’s supporters want to see Globalism buried.
Ultimately, they are the real target of the Globalists, who want to neutralize and disperse them and make them passive and demoralized.
Five So-Called “Conspiracy Theories” That Are Actually Supported By Mainstream Science January 24 2019 | From: NaturalNews
Telling the truth about a scandal that hasn’t been approved by the legacy media and their owners often yields a predictable result: You’ll be labeled a conspiracy theorist - even when there is plenty of evidence to support the truth.
Comfortable lies may help some people sleep at night, but the truth is that many supposed “conspiracy theories” are actually real, and are supported by science.
Who would have thought? Here are five truths that are widely misrepresented as conspiracy theories, and the evidence which supports them:
1. Atrazine Disrupts, Damages the Endocrine System
Atrazine is on the fast-track to becoming one of the most widely used pesticides in the United States. And because of this, there is a high amount of it in groundwater.
It is consistently detected in public water supplies - which in and of itself is really quite concerning. But when the profound potential for this toxic chemical to spur endocrine disruption is taken into account, atrazine becomes downright frightening.
Research led by Dr. Tyrone Hayes, a scientist from the University of California at Berkeley, has shown that in frogs, atrazine is capable of causing lasting endocrine damage.
In males, the disruption to endocrine function can be so severe that it results in chemical castration. In one study, Hayes exposed 40 tadpoles to water tainted with atrazine, at a concentration of 2.5 parts per billion - well within the EPA’s allotment for drinking water.
Nearly one-tenth of the tadpoles that were reared in the atrazine-laden water became “functionally female,” according to Hayes. Despite reportedly being born male, they ended up producing eggs.
And as sources report;
“After being exposed to atrazine, many of the 36 male-presenting frogs reportedly showed decreased testosterone, reduced breeding gland size, poor laryngeal development, suppressed mating behavior, and reduced fertility. Similar effects have been seen in other amphibious creatures.”
Studies from Purdue University and other esteemed research teams have found similar results regarding atrazine’s potential to disrupt the endocrine system - even at amounts regarded by federal agencies as “safe.”
Indeed, it would seem they are emphatically not safe. Perhaps that’s why Europe banned atrazine. So, why is it still used in the U.S.?
2. Cellphones Cause Brain Tumors
Is this really that far-fetched? That cellphones produce radiation is well established at this point - as is radiation’s connection to cancer.
It’s often reported that because cellphones produce a different type of radiation (compared to say, nuclear radiation), it poses no health risk. But numerous scientific studies have said otherwise. Indeed, the risk of cellphone use is widely under-reported.
Recently, research again implicated cellphones as a player in the cancer-causing game: This time, mobile devices were linked to brain and heart tumors.
In a study of rats, exposure to radio frequency radiation produced by cellphones led to the onset of a few different types of cancer - including rare Schwann cell tumors in the brain and heart.
“The weight of the evidence is clear: Cell phones do cause brain cancer,” stated Dr. Devra Davis, president of the Environmental Health Trust.
Children are particularly susceptible to the woes of cellphones, and Davis contended further that pregnant women should be especially careful about their cellphone use and storage.
“Keep the phone away from the abdomen - especially toward the end of pregnancy,” she cautioned.
There have been multiple warnings about the threat of cancer posed by cellphones, but many refuse to acknowledge the science that backs it up.
3. Chemtrails and Geoengineering Are Real
Mentioning the word “chemtrails” is a great way to earn the scorn of mainstream media pundits and their ilk. But a quick search of the term “geoengineering” yields a number of results - including a Geoengineering program at University of Oxford.
The program page notes that stratospheric aerosols (more commonly known as chemtrails) are one tool of choice in the geoengineering industry.
While there are many facets to the geoengineering scheme, chemtrails have long been one of the most easily visible tactics - and also the most denied. According to the U.S. government’s own records, aerosol spraying efforts have been underway for decades.
Even NASA has reportedly admitted to spraying lithium into the atmosphere. And in 2017, an EPA scientist was fired for sounding the alarm on the dangers of spraying aluminum into the atmosphere.
These efforts may be an attempt at controlling the climate - but as many have warned, geoengineering may come with a hefty price.
The mass fluoridation of the American people is probably one of the greatest shams of all time.
First and foremost, there is no evidence to support the claim that fluoride consumption prevents cavities.
Fluoride is not an essential nutrient (quite the opposite, really) and it is not necessary for human health in any way, shape or form.
But it’s not just “nonessential,” this compound is actually quite dangerous to human health - especially when it comes to the health of your brain. Nearly 60 studies have reported a link between fluoride consumption and a reduction in IQ.
Many have likened the fluoridation of public water supplies to mass medication, especially given fluoride’s link to lower IQs in children and other neurological impairments. Even research from Harvard University has shown this potential for harm.
There is no shortage of reasons to end water fluoridation, but mainstream media and their keepers surely don’t want you to know about that.
5. Vaccines Contain Mercury, Aborted Fetal Cells and Other Hazardous Ingredients
Last but certainly not least is perhaps the most widely contested truth of all: Vaccines are a veritable cocktail of unsavory ingredients.
From thimerosal in flu shots to aluminum adjuvants to human diploid cells from fetal tissue, there’s no shortage of things to be disgusted with when it comes to vaccines - or the vaccine industry’s propaganda, for that matter.
Despite media attempts at misinforming the public, the FDA admits that some vaccines still contain thimerosal as a preservative - and some vaccine-makers still use thimerosal as part of their “manufacturing process.”
As the FDA itself notes, thimerosal is 50 percent mercury by weight - and a thimerosal-containing vaccine will deliver a 25-microgram dose of mercury to its recipients that are over the age of three.
Children under three get a half-dose, which means they’re still being injected with over 12 micrograms of mercury. This may not sound like a lot, but as Trace Amounts explains - that is more than enough to do harm.
A child would have to weigh 550 pounds to safely withstand a 25-microgram dose of mercury.
Mercury is a toxic heavy metal with no currently identified safe level of exposure. It does not belong in any vaccine, whether it’s being labeled as “preservative” or a “manufacturing process” agent.
Mike Adams, founder of Natural News and Director of CWC Labs, has repeatedly broken stories about the presence of other detestable vaccine ingredients.
In 2017, the Health Ranger revealed that the chicken pox vaccine was made with human embryonic lung cell cultures and human diploid cell cultures, among other crazy things like guinea pig cells - information he pulled from the CDC’s own website.
Sadly, the list of scandalous ingredients in vaccines doesn’t end there; there are many parts to a vaccine cocktail, and none of them sound like anything you’d want injected into your body.
Learn more about the truth behind so-called conspiracy theories at Conspiracy.news.
Google = Fascist Censorship: Employees Seek To Weaponize IT Services To Aid Left-Wing Agenda - Professor January 23 2019 | From: Sputnik / Various
Newly leaked Google correspondence has yet again showed partisan bias among the company's employees.
Speaking to Sputnik, cyber security analysts shared their views on the accusations against the IT giant and the alleged attempts by Google workers to "weaponize" the company's products to target a right-wing agenda.
"The newly released leaked emails, which demonstrate Google employees plotting to ban Breitbart from Google AdSense, show again the God-like power companies like Google have in modern life", said Kevin Curran, professor of cyber security at the Faculty of Computing, Engineering and Built Environment at Ulster University.
Breitbart reported on 10 December that judging from leaked Google communication, the company's employees had sought to block the media outlet from Google AdSense less than one month after President Donald Trump assumed his position.
Citing emails "leaked exclusively to Breitbart News," the media outlet highlighted that "a group of Google employees, with encouragement from the tech giant's director of monetization" had planned "to strike at Breitbart News' revenue" under the unfounded pretext of alleged "hate speech" and "fake news."
It is known that Google, one of the leaders of digital ads, accounted for 42.2 per cent of the market in 2017 and 37.2 per cent in 2018.
"Here we have a company with employees who'd seen to remove the ads from a company, which relies on the dominant search engine of the Internet", Curran told Sputnik.
"Removal from the search ad market on Google would severely damage their business. It seems that Google employees were seeking to weaponize Google search for left-wing political purposes."
The professor explained that while firms specializing in Internet-related services and products do need to monitor online services for "fake news, bullying, hate speech and terrorist activities," "there is however lack of intelligence in the best artificial intelligent filtering algorithms, so most of the IT giants employ human moderators".
"Here however is a perfect example of humans seeking to punish sites which conflict with their politics," the academic pointed out. "There is no simple solution to this however what is crucial is that we have transparency with the decisions that the 'captains of the Internet' make".
He noted that he:
"Personally understood how rogue individuals in any company can seek to impose their world views on company policy."
"However, what is unforgivable is a company culture that turns a blind eye, and the only way to police this is through transparency," the academic added.
Lars Hilse, a digital strategy consultant from Germany, holds a different view.
"That is more of a philosophical discussion", he said.
"Breitbart is / was a paying customer. And since these are advertisements, I can decide as a company whether or not I want to have such advertisers show up.
Therefore I don't understand the fuss. Totally different story if they'd prevented Breitbart from showing up in their organic search results".
According to Hilse, "If I as a company decide that I don't want the advertisements of a company in my publication, then that is my business, not bias".
"Again… different story if they had manipulated the search results, which the article delivers no evidence of," he insisted.
It is not the first time that conservative media have accused Google of a left-leaning bias.
According to The Daily Caller, the leaked emails have actually become the third case, indicating Google employees' incentives to "weaponize the company's products for left-wing political purposes".
In late November. Peter Hasson of The Daily Caller reported that the Google communications obtained by the media outlet showed that a group of the company's workers discussed ways to prevent Donald Trump from winning again after Hillary Clinton's resounding loss in 2016.
Specifically, the group considered "burying" The Daily Caller and Breitbart, the leading conservative media outlets, in the company's search function.
Before that, in September 2018, Hasson wrote that after Donald Trump issued Executive Order 13769, titled Protecting the Nation from Foreign Terrorist Entry into the United States, commonly known as the "travel ban," Google workers allegedly mulled over ways "to manipulate search results in order to push back against the president's order."
The reporter quoted the Google employees' emails obtained by Daily Caller co-founder Tucker Carlson.
The latest exposure took place just a day before Google CEO Sundar Pichai delivered his testimony before the House Judiciary Committee. Speaking to American lawmakers, Pichai insisted that he runs Google "without political bias."
2018 Was The Year That Climate Change Scare Stories All Fell Apart: See The List Of Debunked Climate Hoaxes
+ The “Global Warming” Hoax: 30 Years Of Failed Predictions That Never Happened January 22 2019 | From: NaturalNews / NaturalNews / Various Climate change fanatics are constantly railing on about how “climate deniers” refuse to acknowledge some ever-elusive consortium of sound climate science.
But if the many climate narrative debacles that occurred in 2018 are any indication, it’s actually the global warming hysterics who’ve buried their heads in pseudoscientific denialism concerning the state of our planet.
No, Earth Won’t Experience A Four or Five Degree Celsius Temperature Increase by the Year 2100
Back in January, a paper published in the journal Nature exposed United Nations (UN) climate change predictions about massive increases in global temperature as absolute bunk.
A revised set of calculations found that the UN’s worst-case scenario temperature increases of four or five degrees Celsius will not be happening any time soon.
Pacific Nation That Climate Fanatics Claim is “Sinking” is Actually Growing
Contrary to what you might have heard, the island nation of Tuvalu out in the Pacific Ocean isn’t shrinking in size due to global warming.
In fact, it was revealed back in February that Tuvalu is actually growing in size – this, despite the fact that sea levels around the island have been rising at twice the global average.
No, Hurricanes Aren’t Getting Stronger Because of “Gobal Warming”
Back in March, BBC News tried to claim that the recent uptick in strong hurricanes is the result of a “warmer world.” As usual, this claim turned out to be false, and the fake news outlet eventually retracted these ridiculous claims.
Climate lunatics love to talk about coral reefs and how they’re allegedly depleting as a result of global warming.
But it was discovered back in April that coral are actually developing new heat-tolerant genes that, would you believe it, are helping to extend their lifespans another 100-250 years, even if the planet does heat up a bit more.
As it turns out, the world’s beaches are actually getting larger rather than smaller, even as fossil fuel emissions have steadily increased by about 64 percent since 1984.
Research published by NASA glaciologist Jay Zwally back in June found that, contrary to what many climate fanatics claim, Antarctic ice is increasing in size, not shrinking.
Polar Bears Aren’t Starving Due to Global Warming
Just one month later, National Geographic was forced to admit that a viral photo of a starving polar bear had nothing to do with climate change – a fact that was reluctantly admitted by the person who took the photo.
France is Experiencing Fewer Climate-Related Disasters
Despite being ground zero for the Paris Climate Accord, the European nation of France is actually experiencing fewer climate-related disasters, despite increases in CO2 (carbon dioxide) output.
Coral Bleaching is Completely Natural
Some climate lunatics have tried to claim that coral bleaching, particularly on the Great Barrier Reef, is being caused by global warming. Wrong. It’s actually been happening naturally for hundreds of years.
In October, it was revealed that “settled” climate predictions for the United Kingdom and Europe may not be so settled after all. As usual, apocalyptic predictions were way overblown, and everything appears to be business as usual.
No, Hurricanes are Not Increasing in Frequency
Getting back to those pesky hurricanes, it turns out that both the number and intensity of such events has remained largely constant for at least the past 117 years, completely debunking climate fear-mongering that claims hurricanes are on the rise.
In December, U.S. climate scientist Judith Curry published an in-depth report looking at peer-reviewed climate studies, revealing that catastrophic sea level rises are highly unlikely, despite what climate fanatics often claim.
The “Global Warming” Hoax: 30 Years Of Failed Predictions That Never Happened
Once upon a time in the late 1980s, the Left devised a behavioral modification scheme aimed at one thing: Future control of as much of the population as possible.
The problem was convincing enough Americans to willingly go along with the plan - a scheme most would never voluntarily agree to because it would involve radical deindustrialization and modification of their lifestyles.
They settled on human-caused “global warming” - the determination that modern existence was causing the planet to heat up so much all life would soon be exterminated…if we didn’t stop being so modern.
The crackpot theory was first introduced by NASA ‘scientist’ Dr. James Hansen in testimony before the U.S. Senate in 1988: “Global warming has begun.”
"The earth has been warmer in the first five months of this year than in any comparable period since measurements began 130 years ago, and the higher temperatures can now be attributed to a long-expected global warming trend linked to pollution, a space agency scientist reported today."
At the time, Hansen - said to be a “leading expert on climate change” - told a Senate committee that he was “99 percent certain” that the warming trend of the day wasn’t due to natural Earth variations but instead was being “caused by a buildup of carbon dioxide and other artificial gases in the atmosphere,” the Times reported.
The Times intoned with this dire warning: “If Dr. Hansen and other scientists are correct, then humans, by burning of fossil fuels and other activities, have altered the global climate in a manner that will affect life on earth for centuries to come.”
Since then, of course, there has been no shortage of wild predictions of mass gloom, doom, and death, thanks to selfish humans (Americans mostly) who care more about their SUV than heating up the planet to the point of extinction.
And while the Left continues to tout this theory as legitimate, none of their predictions have come true. In fact, Hansen’s own charts and computer models from 1988 and earlier have been shown to be ridiculously flawed.
Here are some of the most bizarre, insane, and just plain wrong predictions of disaster:
One of our day’s biggest climate hoaxers, former Vice President Al Gore, predicted in 2006 as he was hyping in his BS (but nevertheless Oscar-winning) documentary, “An Inconvenient Truth,” that unless we took “drastic measures” to reduce “greenhouse gases,” then the world would reach a “point of no return” within a decade.
That prediction is now 12 years old. Mind you, Gore has never been a climate scientist or even a scientist at all; he’s just a political huckster like any other Democrat who claims to have intimate knowledge about the Earth.
In March 2000, a writer for the UK’s Independent wrote that “snowfalls are now just a thing of the past,” as Britain was undergoing “striking environmental change” (thanks to selfish humans).
But then a strange thing happened; England kept seeing snowfall. In fact, in March of this year rural UK received so much snow, one longtime resident of rural England remarked: “I’ve never seen anything like this.”
In 2007, Australia’s The Age pondered, “Can climate change get worse? It has,” onto its way to predict “more catastrophic damages from climate change than in the worst-case scenario forecast by international experts.”
That, ostensibly, included losing most of the Australian continent to flooding as melting ice dramatically increased the sea level.
There are many more, and Tony Heller of RealClimateScience.com put together a video of 30 years’ worth of bogus global warming/climate change predictions that never came true (and never will).
Proven: Monsanto Knew The Dangers Of Its Chemicals But Kept Selling Them Anyway & Gene Editing Drives Into Dangerous Unknown Territory January 21 2019 | From: NaturalNews / Scoop / Various
It’s taken almost 50 years to come to fruition, but there’s now solid proof to show that the world’s most evil corporation, Monsanto, deliberately sold deadly chemicals on the consumer market that it knew all along were harmful to humans.
As part of the epic Poison Papers archive, which we’ve covered previously, thousands of pages of internal documents highlight how Monsanto was fully aware that a family of chemicals known as PCBs or polychlorinated biphenyls, were not only detrimental to human health, but also environmentally persistent – meaning they don’t biodegrade that easily.
Monsanto has apparently known since the 1950s that PCBs weren’t exactly safe, and yet the Missouri-based corporation continued to sell these products regardless.
And thanks to the tireless work of investigative journalist Peter von Stackelberg and Oregon-based amateur investigator Carol Van Strum, it’s now all on the record.
“As I got deeper and deeper into it, I couldn’t continue to ignore the fact that there was something seriously wrong with the industry and the regulatory system,” von Stackelberg, who first started reporting on the dirty deeds of the chemical industry several decades ago, told Inlander about what he uncovered.
Spokane, Washington, Sues Monsanto Following PCB Revelation
One of von Stackelberg’s discoveries pertained to PCB chemicals manufactured by Monsanto that he revealed were carelessly dumped into Washington’s Spokane River by the chemical giant.
The resultant PCB contamination of this body of water has been problematic for quite some time as a result of this – which, thanks to these new revelations, is finally allowing the city to seek justice.
According to reports, the City of Spokane is filing a lawsuit against Monsanto that it hopes will lead to a retrieval of funds necessary to remediate the contamination.
Von Stackelberg also put on a special event to talk about it entitled, “Monsanto, PCBs and the Spokane River,” which took place at Gonzaga University back in September.
Many Chemical Companies Have Been Lying About the safety of Their Products, von Stackeberg Says
The unfortunate reality is that this doesn’t stop with Monsanto.
Von Stackelberg’s laborious research throughout the 1980s led him on a rabbit trail of discoveries, including the fact that many different chemical companies at the time were pulling the same shenanigans as Monsanto when it came to lying about the safety and effectiveness of their products.
After hearing rumors that his local provincial government in Saskatchewan was mulling over a ban on more than 100 chemicals commonly used in agriculture, von Stackelberg got to work.
What he discovered was that many of these approved chemicals had been given the green light by a corrupt testing lab in the United States known as Industrial Bio-Test (IBT) Laboratories.
“The list of chemicals was actually jaw dropping in terms of the ones where there were serious questions about the safety studies,” von Stackelberg recalls.
Inspired by what he had uncovered, von Stackelberg then decided to take a closer look at various other chemicals used in food, drugs, and more – only to discover that these, too, had questionable safety backing based on potentially fraudulent science.
In the end, von Stackelberg’s work resulted in multiple criminal charges being filed against IBT. But unfortunately, this legal action didn’t change the practices of the industry for the better, as they’ve only continued on with their lies and deception up to this very day.
“The whole thing sort of faded away and 40 years later, we’re still dealing with the pollution, the corruption, the fraud and so on,” says von Stackelberg.
“I call IBT the original sin of the EPA regulatory system. It’s never been something I would say can be trusted.”
Gene Editing Drives Into Dangerous Unknown Territory
The Royal Society Te Apārangi is inviting feedback on scenarios for the use of gene editing in the primary industry sector.
Are they leading New Zealand agriculture and horticulture into dangerous unknown territory when they promote genetically engineered Gene Drives without regulation?
“This thin veil of consultation is hyped with cultish obsession on gene drives that permits no dissention” said Claire Bleakley, President of GE Free NZ.
New Zealand has developed in the laboratory plants and animals which have reached a point where to get a return on the investments and patents commercialization of the GMO’s is the next step.
However, it appears that the Crown Research Institutes and private investors are not willing to undertake safety studies to show that their GMO’s are safe so they are launching a massive advertorial media drive trying to undermine the regulatory process.
“This pretense is to force feed the public with glossy pictures and possibilities of new products using a MarkII genetic engineering technology, that does not have the dangers and failures of transgenic genetic engineering,” said Ms. Bleakley
Gene drives are synthetically made enzymes made using laboratory procedures. They act like scissors, cutting out, altering, pasting, silencing and rewriting the cells information.
These changes, when made in pest species, can persist in nature until the organism is driven to extinction. There are unknown and unconsidered dangers on the impacts if the GE constructs spread to non-target populations.
Evidence in the last few years show that changes to organisms using genetic engineered gene drives are not precise or easy to develop and have many unknown risks to the cells and the developing organism.
These change are permanent, and inherited. When eaten the constructs can be absorbed by the gut resulting in abnormalities in blood and organs as well as causing auto immune reactions.
“The hype around the ease and precision of gene drives for gene editing of plants contradicts the complex changes that occur and pose unknown risks to people, the environment and ecosystems” said Claire Bleakley, “Once released they are released permanently in the environment and cannot be recalled.”
The EU has declared them GMO’s so has New Zealand law, requiring them to be regulated. We call on the Government to not fall for the hype and ensure the GE drives are kept regulated.
It is imperative that all advanced technologies derived through in-vitro techniques are fully regulated under the HSNO Act and have full governmental oversight.
“Indeed, anyone who is pro-science should understand that science is meant to study nature, not to modify it - and certainly not to predict, in the face of strong evidence, the absence of unintended effects.
The real anti-science movement is not on the streets. It is, as I discovered, in the laboratories of corporate America.”
Six Issues That Are Agenda 21 & Agenda 21 In One Easy Lesson January 20 2019 | From: AmericanPolicyCenter / Various
Every day, in meetings at all levels of government, representatives of Non-Governmental Organizations (NGOs), planning groups, surround elected representatives and insist that their policies have nothing to do with international agendas.
They regularly publish reports and rail against anyone even mentioning the names Agenda 21 or the new Agenda 2030. “No, no, no,” they insist. “Those people are just crazy conspiracy theorists. Ours is just a local plan for our community.”
Elected Representatives are often confused. Issues and policies suddenly appear in front of them with sample, ready-made legislation. And then the unending pressure begins for them to pass it.
There is confusion, uncertainty and there is the herd mentality to pass legislation. And it’s passed without knowledge of its origins, its purpose, and especially a lack of understanding of its consequences. “Just do it,” goes the mantra.
What most of these legislators fail to understand is the direct relationship much of this legislation has with a much larger agenda. Most legislation interconnects with other pieces and parts contained in other legislation.
Like the children’s song goes…”the toe bone’s connected to the ankle bone…” And it’s done so well, wrapped in innocent-sounding, positive wrapping, so that most elected representatives will argue vigorously that they passed no such thing.
And most of all, they will answer, Agenda 21, never heard of it. Just local. Just local. Just local.
Well, let me show you how it works and how the toe bone gets connected to the ankle bone ending up with the Frankenstein monster.
Here are six issues that are rarely connected to Agenda 21 and Sustainable Development (especially when we are assured that Agenda 21 has nothing to do with local, state or federal government policy).
However, these seemingly unrelated policies, once implemented, help enforce the stated Agenda 21 goal of “reorganizing human society.”
Issue 1: Global Warming / Climate Change
It has been so discredited in the true scientific community that proponents have become almost hysterical in their continued attempts to enforce Climate Change policy.
Most recently the Justice Department is considering legal action against “deniers.” Why don’t they stop, even to question if their science is sound?
They instead use great energy to attack any scientist who does dare ask questions or finds data contrary to the “official” line.
Why is it so vitally important that they continue to promote something that clearly is, to say the least, questionable?
It’s because all of Agenda 21 policy is built on the premise that man is destroying the Earth. Climate Change is their “proof.” To eliminate that premise is to remove all credibility and purpose for their entire agenda.
They are willing to go to any length, even lies, to keep the climate change foot on our throats.
On the local level this translates into planning policy that controls energy use and the efforts to cut down on the use of cars, enforcement of the building of expensive light rail train systems and bike paths and installation of smart meters, etc.
But don’t take my word for it. I’ll let them speak for themselves:
“No matter if the science of global warming is all phony… climate change provides the greatest opportunity to bring about justice and equality in the world.”
-
Christine Stewart (Former Canadian Minister of the Environment)
“We’ve got to ride this global warming issue. Even if the theory of global warming is wrong, we will be doing the right thing in terms of economic and environmental policy.” Timothy Wirth (President, UN Foundation)
“It doesn’t matter what is true. It only matters what people believe is true.”
This
is the central driving force behind nearly every Sustainable policy initiative. It’s the real force behind Stack and Pack Smart Growth cities.
The fact is, in developed nations populations are actually going down. The only real growth in the US population in recent years has been from immigration, legal or otherwise.
Open border immigration policy is actually implementation of Agenda 21 as part of the drive to destroy national sovereignty and “nation states.”
Environmentalists insist that the borders must be open to allow as many to immigrate here as possible.
They argue that the U.S. has a greater ability to control them and protect the environment than if we left them in third world countries. That’s because the Greens already have a stranglehold over our nation’s industry through massive environmental regulations.
In the face of their fear of overpopulation, however, studies have shown that there is no world wide over population crisis. In fact one study insists that we could put the entire population of the world in an area the size of Texas with a population density of Paris, France.
Over population, and its accompanying environmental degradation, is a problem primarily in countries where the poor are deprived by government to improve their conditions. Nations that refuse to legalize private property ownership for the masses, for example, are a primary reason for growing poverty.
Meanwhile, Sustainablists work to keep these nations from developing or increasing energy use, thereby keeping them poor. Green regulations stop the building of infrastructure.
They panic at the idea of increased energy use in developing nations. Instead of working to solve the real problems – the root of poverty- they exploit the excuse of over population and advocate enforcing polices to drastically reduce populations. China’s brutal one child policy of forced abortions and sterilization has become their model.
Do you think I’m joking? Then consider these quotes from the Sustainablists:
“Childbearing should be a punishable crime against society, unless the parents hold a government license. All potential parents should be required to use contraceptive chemicals, the government issuing antidotes to citizens chosen for childbearing.”
-
David Brower (Sierra Club)
“A reasonable estimate for an industrialized world society at the present North American material standard of living would be 1 billion. At a more frugal European standard of living, 2 to 3 billion would be possible.”
-
United Nations Global Biodiversity Assessment
Issue 3: The Destruction of the Free Market System
We have heard statement after statement from the UN; from members of Congress; the news media; and from Hollywood, all deriding the free market system as evil, corrupt and a tool of the rich to hold down the poor.
So now, after deciding that the poor are expendable for the sake of stopping overpopulation, suddenly the planners are worried about them – if it leads to their ability to raid our bank accounts.
So are they really worried about protecting the environment – or are they actually honoring the tactics of Jesse James?
Redistribution of wealth is behind every policy that comes out of the UN, and now the Obama Administration as well. The EPA is the attack dog to shut down entire industries like coal.
It has become very difficult to operate a manufacturing business in the US, and nearly impossible to start a new one. Environmental protection is always the excuse, even when Obama’s own State Department said the Keystone Pipeline was not an environmental threat.
A couple of years ago, radical greens, wielding torches, demonstrated outside the home of the head of the Keystone pipeline company. Visions of the terror of the Dark Agenda?
At the UN’s Rio + 20 Summit held in 2012, the idea of “Zero Economic Growth” was advocated – just to keep things fair. It was stated that even the building of new roads upsets the status quo and disrupts a well ordered society.
Such idiotic ideas are the driving force behind Sustainable Development. Again, images of the Dark Ages come to mind.
Yet, consider “local” planning programs that cut off access roads, and again, discourage cars. What about the EPA’s war on industry. Pretty hard to have economic growth without industry.
The timber industry is killed and communities die. Dams are torn down and farmers disappear. Zero Economic Growth in the making. Just local?
Again, not my words, let them tell you themselves:
“We must make this an insecure and inhospitable place for capitalists and their projects. We must reclaim the roads and plowed lands, halt dam construction, tear down existing dams, free shackled rivers and return to wilderness millions of acres of presently settled land.”
-
Dave Foreman, (Earth First)
“Global sustainability requires the deliberate quest of poverty, reduced resource consumption and set levels of mortality control” Professor Maurice King (Population Control Advocate)
“We believe planning should be a tool for allocating resources…and eliminating the great inequalities of wealth and power in our society… because the free market has proven itself incapable of doing this.”
-
Plannersnetwork.org Statement of Principles. the American Planning Association is a member and supporter of these principles
Issue 4: Cheap Energy is the Enemy of the Earth
To the average person the drive to stop any ability to obtain cheap energy makes no sense. People are hurting economically. Jobs are lost. Energy costs are skyrocketing.
Any attempt to drill oil, fracking of shale gas, and mining coal are all vigorously blocked by government and green policy. Yet the government spends billions of dollars on “alternative energy” such as wind and solar, which provides less than 3% of our energy needs.
Why? What is the motivation to put such shackles on the US economic engine?
The excuse is that energy use drives up CO2 emissions and accelerates global warming – the excuse necessary to “harmonize” the US into the socialist, Sustainable global noose.
Many current state and local policies now are moving to increase taxes at the gas pump to keep energy costs high. In addition, Obama issued an Executive Order to ban any off shore drilling of oil.
So, just as the consumer started to get a break at the pump, higher taxes and Obama’s action forcd prices back up. As the prices rise the “planners” will insist that the only solution is to enforce the building of expensive public transportation.
But, according to some anti-energy advocates, the fear of cheap energy goes beyond environmental protection – energy availability helps build wealth for individuals and removes them from the rolls of the dependent – the opposite goal of sustainable policy.
“Giving society cheap, abundant energy is the worst thing that could ever happen to the planet.”
-
Prof. Paul Ehrlich Professor of Population Studies, Stanford University)
“Complex technology of any sort is an assault on human dignity. It would be little short of disastrous for us to discover a source of clean, cheap, abundant energy, because of what we might do with it.”
-
Amory Lovins (Rocky Mountain Institute)
“The prospect of cheap fusion energy is the worst thing that could happen to the planet.”
-
Jeremy Rifkin (Greenhouse Crisis Foundation)
Issue 5: Common Core
Many people see the reorganization of the public school issue as separate from Agenda 21. It’s not. Those who are promoting what they call the Agenda for the 21st Century understand that it is going to be a long drawn out process.
To “reform” a nation created on the ideals of limited government, free enterprise and individual liberty into one that unquestioningly accepts government top down control will take time and a determined effort.
There’s no room in a Sustainablist society for those who believe that we were born with our rights and that government’s job is to protect those rights. The sustainable system says government will grant us our rights.
To enforce such a radical turn around of our society requires that the children be indoctrinated to accept it.
The effort started in earnest in the 1990's under the Clinton Administration through the massive growth of the Department of Education in such programs as Goals 2000, School To Work and Workforce Development Boards.
The original Western education system effectively provided an overall academic education from which students could choose their own futures. No longer.
Today, the new curriculum has morphed into what is called Common Core. It’s a State run central curriculum that revamps schools into little more than job training and indoctrination centers.
Because, you see, today’s public education system is also designed to strip the children of their attitudes, values and beliefs that parents may have instilled, and indoctrinate them into accepting global values – global citizenship and a global economy based on the sustainable agenda.
Little of civics and history are taught in today’s classroom. But text books contain whole chapters on the Five Pillars of Islam, while ignoring the 10 Commandments of Christianity.
The children are fed an unending diet of the evils of capitalism; the selfishness of individualism, and the social justice of redistribution of wealth.
It punishes students for possessing individuality and is designed to eliminate such natural human tendencies. That is the “common” in Common Core. Common values, common goals, common future. Don’t rock the boat of a well ordered society.
Common Core is the nationally dictated curriculum necessary for the acceptance and implementation of Agenda 21.
Of course, we still elect local school boards pretending they have some say over the curriculum. It makes us all feel safer for our children.
How, then do we explain the surge of Bernie Sanders and the Tsunami of Socialism?
Well, today nearly every adult up to the age of 40 has gone thought this indoctrination, trained to accept a future chosen for them by someone else.
The education system was fully outlined in a very detailed letter to Hillary Clinton from Marc Tucker of the National Center on Education and the Economy in November, 1992, immediately after Bill. Clinton was elected President.
Said Tucker: “First, a vision of the kind of national – not federal – human resources development system the nation could have. This is interwoven with a new approach to governing that should inform that vision.
What is essential is that we create a seamless web of opportunities to develop one’s skills that literally extends from cradle to grave and is the same system for everyone…” coordinated by “a system of labor market boards at the local, state, and federal levels” where curriculum and “job matching” will be handled by counselors “accessing the integrated computer-based program.”
How is healthcare connected to Agenda 21? Simply Google “Sustainable Medicine” and you will find more than 5,850,000 English language references to the subject. Read through the ideas expressed there and you will find nearly every provision of Obamacare.
An expert on Sustainable Medicine, the late Dr. Madeleine Cosman, put it this way: “Sustainable Medicine + Sustainable Development = Duty to Die.”
Sustainable medicine makes decisions through visioning councils that determine what shall be done or not done to each body in its group in its native habitat.
Sustainable medicine experts do not refer to citizens in sovereign nations, but to “humans” in their “settlements.”
Sustainable medicine is the pivot around which all other Sustainable Development revolves. Principle #1 of the Rio Declaration that introduced Agenda 21 is that all humans must live in harmony with nature.
The translation means rationing healthcare, low technology for health care treatment and emphasis on medical care not cure. And that, of course, will lead to population reduction, as called for in Agenda 21.
These are the issues that are not usually discussed or connected to Agenda 21.
Yet they are being implemented, step by step, by local planners in policies that are approved by befuddled elected representatives.
It’s all driven through pressure from private NGO groups and funded by federal grants. That’s how it’s done, constantly driven a little bit with each innocent sounding idea. Then, without warning, Frankenstein rises from behind the smokescreen, toe bones and anklebones fully operational.
People must understand and connect these dots to everyday issues so they can clearly see the root and long term goals of these policies that are affecting our personal lives.
Elected representatives at every level of government must come to understand that legislative actions have consequences far beyond their understanding.
Agenda 21 is the “common core” and it has already invaded every level of our society. Our battle cry must be to stop this monster or watch freedom perish.
2. Collect those 500 million into tightly managed and controlled (stacked-and-packed) 'cities'.
3. Make the majority of the world's land mass off-limits to all but the elite.
Awareness of Agenda 21 and Sustainable Development is racing across the nation as citizens in community after community are learning what their local council and city planners are actually up to.
Do not allow this to be your only knowledgemof this very complex subject. Research, know your details; discover the NGO players inbyour community; identify who is victimized by the policies and recruit them to your fight; and then kill Agenda 21. That’s how it must be done. The information below is only your first step. Happy hunting.
What is Sustainable Development?
According to its authors, the objective of sustainable development is to integrate economic, social and environmental policies in order to achieve reduced consumption, social equity, and the preservation and restoration of biodiversity.
Sustainablists insist that every societal decision be based on environmental impact, focusing on three components; global land use, global education, and global population control and reduction.
Social justice is described as the right and opportunity of all people “to benefit equally from the resources afforded us by society and the environment.”
Redistribution of wealth.
Private property is a social injustice since not everyone can build wealth from it. National sovereignty is a social injustice. Universal health care is a social injustice. All part of Agenda 21 policy.
Economic Prosperity
Public Private Partnerships (PPP). Special dealings between government and certain, chosen corporations which get tax breaks, grants and the government’s power to implement sustainable policy.
Government-sanctioned monopolies.
Local Sustainable Development policies include:
Smart Growth, Wildlands Project, Resilient Cities, Regional Visioning Projects, STAR Sustainable Communities, Green jobs, Green Building Codes, “Going Green,” Alternative Energy, Local Visioning, facilitators, regional planning, historic preservation, conservation easements, development rights, sustainable farming, comprehensive planning, growth management, consensus.
Local Councils, Governments, Planning Councils, Planning Groups, aided by Mayors, Administrators and many private
organizations and other government agencies. Foundation and government $$$$ grants drive the process.
It is the salaried individuals who will fine and tax you, restrict what you can do on your own land, and if you don't conform, they will confiscate your property and even jail you. Why - their jobs and their salaries are more important than you.
Where Did it Originate?
The term Sustainable Development was first introduced to the world in the pages a 1987 report (Our Common Future) produced by the United Nations World Commission on Environmental and Development, authored by Gro Harlem Brundtland, VP of the World Socialist Party.
The term was first offered as official UN policy in 1992, in a document called UN Sustainable Development Agenda 21, issued at the UN’s Earth Summit, today referred to simply as Agenda 21.
What Gives Agenda 21 Ruling Authority?
More than 178 nations adopted Agenda 21 as official policy during a signing ceremony at the Earth Summit. US president George H.W. Bush signed the document for the US. In signing, each nation pledge to adopt the goals of Agenda 21.
In 1995, President Bill Clinton, in compliance with Agenda 21, signed Executive Order #12858 to create the President’s Council on Sustainable Development in order to “harmonize” environmental policy with UN directives as outlined in Agenda 21.
The EO directed all agencies of the Federal Governments to work with state and local community governments in a joint effort “reinvent” government using the guidelines outlined in Agenda 21.
As a result, Sustainable Development is now emerging as government policy in every town, county and state in the West.
Revealing Quotes From the Planners
“Agenda 21 proposes an array of actions which are intended to be implemented by EVERY person on Earth... it calls for specific changes in the activities of ALL people...
Effective execution of Agenda 21 will REQUIRE a profound reorientation of ALL humans, unlike anything the world has ever experienced... ”
- Agenda 21: The Earth Summit Strategy to Save Our Planet (Earthpress, 1993)
Agenda 21 and Private Property
“Land... cannot be treated as an ordinary asset, controlled by individuals and subject to the pressures and inefficiencies of the market.
Private land ownership is also a principal instrument of accumulation andconcentration of wealth, therefore contributes to social injustice.”
- From the report from the 1976 UN’s Habitat I Conference.
“Private land use decisions are often driven by strong economic incentives that result in several ecological and aesthetic consequences...The key to overcoming it is through public policy...”
-
Report from the President’s Council on Sustainable Development, page 112.
“Current lifestyles and consumption patterns of the affluent middle class – involving high meat intake, use of fossil fuels, appliances, home and work air conditioning, and suburban housing are not sustainable.”
- Maurice Strong, Secretary General of the UN’s Earth Summit, 1992. “Individual rights will have to take a back seat to the collective.”
Harvey Ruvin, Vice Chairman, ICLEI. The Wildlands Project: “We must make this place an insecure and inhospitable place for Capitalists and their projects – we must reclaim the roads and plowed lands, halt dam construction, tear down existing dams, free shackled rivers and return to wilderness millions of tens of millions of acres or presently settled land.”
- Dave Foreman, Earth First
What is Not Sustainable?
“Ski runs, grazing of livestock, plowing of soil, building fences, industry, single family homes, paves and tarred roads, logging activities, dams and reservoirs, power line construction, and economic systems that fail to set proper value on the environment.”
"Participating in a UN advocated planning process would very likely bring out many of the conspiracy- fixated groups and individuals in our society...
This segment of our society who fear ‘one-world government’ and a UN invasion of the United States through which our individual freedom would be stripped away would actively work to defeat any elected official who joined ‘the conspiracy’ by undertaking" - LA21.
Five Pieces Of Essential Life Advice From Seniors January 19 2019 | From: IdeasTed / Various
Enjoy these insights from older Americans on the key ingredients for a good life, and get inspired to do your own interview for this year’s Great Thanksgiving Listen.
It’s hard to feel a sweeping sense of perspective when you’re stuck in traffic, or feeling buried by work, or overwhelmed by family demands. But those are exactly the moments when some words of wisdom from your elders - the people who’ve been there, like the ones below - can come in handy.
Each of these insights comes from a conversation conducted during the Great Thanksgiving Listen, an annual initiative from TED Prize winner Dave Isay and his team at StoryCorps that asks people to interview an older family member or friend during the US holiday weekend.
By participating, you could unlock new stories about your family or gain a different perspective on historical events, while ensuring your loved one’s story is preserved in the StoryCorps Archive at the Library of Congress’ American Folklife Center.
And you might just hear a piece of useful advice that will get you through a difficult moment.
Think of Hard Times Like Bad Weather - They Too Will Pass
Arden Fleming, 15, calls her grandmother Agneta Vulliet her “biggest role model.”
Vulliet, the daughter of French immigrants, grew up in New York City, and she says she first learned about independence when she went to boarding school.
Vulliet left school before graduation to get married, and ended up getting her high school degree at night school - while raising two kids.
She studied art in college, where a professor was impressed with her determination and recommended her for a scholarship.
Toward the end of their interview, recorded in October 2017 in Wellfleet, Massachusetts, Fleming asked her grandmother for advice.
“What I want you to know and keep in mind is that your 20s are very turbulent and that it does get better,” Vulliet says.
“You want so much for yourself, you have such expectations, you have so many wishes to succeed, and there’s a lot of anxiety that goes with how all that will take shape.
I never want you to get carried away with how hard it seems.” She adds, “Growing up is a lot like the weather.
Every time you hit the big storms that seem like they’re going to snow you under, it will change and get better - and the sun will come out.”
Bill Janz traveled the world as a journalist, and wrote a column for the Milwaukee Journal Sentinel about ordinary people who’d shown remarkable courage.
In a 2015 interview with his 14-year-old grandson, Jasper Kashou in Freedonia, Wisconsin, the now-retired Janz shared memorable stories from his days as a reporter - of almost falling off an elephant into tall grass where a tiger was hiding while in India, and of crawling on his belly to avoid sniper fire in Croatia during the Bosnian War.
But when Kashou asked him about the person who’d impacted him the most, Janz spoke of someone closer to home. “A boy named Eddy helped me see a little bit about what life is all about,” says Janz.
Eddy was a 10-year-old he’d written about whose leg was amputated due to cancer. “No matter what happened to him, he never gave up,” he recalls.
“I called Eddy once at home, and the phone rang and rang and rang. Finally, he picked up the phone. I said, ‘Eddy. I was just about to hang up. Where were you?’
And he said, ‘Bill, I was in another room. My crutches weren’t near, so I crawled to the phone.’” Janz often finds himself thinking about that conversation.
“He was only a young man, but he was teaching an old man to never give up,” Janz said. “I sometimes tend to give up and go do something else, and [he helps me] remember not to do that.”
Love Your Work - For the Salary and For the People
Bennie Stewart, 80, got his first job at age 7 - he’d run errands for his neighbors and get paid in chicken eggs.
In a 2015 interview with grandaughter Vanyce Grant, 17, in Chicago, he talked through his many jobs. Stewart chopped cotton for $3 a day in 115 degree heat; bused dishes; cleaned buildings as a janitor; sold insurance; and eventually found his passion as a social worker and, later, as a pastor.
Grant asked his grandfather about what led him to these different occupations.
“I love talking to people,” Stewart says. “I’ve been told I have the gift of gab, so I can talk and I can grasp things real fast. I always took pride in being able to listen to instructions and pick them up quick.”
What lessons did he learn from his work experience? “It taught me that I can have something of my own and provide for my family and get some of the things in life that I couldn’t,” he says.
These themes echo those in an interview that Torri Noakes, 16, recorded with her grandmother Evelyn Trouser, 59, in 2016 in Flint, Michigan. Trouser worked in auto factories, first on the line and then as a welder.
“My advice to everybody in my family: learn to take care of yourself. Don’t depend on anyone to provide you with anything,” Trouser says.
She refuted any notion that her jobs were dreary. “I used to love going to work,” she said. “It’s the people you’re with that makes a job fun or not. As far as I’m concerned, it’s the people you’re with that make things different.”
Find Mentors Who Can Guide You and Challenge You
Allen Ebert, 73, reminisced about his working days in an interview with grandson Isaiah Ebert, 15, also recorded in 2016 in Flint. Ebert first worked as a welder in an auto factory when he was young and said the experience helped him once he entered medical school.
“If you understand how something works, when it breaks you know what to look for and how to fix it,” he said. “Even the body is mechanical.”
When Ebert spoke about his experiences as a doctor, he impressed one thing upon his grandson: look for mentors. “The stuff you’re doing right now in school, you’re learning from people who know something you don’t know. Continue that throughout your life,” he says.
To find mentors, you should look beyond your bosses and teachers. “Just develop relationships with people whom you can observe, even from a distance, and see how they accomplish things,” Ebert says.
“The way I look at it: in life, we probably make 95 percent good decisions and about 5 percent messed-up decisions. A large part of our lives as adults is fixing the mess of those few wrong decisions, and you can minimize them by just having people in your life who will challenge you and make you think twice, who will say, ‘Well, that doesn’t sound right to me.’”
Make the Most of Less
According to StoryCorps, many people use the Great Thanksgiving Listen as a time to ask about family recipes.
Along with step-by-step instructions, they receive a slice of family history, as well as life advice.
Some of the stories highlight one of the secrets to a life well-lived: learning to make the most of what you have. Kiefer Inson, 28, talked to his grandmother Patricia Smith, 80, about her classic tuna noodle casserole made with canned tuna.
“When I was 18, I was married and had a child and did not have an outside job, so I’d go to the library, bring home cookbooks, and try the recipes,” Smith says.
“Back then, we were on a very limited budget. A pound of fish cost 69 cents, so I learned to cook a lot of things with that.” Jaxton Bloemhard, 16, interviewed his mother, Bethany Bloemhard, 38, about Ukranian pierogies. She told him how her own grandmother would make hundreds at a time.
“She’d tell stories about how they kept the Ukranian people alive,” says Bethany Bloemhard. “The Ukrainians grew potatoes like nobody’s business, and as long as you had flour, water and some oil, you could make the dough.”
Other stories point to the need to keep trying until you succeed. June Maggard, 87, spoke to her granddaughter Emily Sprouse, 33, about the recipe book that she’s kept for 30 years. “People say they can’t make bread or biscuits, or anything really, but you just have to learn the feel,” Maggard says. “That comes by doing.”
MMS Does Not Cure Stupidity January 18 2019 | From: JimHumble / MMSnews
You might say to yourself, “well, that is a different topic”. Yes, it is and let me explain to you why I feel I needed to write about this topic.
First of all, we at the Genesis II Church have the ability to “cure”, “heal” and “treat” 95+% of the world's diseases effectively and permanently! This is contrary to the “mainstream medical” procedures which only “treat” symptoms and are not in the business to cure anything!
Did you see what I just wrote? Did it sink in? If what I am saying is true then the people that trust the medical system to “cure” them of any disease are wasting their time! The whole system is set up to keep you as a client, i.e. “sick your entire life and dependent on their system”. To me, for a person to trust a system like that is pure STUPIDITY. MMS cannot cure stupidity!
The definition of “stupid” is lacking thought or intelligence. Example: I just made another stupid mistake.
Another definition of “stupid” is silly or unwise; showing poor judgment or little intelligence: Example: She was really stupid to quit her job like that. (Source)
I am not calling anyone stupid but, the action of trusting a system that cannot, will not and does not want to cure anything, is plain stupid!
Now, you might say, well, that is a little harsh and people just don't know, so they are not stupid but “ignorant” of the truth. Well, that might be correct in principle but in reality, if a person is trusting his or her life to a system that is profiting by people being sick then that is not ignorance but stupidity to me.
Every day people see the population worldwide becoming sicker and sicker. How many of us have seen friends and relatives die slow painful deaths due to mainstream medical procedures? It is not ignorance when we all see it every day.
The problem is people are lazy and do not want to take control of their own health so, they transfer the control of their most precious gift and commodity they have -LIFE- to a “medical doctor”.
The words “medical doctor” are not synonymous with truth and science.
In our world people today “revere”, “respect” and even “worship” anyone that is called a “medical doctor”. Although, I believe people that have worked hard to achieve a certain degree deserve the recognition for their hard work, I don't believe that they should be “blindly” followed or believed as having all truth when it comes to health.
I am NOT saying that a man or woman that is studying “medicine” are not smart individuals. No, just the contrary. They are some of the smartest people I have known on an intellectual level. The “truth” is they “sincerely” believe what they have been taught is the truth, but they are “sincerely wrong”!
The sad story is a medical doctor has been trained in a profession that DOES NOT have, as its goal, to cure ANY disease but to control symptoms of disease. This is taught in every government approved medical school in the world. “Government approved” medical schools are nothing more than medical schools that are controlled by the same people that own the pharmaceutical companies!
Paid for fraudulent research science papers: WakingScience Look at the billions pharmaceutical companies are paying for negligence and fraud by drugs “approved” by FDA! • GSK sued for 3 billion!
You see all the above facts and you still trust the pharmaceutical / medical industry? How about the fact that the Rockefeller family has ownership of every drug company in the world
There is a controversial movie called, “Vaxxed” that exposes how the MMR vaccine is linked to autism. The information is good about the CDC hiding data but the message from the producer is just plain “stupid”!
He states that parents should wait until the 3rd year before their child receives the MMR vaccine. A child should never receive this vaccine no matter what the age! This idea of getting the vaccine in the 3rd year is STUPID! MMS cannot cure this kind of stupidity!
Again, I am not calling anyone stupid, only the actions of people I am calling stupid. Can you see why I would say this? Ask yourself if you are acting stupid in regard to your health? Every person on earth needs to “take control” of his or her health! Each person needs to do their “due diligence”, meaning research it out and see what is best for his or her personal health.
I guarantee that poisoning the body with medicines, toxic chemicals and unhealthy foods is not the way. This is the “allopathic” method taught and used in 95% of the world's medical systems! You have to look elsewhere to find how to restore and maintain health. Here is a guy, Donald, that just left our Colombia Health Restoration Center. He had done his due diligence and after 10 years finally found what helped him when all other methods he tried failed!
Another way to do your own “due diligence” and “take control” of your own health is to take the Genesis II Church On line Video Course.
Here you can not only learn how to start using MMS and the G2 sacraments that “cure” 95% of the world's diseases but learn “how to make MMS” in your own home! We now have over 1750 “health ministers” worldwide in over 120 countries! Join us and help us change the world!
Send your family and friends this link to help them understand what the Genesis II Church of Health and Healing is doing worldwide with MMS and its Sacramental protocols: www.QuantumLeap.is
It has helped a lot of people decide to do their own “due diligence” in regard to restoring or maintaining their health!
We are changing the world by the 10's of 1,000's
Archbishop Mark S. Grenon
Have you or anyone you know had good results with MMS? Please share a testimony at our MMS Testimonials site: Write a testimony.
A total of 223 children have been recovered (ATEC score of 10 or below,) using the CD Autism parasite protocol published in Kerri Rivera´s new book Healing the Symptoms Known as Autism available here. CD stands for Chlorine Dioxide, which is an inexpensive, broad spectrum, gentle, anti-pathogenic.
Undeniable proof that the Red Cross cured 154 Malaria cases with MMS, in their water purification study in Uganda, 2012: This video was leaked and released 1st of July 2013 and makes it impossible for the Red Cross to keep claiming that the study never took place, as was their response to the 2nd of may video.
Spirit Led Activism - The True Power Of The People + Rites Of Passage - Encountering Spiritual “Initiations” On The Path January 17 2019 | From: WakingTimes / WakeUpWorld
As the world is driven into a state of chaos by a combination of top down despotism and bottom up politically correct pacifism, seekers of ‘the path’ sit in the lotus position contemplating their navels or drifting into the ether of another world.
Seeking to participate in inner spiritual disciplines can quite easily be used as an excuse for doing nothing. Nothing about anything that actually matters.
Nothing that would constitute making a stand against the destruction going on all around us.
I say “can be quite easily used” because many aspirants who fill spiritual seminars, workshops, conferences and retreats all over the planet, have adopted the popular view that they shouldn’t be involved in confronting anything – except possibly, themselves.
The claim they make is that trying to prevent something bad from happening goes against ‘inner spiritual work.’ It is ‘confrontational’ and therefore encourages a negative vibration, when what is called for is “peace, love and tolerance”.
This is an evasion of the simple human responsibility (response-ability) to act when faced by stark cases of injustice and cruelty.
It is not a spiritual reaction at all; it is rather the opposite, a simple act of cowardice which hides behind metaphysical teachings that say one must go ‘inward’ only, rather than outward, if one wants to do any good in the world.
Such a convenient mantra for those who wish to avoid feeling or taking any responsibility for the shocking levels of cruelty and destruction which they themselves freely admit to witnessing, and indirectly supporting, on a daily level.
“No” such people say, “we will make a better world only by meditating and changing the vibrational level from carbon to crystalline.
It is not for us to do battle with the forces of evil that control this world. If they succeed in their ambitions – and trash our planet in the process – it is because evil is still more prevalent than good, so we must keep meditating in order to become more spiritual and avoid being caught up in any form of conflict!”
Now the irony of this situation is really quite profound. Because what these spirit seekers are saying and doing – assuming that at least some are really ‘doing’ their spirit work and are not on a purely escapist trip – is not out-and-out wrong.
But, without an equal and complementary commitment to cease supporting that which they know to be insupportable – plus a commitment to give active service to humanity and pressing planetary needs, it is essentially meaningless and should be recognized as a form of deception.
Only half of something whole – taken as if it was whole – is a dangerous delusion. A half truth, when taken to be whole truth, is indeed a grand deception and one particularly popular with the political class.
Spiritual self-improvement must always be coupled to tangible actions in support of humanity, otherwise it becomes regressive.
At the other end of the spectrum, there are those who join protest movements and direct action groups, who won’t hear of anything to do with ‘the spiritual’ getting in their way.
People who are often brave and indeed courageous souls, and whose struggle to protect the Creator’s kingdom against wanton acts of destruction is considerably closer to the true essence of spirituality than is the cosseted world in which many of the so-called spiritual aspirants reside.
Bravery is an important quality, but many of those heading out to block attempts to drive a new motorway through a pristine forest would be a hundred times more effective if they added the power of a conscious spiritual intent to their struggle.
Why, oh why, do people have to identify with one or other of these approaches? Why cannot we all settle for declaring ourselves ‘spiritual activists’ and get on with the job?
This is the quality that really has the power to make/bring change for the better.
Nothing can stand in the way of fully committed passionate souls, who combine their inner and outer powers to protect and promote all that has value and beauty on planet earth.
While it may sound heroic, this is in fact the natural state of expression for a human being who has not succumbed to society’s ubiquitous mind control techniques and/or fallen prey to pretentious propaganda.
An unsullied human instinct will react to acts of obvious injustice by expressing a strong sense of righteous indignation which leads on to the desire to take action!
This is because we are all linked-up, and on the collective subconscious plain, are one.
When one see one’s fellow kind being kicked in the head by some crazed vagrant, one’s first (and best) instinct is to try to help the person in trouble.
Now extend that emotion into the animal, plant and all living matter kingdom, and one will find that it is one’s heart that is leading the way. It is one’s heart that is leading the rebellion against rank injustice – and no one will argue against the fact that the heart lies at the centre of our innate spirituality.
‘To follow one’s heart’ is the first stepping stone on the road of truth. Actions that flow from here represent a genuine spiritual response. One based on compassion and empathy for and with the divine diversity of creation.
Taking action to defend that creation is spiritual activism. Here is the response of someone whose inner and outer self are not alienated or in conflict with each other.
It is the dynamic of balance. A state in which the collective spirit of love that we share with fellow beings, is activated and acted upon. Yes, activated and acted upon. Both.
The spiritual activist is our natural state of pre mind controlled being.
The being who has not been pacified by indoctrination to the ways of the status quo. Who has not sought to identify with the spirit alone – or with the warrior alone – but quite naturally finds that he/she is, by sheer dint of being human, is both these.
How our world would rejoice should this breed of actor emerge at the forefront of the affairs of man!
We have had enough of compartmentalized divisions of oneness. Quite enough, thank you. ‘Nowhere’ is precisely where we will get so long as people continue to split themselves up into divisions of the whole and then believe they have found ‘the way’.
So, do meditation and spirit work by all means, but then immediately pour the fruits of it into taking action against injustice – and beyond that – towards the process of building a new model of humanity.
Real Action is not about congratulating one’s self for sending a pre-prepared text message to Greenpeace to stop oil drilling in the Arctic.
Real Action is where one puts one’s self on the line – body, mind and spirit – to fight for a decent future for humanity in all the myriad ways in which this is so absolutely vital today.
Albert Einstein said “The world is a dangerous place, not because of those who do evil, but because of those who look on and do nothing.” Never were truer words spoken.
At a time of mass deceit and corruption at the highest levels of society, worldwide, everyone who has a heart needs to have their hands clasp onto the rope of resistance.
Everyone who has a soul, and some basic level of awareness, needs to go forth into the world and start setting in motion a great turning in the affairs of man.
A turning which will reflect the potential, beauty and power of the human actor in full creative flow. Spirit and action in movement – conjoined as one.
So from here on in, say Godspeed to the emergence of the spiritual activist – and say goodbye to the world of half way houses that twist the truth into selfish self-concern for a cosseted life of make-believe sainthood.
And while you’re at it, also say goodbye to all other such deviations from the truth that sap the life blood out of existence.
They are windows of possibility where your soul is wanting to grow and expand into a new level of conscious existence. So the Universe conspires to present a cauldron of alchemical change, where you’re tested emotionally, physically and mentally to your threshold and beyond.
It’s a bit like a new flower, working to breakthrough tough surface layers. By those pathfinders who’ve endured them, they’ve become known as ‘initiations’.
They are the most earth-shattering, bone-shaking you will encounter.
So it pays to know something of what they are about. It can help you make sense of what’s going on…
Surrendering to the Soul
Your inner configuration of consciousness creates the exact outer circumstances of your life.
Based on the degree of soul infusion, determines how aligned that reality will be. If there’s still a lot of identity, ego or karmic filters, then you’ll create varying degrees of disharmony, frustration and lack of fulfillment.
And so as a result of these feelings, there’s then encouragement and motivation to reconfigure your existence by going within and unfolding new aspects of being - it’s the only way to truly change the outer.
There’s still a huge amount of talk in the spiritual mainstream and motivational circles about ‘manifesting the reality you want’.
The approach is to envision, then intentionally bring into being, that which you desire. It is an approach that is fatally flawed.
The soul will ultimately find a way through with an entirely different agenda: that of evolutionary growth and self-actualisation through unbounded self expression.
Intentional manifestation may work for a while, but ultimately, as the bubble bursts, there’s a surrendering once more to the soul’s rightful journey.
And initially, as you work to infuse soul, making that your aim, it’s going feel pretty expansive and at times blissful - because of the letting go, the surrender.
But that’s far from the end of the story, because the inner reality needs to then infuse into the outer, so as to create a congruent reflection. And this is where initiations take place.
In the Corridor of Change
There comes the point of Realignment on the path. I’ve spoken of it in the 5GATEWAYS Documentary. It where there’s realisation that only surrender to the soul’s calling can lead to fulfillment in life.
It’s not an intellectual shift; rather a kind of ‘breaking down sobbing of surrender’. “I will not do another thing until I can feel it coming from my soul!” It’s at this point that you open the doorway to the superhighway of spiritual growth, and with that, accelerating initiations.
The soul will work to merge your consciousness through your being and into the outer reality.
But in so doing, it’s going to hit not only your blockages and distortions of the old bodymind consciousness, but then also the imbalances and disharmony in the outer world you’ve created.
Thus begins a near constant confrontation with the old reality.
This is the point where many seekers on the path turn back.
I’ve witnessed it countless times: it becomes too intense to persist. There’s a losing of trust, and as the inner density gets churned up, it becomes exceptionally hard to hear your divine guidance mechanism.
It becomes all too easy to slip into denial and accept a lesser existence.
But this is not the time to stop! It’s the perfect time to remember exactly why you’re doing it. If you don’t persist, that window of opportunity will close, and it can take time to reconfigure and re-open.
It’s not going to be easy: it may mean the ending of a relationship where you’ve spent many years together, where ties have to be unbound; it may mean leaving a career or general living situation with no certainty of what is to come next.
The path is definitely not all love and light!
How To Open Your 7 Chakras As Explained In a Children's Show
Abandoned and Cast Adrift in Confusion: Key Signs of an Initiation
An initiation often feels like you’ve been abandoned, cast adrift in confusion, as if the Universe is having some great cosmic joke at your expense. It will make it easier to know the key signs you’re actually undertaking one...
Key Signs of an Initiation:
You’re beset with near constant patterns of outer confrontation in your life
Things don’t want to work in the ways they used to - everything seems to be breaking down
Where previously your internal guidance mechanism worked well for you, now it’s hard to figure out even the simplest of choices
Emotionally you’re pushed to the limit; physically your body aches; intellectually the mind struggles to make sense
It becomes exceptionally hard to trust what you know in the heart to be true – the outer world keeps reflecting the old consciousness
Relationships, careers and general living circumstances are all challenged.
When I’ve encountered these myself on the path, it kind of feels like the metamorphosis of a butterfly: you enter into a ‘crysalis phase’, where everything internal feels like it’s turning to mush - prior to the resplendent new form coming through.
So crucially, if you find yourself encountering a phase in your life like something I’ve described, you could well be engaged in an initiation.
It is not about making it easier! It is not about immediately dropping the pain like proverbial hot coals and turning away! It’s about walking courageously right into the jaws of it. But you can make the process more manageable. Here’s how…
Making Initiations Manageable:
Turn completely into it. Don’t reject or push the hardship away.
Don’t try to fix the outer world with some quick or expediently comfortable solution.
Don’t back away. Instead, go right into the very heart of it. Let it churn you up and break you down.
Keep looking for the internal tightness, whether it be physical, emotional, mental or karmi- express into it, let the pain and anguish come through you.
Then, when you’ve normalised in this internal tsunami of uncertainty - when the ‘boat’ has righted itself — look for a new aspect of beingness that wants to come through and light the path forwards.
Commit wholeheartedly to the new pathway.
Watch and celebrate as the new reality takes shape.
More Undeniable Signs That The Global Criminal Cabal Is Going Down + Obama, Hillary Clinton Both Supported Trump’s Plan To Stop Migrants At Border January 16 2019 | From: Geopolitics / OAN / Various
There are now a number of undeniable signs that the Global Criminal Cabal is going down big time. This is in addition to previous events that saw the panic of the Bushes, Clintons and the Bidens.
The Deep State actors in the US are now running out of options that they are now propping up previously unknown personalities to run for the highest office in 2020. Bernie Standers is still unacceptable for the Democrats.
Anyway, it is interesting to note that the recent resignation of the World Bank president Jim Yong Kim not only coincided with the fall of US Supreme Court Justice Bader Ginsburg and Serena Rothschild, but it also is following along the path of his predecessor ex-Goldman Sachs banker Robert Zoellick, who himself resigned as WB chief along with thousands of other banking CEOs in the early part of 2012, which eventually culminated in the Papal resignation of “Benedict” Ratzinger, the highest racking pedophile coddler of the Roman Empire in his time.
Remember also that this incumbent Catholic Pope Bergoglio has promised early in his indefinite term that there will be some sort of debt forgiveness, only to renege later on because frankly, the Jesuit Rothschild banking dynasty doesn’t own anything of real value, but only on paper as the whole gang of criminal misfits never in their lives worked on a farm.
As everybody knows, the European decadent organization is now being confronted with mass movements of people whore are tired of austerity measures in the midst of opulent royal rituals, and populist leaderships that are directly mocking on the panicky Deep State actors still holding government positions.
We are seeing the beginning of the reign of unelected parliamentarians and the end of the European Union itself.
Today, the Central Bank of Russia indicated that over the last 6 months it has unloaded its dollar reserves further down to 21.9% when it converted $100 billion foreign reserves into Yuan, Yen and Euro, in line with the systematic decapitation of the Rothschild / Jesuit banking empire.
“This is basically an open running bailout. Under this structure, you can transfer assets out of the federal government into private ownership, and nobody will know and nobody can stop it. There is no oversight whatsoever. You can’t even know who is doing it.
I’m telling you they just took the United States government, they just changed the governance model by accounting policy to a fascist government. If you are an investor, you don’t know who owns those assets, and there is no evidence that you do. . . .
If the law says you have to produce audited financial statements and you refuse to do so for 20 years, and then when somebody calls you on it, you proceed to change the accounting laws that say you can now run secret books for all the agencies and over 100 related entities…”
“We cannot sit around and passively depend on a guy we elected President. The President cannot fix this. We need to fix this. . . . [Comment: She clearly is not aware of The Alliance]
This is Main Street versus Wall Street. This is honest books versus dirty books. If you want the United States in 10 years to resemble anything what it looked like 20 years ago, you are going to have to do it, and there is no one else who can do it. You have to first get the intelligence to know what is happening.”
– Catherine Austin Fitts
In the last 72 hours, the US stealth B2 bomber is positioned in Hawaii to make a statement. Russia is responding with its deployment of 30 Poseidon strategic underwater nuclear drones that are designed to create tsunami wave of up to 500 meters, enough to wipe out shoreline vessels and marine bases.
But it is the Chinese space program that is making the tectonic headlines across the world as it successfully landed an unmanned spacecraft and a rover, which beamed each other’s camera showing off the far side of the moon.
This feat is not only politically symbolic, but it gives a real measure in the right direction as it emboldens the Chinese to pursue the construction of a manned space station specifically designed to curtail and neutralize the massive Western weaponization of space that had been already used against China in more than one occasion, i.e. Tianjin Blast, and several earthquakes, not just in China but also in Southeast Asia.
There is one thing left for China to do, i.e. the massive unloading of its US treasury bonds.
This will be doubled down with India taking over the current US second economic position at number 2. Hopefully at that situation would unite Americans against their own common enemies that is the Wall Street bankers, the military industrial complex and Big Pharma.
The Border Wall rhetorics, and the government shutdown along with it, are merely shadow boxing.
But real actions are being taken care of behind the scenes. There are reports that some personalities are already being hoarded off to the newly renovated Guantanamo prisons.
It is therefore incumbent upon us to continue the pressure by spreading these fundamental knowledge and the true understanding of current events, so that depression is taken over by hope, and apathy by courage and tangible actions inside the halls of power.
Why Nutritional Psychiatry Is The Future Of Mental Health Treatment + Depression Is A Symptom Of Nutrient Deficiency; Treating It With Drugs Is Not Only Ineffective But Dangerous January 15 2019 | From: NaturalBlaze / NaturalNews
A lack of essential nutrients is known to contribute to the onset of poor mental health in people suffering from anxiety and depression, bipolar disorder, schizophrenia and ADHD. Nutritional psychiatry is a growing discipline that focuses on the use of food and supplements to provide these essential nutrients as part of an integrated or alternative treatment for mental health disorders.
But nutritional approaches for these debilitating conditions are not widely accepted by mainstream medicine.
Antidepressant use has more than doubled in recent years. In England 64.7m prescriptions were issued for antidepressants in 2016 at a cost of £266.6m.
This is an increase of 3.7m on the number of items prescribed in 2015 and more than double than the 31m issued in 2006.
A recent Oxford University study found that antidepressants were more effective in treating depression than placebo.
The study was led by Dr Andrea Cipriani who claimed that depression is under treated.
Cipriani maintains that antidepressants are effective and a further 1m prescriptions should be issued to people in the UK.
This approach suggests that poor mental health caused by social conditions is viewed as easily treated by simply dispensing drugs.
But antidepressants are shunned by people whom they could help because of the social stigma associated with mental ill-health which leads to discrimination and exclusion.
These trials revealed that instead of relieving symptoms of anxiety and depression, antidepressants caused children and young people to feel suicidal.
More worrying is the increase in the use of antidepressants by children and young people. In Scotland, 5,572 children under 18 were prescribed antidepressants for anxiety and depression in 2016. This figure has more than doubled since 2009/2010.
Healy also challenges their safety and effectiveness in adults. He believes that antidepressants are over-prescribed and that there is little evidence that they are safe for long-term use.
Antidepressants are said to create dependency, have unpleasant side effects and cannot be relied upon to always relieve symptoms.
In developed countries such as the UK people eat a greater variety of foodstuffs than ever before – but it doesn’t follow that they are well nourished.
In fact, many people do not eat enough nutrients that are essential for good brain health, opting for a diet of heavily processed food containing artificial additives and sugar.
However, psychiatrists are only now becoming increasingly aware of the benefits of using nutritional approaches to mental health, calling for their peers to support and research this new field of treatment.
It is now known that many mental health conditions are caused by inflammation in the brain which ultimately causes our brain cells to die.
This inflammatory response starts in our gut and is associated with a lack of nutrients from our food such as magnesium, omega-3 fatty acids, probiotics, vitamins and minerals that are all essential for the optimum functioning of our bodies.
Recent Researchhas shown that food supplements such as zinc, magnesium, omega 3, and vitamins B and D3 can help improve people’s mood, relieve anxiety and depression and improve the mental capacity of people with Alzheimer’s.
One study found that a daily magnesium citrate supplement led to a significant improvement in depression and anxiety, regardless of age, gender or severity of depression. Improvement did not continue when the supplement was stopped.
Omega-3 fatty acids are another nutrient that is critical for the development and function of the central nervous system – and a lack has been associated with low mood, cognitive decline and poor comprehension.
Vitamin B complex and zinc are other supplements found to reduce the symptoms of anxiety and depression.
Hope for the Future?
These over-the-counter” supplements are widely available in supermarkets, chemists and online health food stores, although the cost and quality may vary.
For people who have not responded to prescription drugs or who cannot tolerate the side effects, nutritional intervention can offer hope for the future.
There is currently much debate over the effectiveness of antidepressants. The use of food supplements offer an alternative approach that has the potential to make a significant difference to the mental health of all age groups.
The emerging scientific evidence suggests that there should be a bigger role for nutritional psychiatry in mental health within conventional health services.
If the burden of mental ill health is to be reduced, GPs and psychiatrists need to be aware of the connection between food, inflammation and mental illness.
Medical education has traditionally excluded nutritional knowledge and its association with disease. This has led to a situation where very few doctors have a proper understanding of the importance of nutrition.
Nutritional interventions are thought to have little evidence to support their use to prevent or maintain well-being and so are left to dietitians, rather than doctors, to advise on.
But as the evidence mounts up, it is time for medical education to take nutrition seriously so that GPs and psychiatrists of the future know as much about its role in good health as they do about anatomy and physiology.
The state of our mental health could depend on it.
Depression Is A Symptom Of Nutrient Deficiency; Treating It With Drugs Is Not Only Ineffective But Dangerous
Far too many people are suffering from depression in recent years leading to more people taking antidepressants than ever – with 13 million Americans taking such medications every day.
At the same time, people’s diets have declined in quality significantly. While most people don’t tend to think that the two problems are related, some experts say that this is definitely not a coincidence.
It’s easy to see the connection between the poor modern Western diet and problems like obesity or diabetes because of the out-of-control sugar consumption, but depression is related more to what we’re not consuming than what we are.
One study found that people whose vitamin D levels were considered deficient were twice as likely to experience depressive symptoms as those who were considered mildly deficient.
That’s because the body uses vitamin D to regulate the enzymes needed for dopamine, epinephrine, and norepinephrine production, hormones that are used to regulate your mood and stress as well as energy levels.
Depression is considered a sign of magnesium deficiency, and one Croatian study found that many people who had attempted suicide had dangerously low magnesium levels.
A study from the University of Vermont, meanwhile, found that adults with mild to moderate depression noted significant improvements in their depression and anxiety after taking magnesium supplements for just two weeks.
A reported 68 percent of Americans don’t get the recommended daily amount of magnesium, with 19 percent failing to even get half the necessary amount. This could well be playing a role in the rising depression numbers.
The nutrient connection explains why treating depression with drugs is so ineffective. It simply doesn’t address the underlying cause of many people’s depression.
A new study from Zurich University of Applied Sciences concluded that “antidepressants are largely ineffective and potentially harmful,” and it’s one of many studies pointing to the unacceptable track record of these medications.
Making matters worse is the fact that using these drugs over the long term raises a person’s chances of having a relapse of depressive episodes. Then there’s the higher risk of suicide.
It’s hard to imagine a worse side effect than that, until you realize just how many mass shooting perpetrators in recent years had been taking antidepressants.
A big part of the problem is that doctors are far too quick to prescribe these drugs, and many patients specifically request them in hopes of an easy fix.
It’s understandable that those who are depressed are eager to find themselves in a better frame of mind, but correcting nutritional deficiencies is truly just as easy, and it doesn’t come with any side effects.
Better yet, ensuring you’re getting enough of the nutrients your body needs actually improves your overall health, not just depression, so it’s a win-win situation.
While studies have shown that supplementing with vitamin D, zinc and magnesium can all effectively address depression, you can also get these nutrients through your diet.
Oysters, cashews, crab, and beef are all considered good sources of zinc, while you can get a magnesium boost from foods like spinach, almonds, Swiss chard, pumpkin seeds, almonds and dark chocolate.
Vitamin D is perhaps the easiest deficiency to correct; you just need to spend some time outdoors without sunscreen to get your body to start producing more of it.
The amount of time needed varies depending on your skin tone, the time of day, and your geographic location, but it could be as little as 10 minutes a day a few times per week.
For people with serious depression, it might be hard to believe that something as simple as getting more nutrients could make a difference, but you have nothing to lose and everything to gain by trying it.
Why Gold Is Money - Fiat Money Creates An Immoral Society: Money With Real Value Is Crucial January 14 2019 | From: FinalWakeUpCall / Various Counterfeited Money: The proper definition of money is, a vehicle that functions as a store of value and is a medium of exchange.
All of today’s currencies are debt, because none are redeemable for anything by their issuer, nor are there any limits on the quantity that can be created.
Only a vague claim “against good faith and credit” of the government under pretence, coupled with the extortion of tax money from their subjects.
And under their declaration of faith, they have the ability to destroy the currency through inflation that destroys the credit and eventually reduces it to literally nothing.
All credit leads to debt. Salaries, wages, even capital gains, are forms of wealth that have been earned. But credit is not the same as money; it isn’t earned.
Debt is the claim on money that still has to be earned, while all debt must be repaid.
The earliest references to honesty regarding money and the significance of gold as money, were recorded three to four thousand years ago in the Torah, the first five books of the Bible written by Moses, which recognises that gold and silver were early forms of money.
Since it encompassed the weight of a precious metal, the admonition for “honest weights and measures” was spelled out early and often in the Bible. Not using an honest weight in any commodity transaction was considered theft.
Today, the deliberate debasement of our currency by monetary authorities is theft, and is equivalent to counterfeiting. The Founding Fathers of the United States of America saw counterfeiting as a serious crime, deserving the death penalty.
Worldwide, people are waking up to the fact that the current economic system of debt and fiat money is unsustainable, and they are quietly and secretly preparing for the worst.
Governments will do what they always do in a financial crisis: protect insiders and those close to the Deep State.
Average middle-class citizens, are already suffering from the corrupt monetary system, and are scrambling to find the best way to protect their wealth and ensure their safety in these challenging times.
The unwinding of history’s largest financial bubble is now upon us.
Governments around the world are bankrupting their country by destroying their own currency. They will never provide for the economic needs of their people.
Any promise by them that they intend to do so, should not be believed. Likewise, a bankrupt government, cannot provide physical safety. All government efforts are focused on, is the clinging to power, by the further expansion thereof.
Motives why Gold and Silver Became the Premiere Money
The importance of commodity money, especially gold and silver, started about 6,000 years ago; at that time, it was a relatively new discovery.
Gold and silver, due to their special qualities, were chosen early on as the money of choice to replace the bartering of products, which facilitated more efficient trading of goods and services. Though gold was accepted quite naturally, over time, as being superior to barter, the unique significance of this process was only discovered over time.
Precious metals were voluntarily chosen as money by the people and were not designated as such through government force. Although, once the importance of money became obvious, governments took control of precious metals.
The characteristics of commodity money, that took years to identify precisely, are its functions that truly need to be understood. There are three main functions that should be fulfilled:
1. A store of value
2. A unit of account to serve as a standard of value, and
3. A well accepted medium of exchange
A store of value makes money useful and conveys confidence that its purchasing power will not be arbitrarily diminished by the creation of additional units out of thin air by government authorities.
Ships have sunk, laden with gold and silver coins, only to be recovered hundreds of years later with the purchasing power of the gold and silver coins still intact.
Money is simply a medium of exchange and must have the function as medium of exchange, by unit measure, and as store of value, that are based on natural characteristics, such as the fact that it is intrinsically valuable, durable, divisible, uniform, portable, scarce, and broadly accepted; these characteristics are essential for a medium of exchange to become a standard of widely accepted payment.
Moreover, there are many other advantages of gold as money. It’s by far the most private kind of money; gold coins, unlike paper currency, don’t even carry serial numbers.
That makes it truly untraceable. Although efforts have been made to counterfeit gold bars, with tungsten filler and the like. Gold is much easier to authenticate than paper or digital currency.
It is part of the Grand Plan that is unfolding before our eyes, that gold will soon become the preferred medium of exchange for all of us once again.
The monetary choice should always be made by the people themselves and not imposed or prohibited by the government.
Fraud with regard to the monetary unit should never be tolerated.
Promises that substitutes, or certificates issued for a currency and backed by a commodity means nothing if there is no guarantee of convertibility. When there is no guarantee, an unbacked currency by a commodity of value will simply be fiat currency.
Various types of fiat currencies have been used for centuries and they all have ended badly. They not only pose a threat to economic prosperity, but they also undermine people’s freedom.
The current dollar standard is the largest fiat system the world has ever seen. Since 1971, when the dollar became a 100% fiat currency, astronomical distortions in the international financial and political systems have resulted.
Since the current environment has been built on false information, generated by monetary and interest rate manipulation, made worse by sub-prime lending, the amount of worldwide debt and mal-investments have reached record highs.
Natural market forces always require the liquidation and correction of the excesses that the central economic planners cause by monetary manipulation.
If sound economic growth is ever expected to return to the world economy, the excesses of the past 40 years must be dealt with. The problems that will come with this adjustment are huge, and will be both economical and geopolitical.
How long and painful the correction is, depends on government policy, and how serious we are about instituting sound money. Paper money never lasts for long periods of time. Commodity money like gold and silver lasts for thousands of years.
Fiat Money Creates an Immoral Society
Under a fraudulent monetary system, debt in real terms, becomes impossible to pay while the required debt liquidation can only be accomplished by debasement of the currency.
Fake money rewards the special interests most closely associated with money managers: namely the Deep State, the military industrial complex, Wall Street, and the many beneficiaries of government spending.
Unfair distribution of wealth is a characteristic of a fiat monetary system and is being witnessed today in its extreme. As an example; the three richest people own more than the bottom 50% of the world’s population.
Fiat money dislikes morality and creates an immoral society. It requires the rejection of a convertible commodity standard, and can only be enforced with powerful legal tender laws.
Economic bubbles are the monsters birthed by fiat currencies and central bank manipulation of the money supply and interest rates. A fiat currency eliminates a definable unit of account which is needed for sound economic calculation.
People who think that peace and prosperity are worthy goals, must eventually reject fiat currencies.
For at least since the 1600s, taxpayer monies have been illegally laundered through what now is known privately owned tax offices, central banks and cabal owned corporations identified as; Washington DC, City of London and the Holy See in Vatican City.
Meanwhile 'elites' and politician were filling their pockets along the way.
Governments are funded totally through black earning projects, such as drug-trafficking, organ- and human-trafficking, including child-sex-trafficking and the off-budget accounting as published in the comprehensive annual financial report (CAFR).
When President Trump finally implements GESARA Law the Federal Reserve and IRS officially would be defunct. Income taxes will be abolished and replaced with a sales tax on non-essential items.
Recovering from the damage caused by the fiat currencies will prove to be much more difficult than rejecting the temptation to initiate a fiat currency as the unit of account in the first place.
Honest money is the essential ally of liberty.
Precious metals must and will return to serve as the foundation for the new QFS-system.
The Free Market Makes the Choice
The proper course of action would be to make certain that the dictates of governments and central banks are ignored, but rather, free people in the marketplace should make their own choice as to whether we should use cryptos or something else.
This process requires the insight that it is imperative to reject the use of force and fraud if we are to have any chance at success.
The greatest challenge will be the accomplishment of providing a currency with a precise definition of the unit of account. It cannot be arbitrary, or confidence will not be achieved with any substitute or proposed reform of the dollar.
It was because of the determined effort to maintain a precise unit of account definition of the dollar, that it was abandoned in 1971 and the ensuing dollar became completely fiat, which ushered in the financial/debt crisis the world now is facing.
Money With Real Value is Crucial
A workable currency must convey confidence, because that’s critically important to the average person. A guarantee that the monetary unit can be easily and reliably exchanged for something of real value is crucial.
Throughout history, all currencies, once made popular in the market place, were inevitably taken over by government or a banking entity.
Since that will probably continue, every effort must be made to keep the management of the monetary system out of the hands of government officials.
The goal should be, to keep all transactions both transparent and anonymous without paying bank transaction fees.
Therefore, now thanks to President Trump, the Patriots and the Q-Anon team, the narrative concerning the central banks is in their hands.
They are now in the position to expose the Rothschild Fed and all the Rothschild central banks, revealing that they are the culprits of all the economic disasters that have ever occurred. This was done by design to facilitate wealth transfers from the populace to themselves and their mignons.
Most importantly, the central bank global fiat financial system is being brought to the point of deflation, which will force the Deep State to relinquish their global control. The fiat financial system will be replaced by local currencies, i.e. gold-backed sovereign money systems, based on the QFS.
This will be the foundation for the post-fiat, GESARA world.
This Quantum Financial System (QFS) has been successfully tested multiple times, and is fully integrated, operational and impenetrable, with the directive that all procedures shall be transparent.
Soon, everyone will be freed from centuries long enslavement, and have plenty of money to enjoy their lives as the Creator intended it to be.
The Deep State cabal has been defeated and all that remains are the remnants. Donald Trump follows the teachings of the great warrior Sun Tsu, his book “The Art of War,” being his favourite.
The most remarkable Sun Tsu quote was “Every battle is won before it is ever fought”
The remainder of the Deep State knows that they are beyond the point of ever fulfilling their agenda to enslave the people.
All they wish for now is the chance to bring us down with them. But they won’t succeed.
The restoration of the American Republic, and the dismantling of the European Union, structured like the Soviet Union, with a bribed, rubber-stamp parliament and unelected puppets in top positions, is happening in real time.
A gentle transition is being carried out, for the masses to gradually become accustomed to letting go of the central banking system and the corresponding way of life, which the Cabal designed for us, to keep us in perpetual debt slavery.
We are moving away from the enslavement, to a free-market, peoples’ economy, founded on honest money.
What we now are witnessing is really a unique once in a lifetime chapter in world history.
In assisting everyone to better understand and apprehend what actually is going on, is my book THE GREAT AWAKENINGa good guide.
This book has been written specifically for this purpose, and also will be very helpful for future reference.
The World Economic Forum Talks About “Mind Control Using Sound Waves”
& Total Individual Control Technology – Insider Exposes How You And Your DNA Are Being Targeted January 13 2019 | From: VigilantCitizen / ToolsForFreedom / Various
The World Economic Forum – one of the most powerful elite organizations in the world – recently discussed the emergence of remote mind control technology. And it admits that it could be used to turn humans into mind-controlled slaves.
The World Economic Forum (WEF) is one of the most influential elite organizations, alongside the Council on Foreign Relations, the Bilderberg group, and the Trilateral Commision.
Every year, the forum brings together some 2,500 top business leaders, international political leaders, economists, celebrities and journalists to discuss world issues.
The Board of Trustees of the WEF is composed of some of the powerful people in the world. Here are some of them:
Mark Carney, Governor, Bank of England
Al Gore, Vice-President of the United States (1993-2001); Chairman and Co-Founder, Generation Investment Management LLP
Jim Yong Kim, President, World Bank
Christine Lagarde, Managing Director, International Monetary Fund (IMF)
Peter Maurer, President, International Committee of the Red Cross (ICRC)
Indra Nooyi, Chairman, PepsiCo
L. Rafael Reif, President, Massachusetts Institute of Technology (MIT)
Ursula von der Leyen, Federal Minister of Defence, Federal Ministry of Defence of Germany
David M. Rubenstein, Co-Founder and Co-Executive Chairman, Carlyle Group
In many ways, the WEF is similar to the Bilderberg Group. Interesting fact: Klaus Schwab, the Founder and Executive Chairman of the WEF is a former member of the steering committee of the Bilderberg Group.
Not unlike other powerful organizations that claim to “help the world”, the WEF is accused of actually promoting the interests of the world elite.
"To function as a socializing institution for the emerging global elite, globalization’s “Mafiocracy” of bankers, industrialists, oligarchs, technocrats and politicians.
They promote common ideas, and serve common interests: their own.”
Far from actually solving world problems, the WEF is accused of simply shifting the blame from governments and major conglomerates to regular citizens.
"A study, published in the Journal of Consumer Research, investigated the sociological impact of the WEF. It concluded that the WEF do not solve issues such as poverty, global warming, chronic illness, or debt.
They have simply shifted the burden for the solution of these problems from governments and business to “responsible consumers subjects: the green consumer, the health-conscious consumer, and the financially literate consumer.”
They merely reframe the issues, and by so doing perpetuate them.
Gore is singled out as a prime example. Gore’s speeches deliberately shift focus away from the problems of unregulated markets and corporate activities to one of moral pathologies, individual greed, etc.
In doing so he is actually promoting the creation of new markets, and hence perpetuating the same old problems in a new guise. New markets will follow the same patterns as the old ones because the core problem of corporate governance is never addressed.”
- Markus Giesler Ela Veresiu, Creating the Responsible Consumer: Moralistic Governance Regimes and Consumer Subjectivity
Remote Mind Control
The WEF’s Annual Meeting of the Global Future Councils took place on November 11-12 in the United Arab Emirates.
One of the topics discussed was “mind control using sound waves”.
The WEF’s official website published an article entitled Mind control using sound waves?
We ask a scientist how it works where University of Oxford Professor Antoine Jérusalem describes the technology and the issues related to it.
Controlling the Brain With Sound Waves: How Does it Work?
Well, to get straight to the science, the principle of non-invasive neuromodulation is to focus ultrasound waves into a region in the brain so that they all gather in a small spot.
Then hopefully, given the right set of parameters, this can change the activity of the neurons.
If you want to get rid of neurons that have gone wild, for example in epilepsy, then you might want to crank up the energy to essentially kill them. But if you want to selectively promote or block the neuronal activity, you need to fine-tune your ultrasound waves carefully.
In other words, there’s a difference between ultrasound stimulation used for removing tissue, and ultrasound neuromodulation, which is aimed at controlling neuronal activity without damaging the tissue.
Ultrasound neuromodulation is something that definitely works, but that we still don’t understand.
What social good can come of it?
The current buzzwords are Alzheimer’s and Parkinson’s disease, as well as traumatic brain injuries. But scientists are also looking at the spinal cord and peripheral nervous systems.
As far as I am concerned, since the brain is the de facto centre of decision for so many processes, any of them could be targeted.
Is it safe?
When attempting to ‘control’ neuronal activity by providing minute mechanical vibrations to a region of the brain, it’s important that the focus of the ultrasound, frequency and amplitude are properly tuned, or the brain can potentially be damaged.
The point is that we still don’t know how to tune all of this; and if I were to exaggerate a bit, I could say that our current approach is not that far off from fiddling around with the settings on a radio until we hear the right station.
One of the many difficulties is to know for sure that we are indeed controllingneurons with these sound waves, as opposed to damaging them.
The truth is that we still don’t know how the process works. And if you don’t know how it works, you don’t know how much is “too much”.
What are the biggest ethical challenges?
The potential of this technique is huge – by that I mean the sheer number of applications, as well as the ethical use.
From a biological perspective, it’s similar to drugs. It can cure you, it can get you addicted, and it can kill you. It’s all about staying within a given set of rules.
From an ethical perspective, the world is changing so fast that it’s difficult to assess what will be acceptable tomorrow that is not today.
I am also convinced that human nature is such that if something can be done, it will be done. The question is by whom. I would rather have a fair society leading the dance than some rogue state without any respect for human or animal life.
If we want to lead that dance 10 years from now, we need to start researching today.
How dystopian could it get?
I can see the day coming where a scientist will be able to control what a person sees in their mind’s eye, by sending the right waves to the right place in their brain.
My guess is that most objections will be similar to those we hear today about subliminal messages in advertisements, only much more vehement.
This technology is not without its risks of misuse. It could be a revolutionary healthcare technology for the sick, or a perfect controlling tool with which the ruthless control the weak.
This time though, the control would be literal.
What can we do to safeguard its potential?
I am not going to argue that scientists are all wise and knowledgeable when it comes to what should and should not be done. Some of us will go as far as we can get away with. But that’s human nature, and not unique to scientists.
Either way, our job is to find something that is beneficial to humanity. And if you find a way to make somebody better, then you most likely also know how to do the contrary.
The goal is to make sure that regulation prevents the latter, without impeding the former. I believe that this is the role of regulators. And I think that the European Union, where I work, is quite good at this.
Another role of politicians should be to provide a communication platform to explain the long vision of any given area of research.
And it can be too early, or not a good idea, and the final decision might very well be to stop it.
But in the long term, the public should have the potential benefits of a new technology explained to them in plain words, which is something that scientists are not necessarily good at.
Politicians should remember that if we don’t do it, then somebody somewhere will do it anyway…potentially unregulated.
In short, Antoine Jérusalem says that remote mind control is an incredibly powerful technology that has the power to possibly cure illnesses.
However, in the wrong hands, the technology can completely take control of one’s brain. In his words, it can be the “perfect controlling tool with which the ruthless control the weak”.
That being said, remote mind control is nothing new and the elite had access to this kind of technology for years.
A few months ago, I published an article about a leaked 1996 document describing remote mind control.
Total Individual Control Technology – Insider Exposes How You And Your DNA Are Being Targeted
Total Individual Control Technology is a nefarious type of EM (Electromagnetic) and V2K (Voice to Skull) weaponized technology that is being experimented with and deployed against segments of the American population.
Those attacked by this electronic stalking are known as TIs (Targeted Individuals). Recently another brave whistleblower has stepped forward to expose it.
Bryan Kofron (who formerly used the alias of Justin Carter) is a security industry specialist who used to work for a private security company SIS (Security Industry Specialists) in Seattle, Washington.
He quit in disgust after realizing that his former firm, and others just like it, were actively using this so-called total individual control technology to target people, then ultimately control and destroy their lives.
Since he quit, he has himself become a victim of the technology via gangstalking.
What Total Individual Control Technology is Capable Of
According to Kofron, this technology is so advanced that it can be used to read your mind, program your mind with thoughts (that you would believe are your own) and induce emotional states in you (including pain, hate and fear).
It can be used to tap into your optical nerve and auditory systems to see and hear what you are seeing and hearing. It can target particular people by engaging in individual-specific attacks (based on the target’s DNA resonance).
Finally, it is being used in vast social engineering programs as a way to experiment upon poor, homeless and weak people who have little or no chance of fighting back.
In interviews or presentations such as this and this, Kofron explains that this technology is being used by psychopaths who have little scruples about the harm they are causing.
They are targeting specific groups of people: those who are cognitively inclined, highly intelligent, knowledgeable about advanced technology or interested in alternative research (i.e. conspiracy research).
In general, they are either targeting empowered individuals with free minds (to stop dissidents and revolutionaries) or those too poor and weak to fight back.
Using Kofron’s own words, here are some of the things Total Individual Control Technology is able to do:
"This technology manipulates the electrical signals in the brain, thus controlling thoughts and feelings and emotions and sensations throughout the body.
It works by rewiring the brain by creating new neural pathways and destroying existing neural pathways, thus this literally changes the way a person thinks and thus behaves.”
“This technology can also be used to control the muscle movement of the target. It can take over one’s hands or feet while driving and make you press on the accelerator or press on the brake or turn.
This can be used to cause accidents it can also be used to prevent accidents from happening.”
“This technology can also tap into the optical nerve of the target, and the auditory system of the target, so that those monitoring the target can see what the target is seeing and hear what target is hearing.
This information is then downloaded and stored on a computer, in a highly secure classified site on servers that are guarded by some of the tightest security in the world.
This results in the individual’s entire day, everything they see, everything they hear, everything they experiment, everything they experience, and everything they feel being recorded till the end of time.”
“This technology can also be used to manipulate the emotions of the target. It can induce fear, love, hate.”
“This technology can be used to beam images and even motion pictures into one’s brain. Images and motion pictures that are so realistic that you think you are actually watching a movie or seeing something in reality.
It’s like a virtual reality 3D rendering that takes place within the target’s mind.
The images and motion pictures manifest themselves in such a way that the target if they are not aware that this technology is being used on them will believe that they are natural thoughts and natural images.”
“This technology can also be used to induce and control dreams.
It can be used to control dream cycles and sleep patterns. To cause one to sleep very deeply or to cause one to not sleep at all. REM cycles, alpha beta and delta brainwaves can be induced immediately by this technology.
And this technology can also be used to mimic spiritual experiences.
Joy, love, peace that passes understanding can all be induced artificially by this technology to make the target believe that they are having a genuine spiritual experience when they’re not.”
“This technology can also be used to sexually manipulate the target. Make them feel sexual arousal or turn off their sexuality altogether, it can stimulate them and it can shut them down at a moments notice.
It can also be used to manipulate the hormones of the target, thus lowering and raising estrogen and testosterone levels in women and men respectively.”
“This technology can also be used to read the thoughts of the target in real time … they can read your thoughts verbatim as they occur within your own mind.”
“Anywhere from small groups of people 10-20 to 100, to medium size groups of people several thousand to tens of thousands.
This is done by creating a field effect, where an entire field of electromagnetic energy is created in a geographical location and any human being within that geographical location within that electromagnetic field affecting that geographical location will be effected by the technology.
This can be used to induce a general mood in a population or a crowd of people. It can be used to make them passive, it can be used to make them agitated.
And this can be used to cause or stop, induce riots. Stop crime, start crime. Stop thoughts, start thoughts. Massive mind control on a citywide level.”
Total Individual Control Technology Attacks Specific Individuals Based on DNA Resonance
As I have discussed in previous articles on mind control such as “They” Can’t Read Your Thoughts … Right?, the state of current mind control technology is beyond most people’s comprehension and idea of what is possible.
Yet, we have had enough out-of-the-closet whistleblowers and leaked or declassified documents to give us a clear idea of the scary extent to which we can be psychically attacked.
Whistleblowers such as Dr. Robert Duncan have lectured at length about the capabilities of V2K technology, which is defined as an EM frequency technology that utilizes RF (Radio Frequency) signals to induce sound within the cranial cavity of the target.
V2K literally pipes thoughts directly into people’s heads without them knowing it.
Kofron bases his information on his own experience as an insider in this field, and also as recent victim of V2K himself. He was attacked once he went public. He claims he has been assaulted with a beta version which is especially nasty, piping thoughts into his head such as:
"Everyone’s against you”
“Please be quiet or we’re going to kill you”
“Don’t work again or we’re going to kill you”
“You’re the lab rat now motherfucker”
Kofron claims the Total Individual Control Technology attacks are attempting to turn him against his former work colleagues, friends and family.
However, since he was trained in this area, he knows that the voices are technological and can defend himself against the manipulations once he hears them.
Kofron echoes exactly what Duncan has warned about: individual-specific attacks. Duncan states that every person has a “unique resonance signature”, and in almost exactly the same words, Kofron states that:
"… the DNA of the individual is used to determine the resonant frequency of the DNA itself, the resonant frequency is then used to fine tune the technology … to tune it perfectly to the resonant frequency of the targeted individual’s DNA.”
The Drive to Create a Worldwide DNA Database
This leads into another aspect of the NWO agenda: the drive to create a worldwide DNA database. When seen in the light of Total Individual Control Technology, the acquisition of an entire population’s DNA takes on a very sinister meaning.
It is no coincidence that Amazon and Google (who are ultimately controlled by the same force as David Icke suggests) are racing each other, along with Microsoft, IBM and other companies, to assemble a DNA database as quickly as they can.
Those in power who gain access a completed worldwide DNA database and total individual control technology would have a horrifying weapon at their disposal to target literally anyone they wanted.
Kofron exposes how prospective employees are tricked out of their DNA. They apply for a job at SIS, get told they have to do a drug test, and when the urine sample is sent to a lab, part is siphoned off as DNA to go into Amazon’s burgeoning DNA database.
Americans, in the millions, are having their DNA stolen from them, without their knowledge or consent, so they become unwitting targets of this insidious program!
Social Engineering with Total Individual Control Technology
Kofron talks at length about how this technology is fully operational and is already being tested upon those in society who are struggling (such as those who are homeless, poor and who don’t have much family or many friends) since they make the easiest targets.
On his website GangstalkerWars.com, he exposes the details of ongoing operations within Seattle (where he used to work for SIS).
This social engineering is being done by the Federal Government, the Military Intelligence agencies, private security firms (more on this below), some of the largest US corporations (after all, we live in a corporatocracy), local and state police, and social programs within inner-city America.
In one such operation, the perpetrators would target certain geographical blocks of the city, and, for instance, cause everyone in that area to be in a bad mood.
In another operation, SIS (employed by Amazon whose headquarters are in Seattle) would test upon Amazon employees.
In another operation, SIS would experiment upon its own low level employees.
In another operation, homeless people were brought in from all over the nation to special buildings that were then targeted.
This is true gangstalking – the ganging up by sociopaths and psychopaths upon the innocent to electronically harass and stalk them.
The Rising Danger of the Private Security Firm Industry in America
Kofron warns about an alarming trend in American society: the rise of private security companies who mostly employ ex-military and ex-intelligence agents. As I covered in this 2-part series, the US Military Intelligence Complex is completely and utterly out of control.
It runs the government and pulls the strings attached to all the puppet politicians, who don’t have the necessary “clearance” to access the truly top secret information.
These security firms, like the MIC itself, appear to operate above and outside the law.
People rising up the ranks are conditioned to use this technology against innocent victims, and are told they will be rewarded with everything (money, power, women, sex, connection, access, status, belonging to the power club) if they go along with the program and become perpetrators.
If they have a strong conscience and refuse, they will be sacked, shunned, cut off, threatened and even made into TIs themselves.
The Human Rights Loophole: False Diagnoses
Another aspect of Total Individual Control Technology which the perpetrators use to shield themselves is the cruel use of false psychiatric diagnoses.
Here’s how it works: they manipulate TI victims to see a psychiatrist, and then they bribe the psychiatrist to deliver a fake diagnosis that the victim is mentally unstable, deranged, delusional, crazy, incompetent, paranoid, schizophrenic, suffering from Multiple Personality Disorder – or they invent some similar legal-medical-psychobabble diagnosis.
This has the unfortunate effect of stripping away the victim’s natural or human rights, which leaves him or her with no recourse to fight back against his attackers, since his claims and testimonies will be dismissed as the ravings of a madman.
This is a similar tactic to what is used with other victims of mind control.
In my interview with Max Spiers, he touched on the use of the Big Pharma “false memory” foundation, which includes bogus therapists and psychiatrists who convince mind control victims that they’re having false memories (when they are actually recalling how they were tortured and programmed).
The Infrastructure Underlying Total Individual Control Technology
The infrastructure that is enabling the total individual control technology is composed mostly of antennae, radar and cell phone towers.
Often, the antennae are camouflaged (hidden behind walls). Some or most of the radar used is from military bases.
Kofron was not able to explain much of how the technology actually works, although an electrical engineer who called in on one of the radio interviews suggested that the perpetrators are setting up a standing wave of DNA, then doing slight variations in the phasing using pulse code modulation.
Final Thoughts: Total Individual Control Technology Perpetrated by the Cult of Power
In concluding, it’s important to realize how such cruel surveillance is being perpetuated.
As Kofron explains, it’s all about creating an “in” club of perpetrators who get rewarded with money, sex, power and the intrinsic human need for belonging, get told they are on the “right” side and the TIs are on the “wrong” side – and get threatened that if they speak up or quit, they may end up on that wrong side.
It’s the cult of power.
Hopefully this testimony can serve as a wakeup call for those on the fence who can’t quite bring themselves to believe or act. In many ways, time is running out and the net is being drawn tighter and tighter.
The more technology advances, the more weapons the cult of power will have to enslave those who stand for truth and freedom.
At a certain point, there will literally be nowhere to run or hide. The only option is to face it now before it’s too late.
2019: The Year Deep State Gets Demolished January 12 2019 | From: StateOfTheNation / Various
FISAgate: The Scandal That Will Take Down Deep State in 2019.
“2019 is the year that the war between the patriots and the globalists breaks out in the open. Not with bullets and bombs; rather, with indictments and prosecutions. Trump has no choice at this point. Deep State is coming after him and they won’t stop until he is removed. He knows it, so his best defense is a dazzling offense. That would be known as FISAgate.” - Intelligence Analyst & Former U.S. Military Officer
The FISAgate Scandal is as Big as it Gets Unless You Consider CrownGate
There’s a very good reason why FISAgate could not be blown wide open in 2018.
For extremely significant reasons that are beyond the scope of this short article, FISAgate was meant for the big screen in 2019.
Key Point:The FISAgate scandal isn’t just HUGE, it means the end of the hopelessly corrupt and criminal political culture inside the Beltway.
That means the Obamas, the Clintons, Biden, Schumer, Pelosi, Schiff, Feinstein, Comey, Mueller, Brennan, Clapper, Hayden, and so many other big fish are going to prison.
So, too, will many RINOs be leaving for Gitmo when the military tribunals are finished with their prosecutions.
Truly, it doesn’t get any bigger than FISAgate; unless, of course, you understand the sheer depth and breadth of CrownGate.
By the way, both scandals go hand in hand, although FISAgate is just one of countless highly organized conspiracies launched by the Crown against America.
FISAgate represents the greatest criminal conspiracy to commit individual treason and institutional sedition of the 21st century, which was conducted by virtually the entire Obama administration.
While many of the perps at the top of the Obama leadership have yet to be implicated, in time they all will be.
This is why the Mainstream Media (MSM) is being used by all of the perpetraitors to throw shade on the entire festering (and burgeoning) FISAgate scandal. They know that Gitmo awaits them all when the truth comes out.
Actually, when the critical facts surrounding FISAgate are disseminated by the MSM, and they will be soon enough, the Democrat Party will summarily be dissolved for institutional treason on an unprecedented scale.
There are several crucial and complex pieces to the FISAgate conspiracy to defraud a POTUS candidate and then to overthrow his administration - in broad daylight.
What follows for the uninitiated are just a few other FISAgate articles that will quickly inform. Each is important reading from critical perspectives;
The can of worms that is known as FISAgate is so complicated that it cannot even be explained by the perpetrators who were deeply involved in this ongoing black operation.
None of them know the whole story, or even the many missing pieces that Congress has yet to uncover. Their criminal activity was way too classified and protected by false ‘national security’ concerns!
Whenever you hear the bogus need to protect “sources and methods”, it’s really the bad actors who are being insulated from investigation.
The insurrection against Trump and his administration was actually structured after a typical series of C.I.A. black ops that they run in Banana Republics around the world whenever they wanted to topple a head of state or collapse a government.
Every phase of the conspiracy is run on a strictly need-to-know basis and in a highly compartmentalized fashion.
Not only that, but as soon as they saw that Trump won on November 8, 2016, they had to implement a massive cover-up for the crime wave they thought they would ride to Clinton’s victory.
To call the tangled web of numerous plots and sub-plots exceedingly convoluted would be a gross understatement.
Particularly with Trump assuming office on Inauguration Day, the perps had to work very fast to destroy all the evidence, as well as firewall whatever evidence could not be destroyed because it took the form of what is, essentially, a permanent digital record.
Once Trump took office he had access to the goods if he took initiative to secure them.
Comment:Read about the Alliance that has been working behind the scenes for decades to take down the 'Cabal' within the work of David Wilcock.
Some of those reading this may be confused because the cabal-controlled mainstream media is doing everything within it's power to denigrate Trump - as he is part of the effort to take the Illuminati down once and for all.
This is really why the globalists are so determined to remove Trump from office; the longer he’s in the Oval Office the more likely he will locate all the proof of a transparent coup d’état in the works.
After all, what digital data doesn’t the NSA, CIA, DIA and FBI have access to?
FISAgate Crime Spree
It’s imperative for the Patriot Movement to understand that the FISAgate crime spree is the death knell for Deep State.
The co-conspirators have acted out of extreme desperation to such a degree, and have made so many serious mistakes, that they are all implicated one way or another.
They could not take the time to firewall their various black ops and they therefore contaminated everyone else in the various schemes.
This is why they even resorted to enlisting the help of the Federal Reserve to trigger a stock market crash as a direct threat to Trump, and especially to his MAGA agenda.
The real bonanza associated with this never-ending crime spree, however, is the fact that the British Intelligence Community was contracted by the Obama Administration to do all the dirty work.
This gave all the top-level intel operatives (Brennan, Clapper, Hayden, Morrell, etc.) plausible deniability except that, when the whole scheme fell apart, it exposed the outright British subversion of the U.S. Federal Government.
Not only that, it proved that the utterly fake Russiagate hoax was really a British brainchild.
Key Point: Of course, MI6 has its fingerprints all over FISAgate (e.g. fraudulent Steel dossier), but more importantly so does GCHQ. This little data point indicates that the Brits are really conducting spying and surveillance on the US government 24/7, which they are.
That may sound like business as usual in the spook realm of espionage and counter-espionage, but not when classified info/data is used to blackmail and coerce American politicians into taking specific governmental actions… in the interest of the UK Government and especially the Rothschild crime syndicate.
With this knowledge, every American can plainly see that it was International Banking Cartel headquartered in London that sought to rig the 2016 presidential election, not the Russians.
Putin’s Russia merely presented yet another opportunity for the Brits to scapegoat them in order to trigger a World War between the United States and the Russian Federation.
The British Government has actually been working triple time to distract and divert the attention of everyone concerned on both sides of the pond.
For one, the ever-burgeoning Brexit debacle has captured the rapt attention of every Brit on the island.
The deliberate fiasco with the European Union is all engineered by design, and not only to stealthily reverse the results of the Brexit referendum.
The spooks in London always think of themselves as a step ahead of the people.
And they don’t care what type of false flag shooting or bombing they must carry out to accomplish their goals of distraction.
The public record even demonstrates that the GCHQ was forced to issue an unprecedented denial of guilt to Trump’s proven accusation of “wiretap” meddling.
Where it concerns the most weighty repercussions of FISAgate, it’s clear that the NWO agenda has been profoundly exposed and substantially thwarted.
The lasting damage that FISAgate has done to the covert relationships between the various American political dynasties (i.e. Bush) and crime families (i.e. Clinton) is such that they will never again be able to defraud the U.S. citizenry so easily.
The free-fall collapse of the Clinton Foundation - a CIA-controlled NGO front - stands as a testament to this new normal.
However, whenever President Trump does leave office the globalists will be right back to fleecing the American taxpayer, as well as waging unprovoked wars of naked aggression in their name.
[Comment: WRONG: See the above reference regarding The Alliance].
This is why Deep State must be demolished this year - 2019.
Of paramount importance is that the US-UK special relationship has been shown for what it truly is: that the USA is still a colony of the British Empire.
The ironclad control exerted by the London-based stock, banking and gold exchanges ensured easy manipulation of the New York City exchanges and brokerage houses that really control American politics.
This is why it’s exceptionally urgent for Trump to apprehend and prosecute, convict and sentence the obvious FISAgate co-conspirators.
Until he takes this vital initiative, the same traitors will continue to overthrow him by any means possible. They all know their lives and livelihoods greatly depend on Trump’s response to the shocking degree of criminality that FISAgate represents.
Conclusion
It doesn’t take a rocket scientist to quickly grasp the enormity and gravity of Obama’s FISAgate scandal. It’s really like a divine gift given by the New World Order globalist cabal to the American patriots.
Of course, it started out as a demonic present from the globalists to President Trump, but the perps got caught with their pants down - literally!
That’s because they really did expect Hillary to win and were therefore very sloppy in their seditious execution. Now they’re all ratting out each other…behind the scenes, of course.
In point of fact, FISAgate is the most radioactive scandal of the 3rd Millennium, even more highly consequential than the state-sponsored, false flag terrorist attacks on 9/11.
This British-directed criminal conspiracy is so calamitous for TPTB, and has such far-reaching international ramifications, that it will forever destroy the fake “Special Relationship” between the United States and the United Kingdom.
Now many will say: FISAgate has been written and talked about for a fairly long time now.
And it’s entirely true.
However, with each passing day the Obama admin whistleblowers and deep insiders within the U.S. Intelligence Community turn over more and more highly incriminating evidence.
Simply put, the more time that goes by, the more damning the proof that the globalists tried to, first, nullify the official election results of 2016 and, secondly, that they attempted to overthrow the POTUS…as they continue to do today.
Remember: If the Patriot Movement is to experience success in this epic war against the NWO globalists, the timing of the most lethal attacks must be pluperfect.
It always comes down to perfect timing if victory is to be guaranteed.
So the patriots and nationalists must be patient. Nonetheless, everyone must be at the ready to light their torches and pick up their pitchforks.
Don’t worry: many Alt Media like SOTN spend each and every day releasing myriad flaming arrows into the Deep State castle, so the globalists have been softened up quite a bit.
Now, let’s go get ’em! Before they get US.
Editor’s Note:
The Obama administration will go down in U.S. history as the most lawless and corrupt ever.
The Obamanation will likewise be forever known as a cultural marxist’s paradise where political pandemonium and governmental anarchy, social chaos and economic collapse, racial strife and religious hatreds, gender tensions and international conflicts ruled the day for 8 long years.
FISAgate is the most graphic manifestation of the pervasive and profound criminality and corruption practiced at the highest levels of Obama’s globalist conspiracy to destroy the American Republic.
Action Plan: If you haven’t already, why not retweet this game-changing exposé on CrownGate.
Even our good friends from the British Isles like Martin are helping US out as seen in his tweet below.
Yellow Vests Becoming World Wide Movement January 11 2019 | From: ArmstrongEconomics / Various
The Yellow Vest Movement that began in France, is spreading. It appeared also in Belgium and it spread to Canada as well.
The French arrested the leaders of the Yellow Vest Movement calling them an anti-government charging them for organizing an unauthorized protest, as authorities adopt a tougher approach to try to curb the demonstrations.
During the weekend of December 15th, mimicking the Yellow Vest movement in France, protests formed all over Canada.
These are peaceful protests, unlike in France, but they have continued every weekend in various cities such as Toronto, Halifax, Edmonton, Saskatoon, Calgary etc, especially in Alberta and Saskatchewan.
The following list of demands has been circulating among French social media users. We do not know its exact origins or author(s), but it seems to have first appeared here on December 5th.
We've translated it into English (in summary, not word-for-word) below...
Increase of 40% in the basic pension and social welfare
Increase hiring in public sector to re-establish public services
Massive construction projects to house 5 million homeless, and severe penalties for mayors/prefectures that leave people on the streets
Break up the 'too-big-to-fail' banks, re-separate regular banking from investment banking
Cancel debts accrued through usurious rates of interest
Politics
Constitutional amendments to protect the people's interests, including binding referenda
The barring of lobby groups and vested interests from political decision-making
Frexit: Leave the EU to regain our economic, monetary and political sovereignty (In other words, respect the 2005 referendum result, when France voted against the EU Constitution Treaty, which was then renamed the Lisbon Treaty, and the French people ignored)
Clampdown on tax evasion by the ultra-rich
The immediate cessation of privatization, and the re-nationalization of public goods like motorways, airports, rail, etc
Remove all ideology from the ministry of education, ending all destructive education techniques
Quadruple the budget for law and order and put time-limits on judicial procedures. Make access to the justice system available for all
Break up media monopolies and end their interference in politics. Make media accessible to citizens and guarantee a plurality of opinions. End editorial propaganda
Guarantee citizens' liberty by including in the constitution a complete prohibition on state interference in their decisions concerning education, health and family matters
Health / Environment
No more 'planned obsolescence' - Mandate guarantee from producers that their products will last 10 years, and that spare parts will be available during that period
Ban plastic bottles and other polluting packaging
Weaken the influence of big pharma on health in general and hospitals in particular
Ban on GMO crops, carcinogenic pesticides, endocrine disruptors and monocrops
Reindustrialize France (thereby reducing imports and thus pollution)
Foreign Affairs
End France's participation in foreign wars of aggression, and exit from NATO
Cease pillaging and interfering - politically and militarily - in 'Francafrique', which keeps Africa poor. Immediately repatriate all French soldiers. Establish relations with African states on an equal peer-to-peer basis
Prevent migratory flows that cannot be accommodated or integrated, given the profound civilizational crisis we are experiencing
Scrupulously respect international law and the treaties we have signed
Alberta has long been known as the oil province of Canada and is highly commodity driven.
With NDP (New Democratic Party) preventing the expansion of the TransMountain Pipeline from Alberta’s Edmonton to BC’s Burnaby after the project has already been approved by the federal government back in 2013, many people are unemployed.
With oil in Western Canada (Western Canadian Select) hitting $11.43 a barrel in November, companies simply cannot afford to stay in business.
Combining this with the announcement that the price of vegetables increased 4%-6% as of January 1st, it’s no wonder that many Canadians are frustrated.
This is also apparent as Calgary voted a resounding NO on a bid for hosting the 2026 Winter Olympics on November 13th.
An estimate of $5.11 billion was announced with additional extra costs which were never disclosed, people voted no to the increase the taxation in order to pay for it.
The wrong event at the wrong time and people simply can’t afford to foot the bill.
Bottom line, too many taxes impact quality of life and no one will take to the streets when they are fat and happy.
What’s important here is that not only has Canada joined the Yellow Vest Movement, but it’s still going strong every weekend, Christmas, New Years, the protests against rising socialism continue.
Trudeau might have his work cut out for him before the next election in Canada in October 2019.
Harvard Scientific Paper Details Entire Geo-Engineering Program Using Jet Aircraft January 10 2019 | From: NaturalNews / Various
Geoengineering is a controversial subject, to say the least, with so many different theories about its origins and implementation.
Geoengineering using aircraft has a long history and many different forms from cloud seeding in the 1960s over Vietnam in Project Pop-Eye to ski resorts using commercial weather modification companies to create snow to this day.
Far from a conspiracy theory, Geoengineering is being openly bragged about by China and Russia, both using jet aircraft to spray chemicals to disperse clouds for national holiday parades.
China has a huge Geoengineering program to create rain for its agricultural regions and publicly admits it. Using jet aircraft and mountain top dispersal units to inject chemicals into the atmosphere to make rain for crops.
Yet when the subject comes up in the Western zeitgeist, it is automatically a far out conspiracy theory which is to be ridiculed, that such a thing could even exist.
Many observers content a secret program already exists in Western countries to control the weather using jet aircraft.
Dispersing long plumes of chemicals in the sky to alter the climate in various ways, exactly as is being done elsewhere by other governments.
It only adds to speculation when the summation of all the U.S. funded government research on future Geoengineering describe a program that is a mirror image of what curious observers are seeing now.
Using jets to disperse chemical aerosols at high altitude to reduce solar radiation. The U.S. government claims Geoengineering is definitely not going on right now but probably will be in the future.
“After surveying an exhaustive list of potential deployment techniques, we settle upon an aircraft-based delivery system.”
-
Wake Smith and Gernot Wagner
A recently published IOP Science paper by Harvard scientists Wake Smith and Gernot Wagner titled “Stratospheric Aerosol Injection Tactics and Costs in the First Fifteen Years of Deployment” is a collation of all the public research on Geoengineering and prescribes a program using high altitude aircraft to disperse chemicals in the stratosphere to reflect sunlight and curb global warming.
Going into all the details that would constitute a Geoengineering program. This paper gives a rare insight into how such a thing would operate, how much it would cost and how many planes would be needed.
Lending clues to those that want to estimate the size and scope of any possible ongoing Geoengineering that may be occurring over Western countries but is being kept classified.
The paper even bemoans the fact that such a program would be very difficult to keep secret.
Harvard scientists Wake Smith and Gernot Wagner state that such a program would be hard to keep classified since jet aircraft would be leaving long plumes of chemicals behind them that span the entire sky blocking the sun in a soupy haze.
Keen observers would surely notice the changes and criss-crossing patterns of aircraft trails littering the sky from horizon to horizon.
Sounds very familiar to what is being seen by so many now, in the skies over many N.A.T.O. countries, that deny such programs exist.
“We conclude by arguing that, while cheap, such an aircraft-based program would unlikely be a secret, given the need for thousands of flights annually by airliner-sized aircraft operating from an international array of bases.
-
Wake Smith and Gernot Wagner
These white papers are thinly veiled, making things sound rosy. Who would admit to such a thing? Read between the lines to get a gauge of what may be going on now.
Using the paper to get a guesstimate on how big and costly a current Geoengineering program may be.
The paper states the cost of Geoengineering for Solar Radiation Management by way of jet aircraft at 2.25 billion a year, possibly up to 5 billion a year.
That’s for the whole globe but this does not include the ill health effects on the population of the world.
“We calculate early-year costs of ~$1500 ton−1 of material deployed, resulting in average costs of ~$2.25 billion yr−1 over the first 15 years of deployment. We further calculate the number of flights at ~4000 in year one, linearly increasing by ~4000 yr−1."
-
Wake Smith and Gernot Wagner
The paper also calls for a new type of stratospheric tanker plane for future operations. Eventually building up to a fleet of 95 new aircraft that fly higher and carry more aerosol by 2047.
At its peak conducting 60,109 flights per year.
There must be 100's of available modified aircraft being used for any current operations since it states today’s modified dispersion jets don’t go high enough or carry as much aerosol as desired.
A conservative estimate would be a hundred and fifty thousand flights, or more would be needed for this type of operation using today’s modified dispersal aircraft at possibly twice the cost.
“However, we also conclude that developing a new, purpose-built high-altitude tanker with substantial payload capabilities would neither be technologically difficult nor prohibitively expensive.
-
Wake Smith and Gernot Wagner
The U.S. and other N.A.T.O. countries deny ongoing programs exist but say they would like to do Geoengineering with jet aircraft in the future.
The exact same thing that western observers are seeing now and that other less technologically advanced counties are already doing openly.
“Stratospheric Aerosol Injection (SAI) would require lofting hundreds of thousands to millions of tons of material each year to altitudes up to ~20 km.
Here we seek answers to three questions: if SAI deployment were to commence within the foreseeable future with the tools and technologies at our disposal, how would such deployment be physically achieved, how much would it cost, and could it be done in secret?
-
Wake Smith and Gernot Wagner
It’s as if a gang of robbers was on the loose and everyone can see the smashed windows all over town if they look up from their smartphones.
A group of professional robbers then publishes a series of detailed articles in the local newspaper about how to rob homes by smashing windows “if they ever wanted to do it” in the future.
All the major details of the plan fit exactly what is being seen by witnesses, but the robbers say everyone is crazy, that its not happening and how could any sane person possibly believe it.
At the same time stating they would really like to rob homes by way of smashing windows, if given a chance, at some point in the future and are currently experimenting with it.
Six Activities That Will Enrich Your Soul + The Benefits Of Mindfulness July 15 2016 | From: USHealthCorps / AustralianNationalReview
Our busy lives often leave us with a giant list of things we must do and seemingly no time for things we actually want to do.
While it’s important to take care of our responsibilities, it’s also crucial to our overall well-being to take care of our spirits.
Here are a few activities that will enrich your soul and help you find inner peace amid the chaos of life.
Teach Someone Something New or Learn a New Skill
Teaching someone something new can be an incredibly rewarding experience, giving you the pleasure of not only enhancing another person’s knowledge or skill set but leaving a legacy that will remain long after you’re gone.
Whether you know how to knit or crochet, paint, play the piano, or something as simple as snapping your fingers, sharing your expertise is a soul-nourishing experience. If there’s something you’d love to learn, ask an expert to tutor or mentor you and devote some time to making a better you.
Spend Some Quality Time with Four-legged Friends
If you have a friendly pet, you can enrich the lives of others while enriching your own soul by taking your furry friend to spend quality time with nursing home or assisted living residents or even hospital patients.
Of course, you should check with the facility to be sure that your pet has the required certifications. You might even consider getting your pet certified as a therapy animal so that you can spread the joy in more places.
If you don’t have a dog of your own, consider dog walking or dog boarding. It will allow you to get the mental and physical health boosts that come with spending time with animals, while also making a little extra money on the side.
Get Organized
A cluttered environment can add stress to your life, so give your home an organization overhaul. Clean out your closets and donate gently used items to charity, organize your home office, or invest in some storage baskets or cute containers to give your home an updated look while freeing up valuable space.
The sense of accomplishment you’ll get from taking care of these kinds of tasks (which, if you’re like many people, you’ve probably been procrastinating on for far too long) will result in less worry and anxiety, reduced stress, and greater peace.
Catch Up With Lost Connections
Our busy lives can often lead us to lose touch with faraway friends and family members. There’s no time like the present to fix that! Re-open the lines of communication with a phone call, an email, or even a handwritten letter.
Don’t be afraid to reach out – chances are, they’ve been thinking of you too and would love to hear from you. Whether it’s been weeks, months, or even years, reconnecting with a loved one will not only forgo feelings of loneliness, it’ll give you a chance to take a walk down memory lane and fill you with warm and fuzzies.
Curl Up with a Good Book
The busy pace of day-to-day life leaves most people with little time for recreational reading. Yet reading is one of the best ways to keep your mind sharp. You don’t have to read the Encyclopedia Britannica for your brain to benefit from reading; pick up that novel you’ve been itching to start since last year and cuddle up with a cup of tea. Whether you read a true account of a historical event or a fictional work, reading allows you to escape reality and visit faraway places from the comfort of your couch.
Create a Personal Growth Plan
We all have goals in life, both professional and personal, so start creating a plan to achieve them. Make a vision board, write down your goals, and develop a strategy for becoming the person you want to be. Creating a personal growth plan is a beneficial way to look toward the future and develop an optimistic mindset about what life has in store for you.
Our giant to-do lists may try to tell us otherwise, but there’s always time for a little soul therapy. Find an activity (or two, or three!) that makes you feel happy and incorporate it into your routine. You’d be surprised at the number of benefits you’ll see in all aspects of your life when you give yourself time for joy.
Eric Johnson’s own struggles with arthritis are what inspired him to volunteer to write for USHealthCorps.org. He hopes his work on the site can help others live healthy, happy lives despite their chronic illnesses.
The Benefits Of Mindfulness
Distractions are abounding and it affects the way we work - at home and at the office. A large number of people have trouble concentrating and this is where mindfulness comes in.
A form of meditation, mindfulness helps you develop stronger concentration powers. Large corporate companies such as Apple, Google and Starbucks amongst others offer training in mindfulness for their employees.
Forbes talks about this notion and shares how it can help boost your life and your career.
So What is Mindfulness?
A simple yet effective form of meditation, mindfulness makes you more focused, helping you to gain control over unruly thoughts. It is therefore a great way to reduce daily stress as it gives you control over your thoughts and prevents pondering on negative ones.
It makes you calm and allows you to go through the day in a productive manner. Ellen Langer, a psychologist at the Harvard University says;
“Mindfulness is the process of actively noticing new things. When you do that, it puts you in the present. It makes you more sensitive to context and perspective. It’s the essence of engagement.”
She adds that the "“mindless negative evaluations” that people make and the presumptions about problems they won’t be able to solve is what makes their day stressful."
Mindfulness and its Importance
Though there are many benefits of mindfulness, the main reason so many companies are banking on it is its ability to directly improve performance. The many studies which Langer has conducted in this regard have been accurate. Here are five other reasons why companies are focussed on mindfulness:
1. It relieves stress
Stress not only affects your performance but also your personality. Forbes explains “…it’s a people killer”. According to a research conducted by Centres for Disease Control and Prevention, 75% of healthcare expense is due to stress and two-thirds of hospital visits are for the same reason. Stress can increase your blood pressure, lead to cancer, insomnia, heart disease, anxiety, depression, autoimmune diseases and so on. Mindfulness makes you calm and takes you out of the stress mode.
2. It helps you concentrate
Mindfulness teaches you to focus on one thing at a time and this impacts everything you do. It teaches you to avoid distractions and complete one task at a time. Though we have all been subjected to multitasking, it is in fact a productivity killing practice and mindfulness lets you overcome this.
3. It makes you more creative
Creativity will depend on your mental state. Thus, when you are rid of negative thoughts and can focus, you are more likely to be creative. You can defeat the thoughts which cover up your creative skills. You can think creatively and freely because mindfulness lets you concentrate on the present.
4. It helps improve EQ
Something which cannot be perceived easily, emotional intelligence or EQ affects the way we behave, our social bonds, interactions and the decisions we make. It is your ability to understand emotions and use this knowledge to deal with relationships. Years of research have revealed that EQ is what sets star performers apart from mediocre ones. Forbes conducted studies at its workplace and found that the top performers were also high on EQ.
5. It makes you a better person
A study by the Harvard University revealed that there was in fact a link between ‘mindfulness and prosaical behaviour’. Those who practice meditation are 50% more likely to be compassionate towards others as compared to those who don’t.
A Deeper Understanding Of Technocracy & Seven Things I Would Do If I Wanted To Keep Poor People Poor January 8 2019 | From: JonRappoport / BreakingViewsNZ
Technocracy is the basic agenda and plan for ruling global society from above, so we need to understand it from several angles.
Consider a group of enthusiastic forward-looking engineers in the early 20th century. They work for a company that has a contract to manufacture a locomotive.
On one level, workers are required to make the components to spec. Then they must put them all together. These tasks are formidable.
On another level, various departments of the company must coordinate their efforts. This is also viewed as a technological job. Organizing is considered a technology.
When the locomotive is finished and delivered, and when it runs on its tracks and pulls a train, a great and inspiring victory is won.
And then…the engineers begin to think about the implications.
Suppose the locomotive was society itself? Suppose society was the finished product? Couldn’t society be put together in a coordinated fashion? And couldn’t the “technology of organizing things” be utilized for the job?
Why bother with endlessly arguing and lying politicians? Why should they be in charge? Isn’t that an obvious losing proposition? Of course it is.
But engineers could lay out and build a future society that would benefit all people. Hunger, disease, and poverty could be wiped out. Eliminating them would be part of the uncompromising blueprint.
This “insight” hit engineers and technicians like a ton of bricks. Of course! All societies had been failures for the same reason: the wrong people were in charge.
Armed with this new understanding, engineers of every stripe began to see what was needed. A revolution in thinking about societal organization. Science was the new king. And science would rule.
Of course, for an engineered world to work, certain decisions would have to be made about the role of the individual. Every individual. You couldn’t have an air-tight plan if every human were free to pursue his own objectives.
Too many variables. Too much confusion. Too much conflict. Well, that problem could be solved. The individual’s actions would be tailored to fit the coordinated operations of the planned society.
The individual would be inserted into a pre-ordained slot. He would be “one of the components of the locomotive.” His life would be connected to other lives to produce an exemplary shape.
Yes, this could imply a few problems, but those problems could be worked out. They would have to be worked out, because the overriding goal was the forming of a world organization.
What would you do if one bolt (an individual human) in one wheel of a locomotive was the wrong size? You would go back and correct the error. You would re-make the bolt.
Among sincere technocrats, the overall vision superseded the glaring problems.
But…other people entered the game.
High-echelon Globalists saw technocracy as a system they could use to control the population. Control was their goal. Period. What happened to the individual in the process was of no concern to them.
The individual had freedom or he didn’t have freedom, and the Globalists overtly intended to wipe out that freedom.
Erasing hunger, poverty, illness? Nonsense. For the Globalists, those realities would be exacerbated. Sick, weak, and debilitated people were easier to rule and control and manage.
Essentially, a vastly misguided vision of a future technocratic utopia was hijacked. Something bad was made much worse.
In a nutshell, this is the history of technocracy.
A locomotive is a society? No. That was the first fatally flawed idea. Everything that followed was increasingly psychotic.
Unfortunately, many people in our world believe in Globalism, if you could call a partial vague view a legitimate belief.
They dreamily float on all the propaganda cover stories - greatest good for the greatest number of people; no more poverty; equality of sharing; reducing the carbon footprint; a green economy; “sustainable development”; international cooperation; engineering production and consumption of goods and services for the betterment of everyone; and all of this delivered from a central platform of altruistic guides.
If you track down the specifics that sit under these pronouncements, you discover you discover a warped system of planning that delivers misery and de facto slavery to the global population.
Waking up is hard to do? Breaking up is hard to do? They must be done.
A workable technological fix is a very nice achievement when the project is a machine. But transferring that glow of victory to the whole of society is an illusion. Anything that calls itself education would tackle the illusion as the first order of business.
For starters, I would advocate for a robust and ever-expanding welfare state - programs like Medicaid, food stamps, unemployment insurance, etc.
I would recognize that an effective recipe for keeping poor people poor is to create incentives that push them into decisions that prevent them from climbing out of poverty.
Rather than help individuals, the perverse economic incentives created by the “social safety net” trap aid recipients on welfare.
Specifically, the study concluded that in the case of a single mother with two children ages 1 and 4 earning $29,000 a year through work would be eligible for government benefits (such as Medicaid, housing vouchers, and subsidized daycare) equivalent to roughly an additional $28,000.
Such a scenario puts this woman in a bind. If she finds a better job paying more, or picks up more hours, she risks losing substantial amounts of benefits.
She would make her family financially worse off even though her paycheck would be bigger.
Just to come out even, once taxes are factored in, she would need to find work paying about $69,000 a year to compensate for the lost welfare benefits. Not many low-skilled workers can make such a leap.
It is a vicious, self-reinforcing cycle that keeps people poor and dependent on the state.
This scenario is commonly referred to as the welfare cliff. Confronted with this situation, many individuals understandably opt to continue receiving the government benefits.
Rather than help individuals, the perverse economic incentives created by the “social safety net” trap aid recipients on welfare.
And the longer they remain out of the workforce, or at lower levels of employment, the less employable they become. It is a vicious, self-reinforcing cycle that keeps people poor and dependent on the state.
Moreover, there is the impact the welfare state has on the family unit. Welfare programs break up families by replacing a father’s paycheck with a government check and benefits.
In my home state of North Carolina, families are roughly five times as likely to be in poverty when there is no father in the home.
2. Progressive Taxation Policy
High marginal taxes on profitable companies and small businesses alike discourage capital investment.
If I wanted to keep poor people poor, I also would finance the welfare state poverty trap through punitive taxes on the job and wealth creators of society.
The key ingredient to economic growth, and thus a higher standard of living for society’s poor, is through productivity gains made possible by capital investment.
High marginal taxes on profitable companies and small businesses alike discourage capital investment.
As businesses decide to either not expand or take their businesses to more investment-friendly countries, job opportunities dry up.
3. Increase the Minimum Wage
If I wanted to keep poor people poor, I would advocate for higher government-enforced minimum wages.
The law of supply and demand tells us that the higher the price of a good or service, the less of it will be demanded (other things held equal, of course).
The demand for low-skilled labor is no exception. Minimum wage laws are an effective tool to cut off the bottom rung of the career ladder.
Higher minimum wages will price more and more low-skilled people out of the labor market.
Meanwhile, the higher wages will attract more job seekers willing to supply their labor at the higher price. Employers will be able to be more selective in their hiring, and as such the lower-skilled job seekers will be crowded out of these opportunities by higher-skilled, less-needy candidates.
Minimum wage laws are an effective tool to cut off the bottom rung of the career ladder for those most in need of establishing work experience.
4. Support Restrictive “Green Energy” Policies
If I wanted to keep poor people poor, I would support government “green energy” initiatives that make energy more expensive.
State and federal initiatives that mandate more expensive “renewable” energy mean that - in the words of President Obama - utility bills “necessarily skyrocket.”
If I wanted to keep poor people poor, I would see to it that government imposes many costly regulations on businesses.
Such tight restrictions discourage businesses from starting or expanding,
Such tight restrictions discourage businesses from starting or expanding, meaning fewer job openings for those most in need of opportunity.
And mountains of red tape force business to expend scarce resources on compliance costs rather than investing in their businesses and creating jobs.
Higher-skilled compliance officer jobs will consume payroll that could have potentially gone toward opportunities for lower-skilled job seekers.
6. Inflate the Money Supply
If I wanted to keep poor people poor, I would support “quantitative easing” policies. Under such programs, the Federal Reserve [Central Banking / Reserve Banking] creates money out of thin air.
The inflated money supply then erodes the value of the dollars sitting in your wallet or bank account.
The poor are hit hardest by this inflation because their limited skill set makes it far more difficult for their incomes to keep up with the rising cost of living.
The price increases passed along to consumers disproportionately harm low-income households.
If I wanted to keep poor people poor, I would impose heavy tariffs on foreign goods in order to limit imports. Sure, the domestic industries protected from competition by these tariffs would prosper, but at what cost?
Furthermore, the price increases passed along to consumers disproportionately harm low-income households. The combination of fewer job opportunities and a higher cost of living certainly makes it harder for the poor to climb out of poverty.
Science Explains Why Highly Intelligent People Prefer To Be Alone January 7 2019 | From: IdeaPod
Scientists have a great idea about what is that is making people happy. It’s known that exercising can reduce the anxiety and help you relax.
Reducing the social media usage is going to improve your emotional wellbeing. Being in nature will bring us joy.
In addition, for numerous people, being around friends is making us feel happy and content. Friends are going to make you happier, unless you are highly intelligent.
This surprising claim is backed up by a research. In a paper that was published in the British Journal of Psychology, Satoshi Kanazawa and Norman Li explain why the very intelligent people are experiencing lower life satisfaction when they more frequently socialize with their close friends.
The scientists based their findings in evolutionary psychology, and they suggest that the intelligence evolved as a quality for solving the unique challenges. The more intelligent members of the group were more able to solve some issues on their own and they didn’t need help from their friends.
People are happier when they are with friends because we evolved on this way, but the more intelligent people are happier when they are alone.
Here’s the reason.
How Intelligence, Population Density, and Friendship Affect the Modern Happiness
The specialists reached their decision in the wake of breaking down study reactions from 15,197 individuals between the ages of 18 and 28. They got their information as a major aspect of the National Longitudinal Study of Adolescent Health, a study which measures life fulfillment, intelligence and health.
One of their key discoveries was accounted for by Inverse:
"Examination of this information uncovered that being around dense crowds of individuals ordinarily prompts unhappiness, while associating with companions regularly prompts joy – that is, unless the individual being referred to is exceptionally intelligent.”
The truth is out: associating with friends brings about expanding levels of joy unless you’re a truly smart individual.
The authors explain the findings they came across by raising the “savanna theory of happiness”, based on the idea that the life satisfaction of people is based not only on what’s happening in the present, but also by how the ancestors of ours may have reacted in the present moment.
The hypothesis originates from evolutionary psychology, and contends that the human brain was to a great extent planned by and adjusted to the states of the environment before we made a rural based society.
In this manner, the scientists contend, our brains are not appropriate to understanding and reacting to the one of a kind states of advanced society.
They analyzed two key factors that are unique to the modern era:
Population density
How frequently people socialize with their friends
According to the researchers, nowadays numerous people live in places of a higher population density than people before us would have lived in, and they spend less time with friends than people used to spend earlier.
Therefore, most people are going to become happier by living according to what is natural to them: spend more time with friends, and be around less people.
However, as the researchers stated, this doesn’t apply to highly intelligent persons.
"In general, more intelligent persons are more likely to have ‘unnatural’ preferences and values that the people before us did not have,” Kanazawa says.
“It is very natural for species such as humans to seek and desire friendships and, that’s why, more intelligent persons are likely to seek them less.”
They also found that the very intelligent people feel that they don’t benefit a lot from friendships, and yet they socialize more often than the less intelligent individuals.
Explaining the Research Finding That the Very Intelligent Individuals Want to be Alone
The most important question for the researchers is the reason why humans have adapted the quality of intelligence.
The evolutionary psychologists believe that the intelligence evolved as a psychological trait with the intention to solve new problems. For our ancestors, common contact with friends has been a necessity which has helped them to ensure their survival.
To be highly intelligent, however, meant that a person was uniquely able to solve challenges without needing the assistance of another person. This diminished the importance of friendships to these people.
In this way, an indication of somebody being exceedingly intelligent is extraordinarily having the capacity to comprehend challenges without the assistance of the gathering.
Historically, people have lived in groups of around 150: the typical Neolithic village was about this size. Thickly populated urban communities, then again, are accepted to bring out isolation and depression since they make it hard to encourage close relationships.
However, a busy and alienating place has to a lesser extent a contrary effect on more intelligent individuals. That may clarify why highly ambitious individuals float from rustic ranges to the urban areas.
"When all is said in done, urbanites have higher normal insight than ruralites do, conceivably in light of the fact that more intelligent people are better ready to live in ‘unnatural’ settings of high populace thickness,” says Kanazawa.
This Doesn’t Mean That if You Like to be Around Your Close Friends You Are Not Highly Intelligent
It’s also important to note that correlation in the research findings doesn’t mean causation.
In other words, the research findings don’t mean that if you enjoy to be surrounded by your friends that you are not highly intelligent.
While the highly intelligent persons may have adapted to be more comfortable in areas of high population density, the highly intelligent might also be “chameleons” – persons who are comfortable in various situations.
"What’s more important, the main associations of life satisfaction with the population density and socialization with our friends significantly interact with our intelligence, and the main association is reversed among the extremely intelligent people.
More intelligent persons experience lower life satisfaction with the more frequent socialization with friends.”
One of the key takeaways from this research could be to apply this to the introverts in your life.
Just because some person likes to be alone, doesn’t mean that they are lonely. They might just be highly intelligent and they are able to solve challenges on their own.
The Big Plan That Has Taken A Totally Different Turn January 6 2019 | From: OperationDisclosure / Various
The 'Elite' had a plan that is being actively defied. The outcome of which will soon be the opposite of all that 'they' had worked towards.
Through the intervention of the Alliance (positive forces against the Cabal) their nefarious plan is being 100% reversed for the sake of ending said Cabal and their debt-slavery system, just for starters.
The silent coup committed in 1913 on December 23rd by private bankers by founding the FED (Federal Reserve Agency) was a contract of 99 years.
Before 1913, as far as I know, no trading in birth certificates as we know them today had taken place. The contract of the FED expired in 2012, so they were no longer able to 'legitimately' print money out of thin air.
Without the world's population knowing this, man as a commercial product for those in power would have been deprived of his status as man, and would have been placed in a company, the TRUST.
That is the reason why we have been relegated from person to person, within their commercial structure is that a person cannot exist as a living being.
The system has been designed in such a way that we as a legal person have to register everything that is nothing else than renouncing our rights and possible possessions, and labour efforts, for the benefit of the Cabal Elite, the Vatican, Spiritual Centre, City of London Financial Centre and Washington DC as military power.
President John F Kennedy wanted to reintroduce money creation under his own legislation and was murdered for that purpose by George Herbert Walker Bush, then head of the CIA.
The CIA, which originated from the former OSS US secret service and the German GESTAPO. The CIA and FBI have been found to be agencies of the Bankers and Military Industrial Complex.
John F Kennedy and President of Indonesia Sukarno had agreed to introduce the new money system again independent of the Rothschild and JP Morgan Bankers, whereby the money with gold covered at the value of their joint gold stock would introduce.
As we know, it did not stop with this murder, but has followed the Kennedy family in generations.
President Sukarno was put out of order by the FED owners and replaced by Suharto on 2 October 1965 by a coup by the CIA.
In the spring of 1966 Sukarno had to hand over power to general Suharto and in 1967 he formally lost all power.
Since Indonesia was a former colony of the Netherlands, many people came from there to the Netherlands as ex Knil Militair.
The non-legal Royal Family of the Netherlands is connected to the ' New World Order' Cabal, and has treated the people who fought for them as second class people, who saw their loyalty rewarded with betrayal and contempt of the Dutch government and Royal Family.
However, these people are completely intrigued in our society and hearts, and have their right to exist in the Netherlands more than they deserve, I believe that this may also be mentioned once.
When the Dutch troops withdrew from Indonesia, several warships from the Netherlands were sunk, with a cargo of stolen gold.
It is a fixed pattern that the Cabal first conquered the gold as if they were the pirates of the country they were at war with. In 2015 the Dutch Fake Royal family visited Indonesia during a tour through several Asian countries, with the intention to recover the sunken Dutch ships and to claim the contents of gold.
Unfortunately for the Royal Cabal members, the ships were no longer to be found, so already recovered, and the gold returned to its rightful owner.
All the gold of the island groups of Indonesia would have had to function as collateral to give the current money system a gold coverage again, after the contract of the FED in 2012, had expired on December 22nd.
Sukarno's grandson Sino managed this gold until another manager was appointed, Neil Keenan, a businessman who had almost been destroyed by the Cabal, but who has now strengthened the hope of a fair money system, including the gold of Indonesia.
The Cabal 'Elite', together with the Committee of 300 industrialists, had worked out the plan to replace the current money system with a gold-covered system.
However, since the Cabal's plans were hijacked by the Alliance, the Cabal and the FED were given time to put their own house in order.
Comment:Read about the Alliance that has been working behind
the scenes for decades to take down the 'Cabal' within the work of David Wilcock.
Some of those reading this may be confused because the cabal-controlled mainstream media is doing everything within it's
power to denigrate Trump - as he is part of the effort to take the Illuminati down once and for all.
In 2016, Donald J Trump became President of the US, after the army was faced with the choice of either making a coup or asking the independent patriot Donald J Trump to join the presidency.
Through the unelected corrupt EU, the NWO is still trying to push through with their Climate Fraud.
It is therefore logical that the Cabal should be completely removed from its dominant position in order to be able to start the RV and announcement of GESARA.
I have now only mentioned Indonesia's gold, which is only the smallest fund.
Africa's mineral resources are a multiple of this, so now it will also become clear why the EU wants to commit itself to Africa, and a mass of imports of Africans should be imported according to Cabal Frans Timmermans of the EU and Globalist Macron, Rutte and Merkel.
The Alliance of US, Russia, Africa, China and BRICS countries have therefore built a new financial infrastructure with the AIIB Asian Infrastructure Investment Bank.
It houses all the value of the whole world, the stolen wealth of the world's population, and all the world's resources in gold, diamonds Oil, ores and birth certificates of the entire world's population.
If the information I have read is correct, this would represent an amount of 1 with 58 zeros which will be managed by the quantum financial system QFS in a CIPS protocol instead of the FED bankers.
The arrest of more than 70,887 Cabal members is a prerequisite for the transition.
That is why the military tribunals that started in Guantánamo (GITMO) in Cuba from 2 January 2019 are one of the conditions that must be met.
It will be clear that almost all Western governments will fall by this transition.
Let the tribunals do their job, and not be tempted by personal revenge against these inhumane Cabal members, not to lower us to their level.
The control and power comes back to the population, the deliberate poisoning of the World population will stop, so Chemtrails will soon be a thing of the past.
Suppressed inventions will be released to thrive as humanity in happiness and peace.
GMO food will be banned, we will live in harmony with nature, air and water will be clean again.
The deliberate manipulation of Weather and jet stream by HAARP will disappear, so that the water household of the earth will get its natural course again.
Deserts are going to become oases with a nice climate to live in, all Migrants have their own paradise on earth and can return to their own country to make their dream come true, with the help of the whole world community.
Every culture will experience its own form of transition, in which peace will be guaranteed, earlier indoctrination will be broken with all the revelations that lie ahead.
We have all suffered under the old system, the desire for peace will guide us to the future in peace and happiness.
It was an honour for me to be part of this with my personal commitment and longing for this freedom, to come out of the suffocating oppression of the Cabal. Think it's time for a party like Trump has announced that many people will be happy at the beginning of January 2019.
The battle is not over yet, but it is placed far in the right direction.
It is entirely my understanding of what I have written here, where everyone can have his own interpretation of his experience, as long as I do not have to discuss it, with people who have a limited information source.
Where also I don't have to be completely right in my story, I can make mistakes, which makes that I can learn from my mistakes, I’m human.
What You Pay Attention To Ends Up Controlling Your Life January 5 2019 | From: Sott
One of the best insights on what true productivity means in the 21st century dates back to 1890. In his book The Principles of Psychology, Vol.1, William James wrote a simple statement that's packed with meaning: "My experience is what I agree to attend to."
Your attention determines the experiences you have, and the experiences you have determine the life you live.
Or said another way: you must control your attention to control your life. Today, in a world where so many experiences are blended together - where we can work from home (or a train or a plane or a beach), watch our kids on a nanny-cam from work, and distraction is always just a thumb-swipe away - has that ever been more true?
Attention Management
To be consistently productive and manage stress better, we must strengthen our skill in attention management.
Attention management is the practice of controlling distractions, being present in the moment, finding flow, and maximizing focus, so that you can unleash your genius.
It's about being intentional instead of reactive. It is the ability to recognize when your attention is being stolen (or has the potential to be stolen) and to instead keep it focused on the activities you choose.
Rather than allowing distractions to derail you, you choose where you direct your attention at any given moment, based on an understanding of your priorities and goals.
Better attention management leads to improved productivity, but it's about much more than checking things off a to-do list. The ultimate result is the ability to create a life of choice, around things that are important to you. It's more than just exercising focus. It's about taking back control over your time and your priorities.
Aspirations vs. Experiences
The leaders I work with tell me, "I believe in the power of mentoring and coaching my team members. The most important thing I can do as a leader is support them and encourage their growth. This is how I make a difference, and it's what gives me satisfaction at work."
But later in our conversation, I hear how their days actually go: "I spend a big chunk of my time on email and putting out fires.
I started the year with a coaching plan for my team, but it's fallen by the wayside amid everything else that is going on. My one-on-ones with team members don't happen as often as I would like, and the content is too much 'trees' and not enough 'forest.'"
Even if you see yourself as a passionate advocate for coaching and mentoring, you won't have the impact you'd like if your actions and experiences don't reflect these values.
As James said, your experience is what you attend to. And your experiences become your life.
So if your attention continues getting diverted, and email, meetings, and "firefighting" consume your days, pretty soon weeks or months will have gone by and your life becomes full of the "experiences" you never really intended to have.
So why don't we just have the experiences we want to have, and create the lives we most want to lead? Why does this painful gulf exist between the selves we aspire to and how we spend our time?
The fact that James was thinking about this topic in the 19th century shows that we've long wrestled with the conflict between our goals and values and the lure of distractions.
But, of course, we live in a world with many more distractions than existed in the 1890s. When he published The Principles of Psychology, the telephone was brand-new.
Today, we have internet-connected phones and other devices that are always with us, delivering a volume of information and communication James couldn't have imagined. There's a lot more competition for our attention.
Let's go back to our mentoring and coaching example. You could start each day intending to focus on developing your team. But those intentions can quickly get swept away in the rush of demands that characterize our workdays.
In this frenzied work environment, accomplishing the things that are most meaningful to you doesn't just happen. You can't leave it to chance. Your busy environment presents choice after choice every day about what you will attend to - and what your experiences will be.
Deliberately Choosing What You Attend To
This is where attention management offers a solution. It's a deliberate approach that puts you back in control.
Practicing attention management means fighting back against the distractions and creating opportunities throughout your day to support your priorities.
First, control external factors:
Control your technology: Remember, it's there to serve you, not the other way around! Decide to take control by turning off email and "push" notifications which are specifically designed to steal your attention. This will allow you to engage in more stretches of focused work on tasks and activities that you choose. As often as possible and especially when you're working, keep your phone silent and out of sight.
Control your environment: Set boundaries with others, especially in an open-office setting. For example, use headphones or put up a "do not disturb" sign when you need to focus. If that doesn't work, try going to a different part of your office, or even another floor of your building. If things are really bad, you can try teaming up with colleagues to designate a certain time of day, or day of the week, a "no distractions" day for everyone to do heads-down work.
But here's an overlooked truth: Our productivity suffers not just because we are distracted by outside interruptions, but also because our own brains, frazzled by today's frantic workplaces, become a source of distraction in and of themselves.
For example, the problem isn't just that an email interrupts your work. It's also the fact that being tethered to your email inbox conditions you to expect an interruption every few minutes, which chips away at your attention span.
You then become so afraid of forgetting to do some small task - like sending an email or forwarding a document - that you start to do everything as soon as you've thought of it; but then you end up getting sucked into your overflowing inbox before you know it.
Moreover, knowing that you have a catalog of all the world's knowledge at your fingertips - in terms of the internet on your smartphone -- makes it difficult to be comfortable in a state of "I don't know," and hard to avoid the distracting temptation to "find out now."
So you must also learn to control internal factors:
Control your behavior: Use those times when your technology is tamed and your do-not-disturb sign is up to get used to single-tasking: open only one window on your computer screen, and give your full attention to one task until it's complete, or until a designated stopping point. Take breaks throughout the day where you step away from your computer. Try to "unplug" completely (no technology) for at least an hour or more, as often as you can. Try it for 15-20 minutes at first; then build up to an hour, or even 90 minutes.
Control your thoughts: For many of us, this is the hardest nut to crack, which is why I've left it to last. Minds are made to wander. Practice noticing when your mind is veering off in its own direction, and gently guide your focus back to where you want it. If you think of some important small task while you are doing focused work, jot it down on a notepad and come back to it later. Do the same with information you want to look up online.
Practicing attention management will not eliminate distractions from your day.
But as you start to recognize when you become distracted, and build your "attention muscle" through habits like those above, you'll start to reclaim your life and devote more of yourself to what's really important to you.
Don't allow distraction to derail your aspirations and intentions. Instead, control your attention to control your life.
Scientists Explain How Earth’s Magnetic Field Connects All Living Systems January 4 2019 | From: CollectiveEvolution
Science has recently shed light on the fact that what we used to perceive as ‘human’ aura is actually real.
All of our bodies emit an electromagnetic field, and this fact plays a very important role far beyond what is commonly known when it comes to understanding our biology, and the interconnectedness we share with all life.
For example, did you know that the heart emits the largest electromagnetic field of all the body’s major organs? These fields and the information encoded into them can change based on how we are feeling, what we thinking, and different emotions we take on.
In Brief:
The Facts: Earth, as well as all other living systems, have a magnetic field and scientists are discovering that these fields connect us all, and actually carry biologically relevant information.
Reflect On: This information is suggesting that, not only can your actions affect yourself and others around you as well, but so can you thoughts, feelings and emotions. The way you feel changes the information coded into your magnetic field.
The heart even sends signals to the brain through a system of neurons that have both short-term and long-term memory, and these signals can affect our emotional experiences.
The emotional information that’s modulated and coded into these fields changes their nature, and these fields can impact those around us. As Rollin McCraty, Ph.D, and director of research at The HeartMath Institute tell us, “we are fundamentally and deeply connected with each other and the planet itself.”
"Research findings have shown that as we practice heart coherence and radiate love and compassion, our heart generates a coherent electromagnetic wave into the local field environment that facilitates social coherence, whether in the home, workplace, classroom or sitting around a table.
As more individuals radiate heart coherence, it builds an energetic field that makes it easier for others to connect with their heart.
So, theoretically it is possible that enough people building individual and social coherence could actually contribute to an unfolding global coherence."
The quote above comes from Dr. Deborah Rozman, the President of Quantum Intech.
We are living in exciting times when it comes to science, and although not emphasized and studied in the mainstream as much as we’d like, science is acknowledging that we are all part of a giant web of connections that, not only encompasses life on this planet, but our entire solar system and what lies beyond it.
So, what exactly is heart coherence? Well, it implies order, structure, and as Dr. Rozman puts it, “an alignment within and amongst systems – whether quantum particle, organisms, human beings, social groups, planets or galaxies.
This harmonious order signifies a coherent system whose optimal functioning is directly related to the ease and flow in its processes.” Basically, feelings of love, gratitude, appreciation and other ‘positive’ emotions not only have an effect on our nervous system, but they have an affect on those around us, far beyond what we might have previously thought.
It’s similar to the studies that have been conducted regarding mass meditation and prayer. As far as their effects on physical systems, numerous publications have yielded statistically significant results.
For a selected list of downloadable peer-reviewed journal articles reporting studies of this type of phenomena, mostly published in the 21st century, you can click here.
Another point that illustrates the importance of coherence is the fact that several organizations around the world have conducted synchronized meditations, prayers, intention experiments, and more. A number of studies have shown that collective meditations, prayer or focused intention directed toward a certain positive outcome can have measurable effects.
For example, one study was done during the Israel-Lebanon war in the 1980s. Two Harvard University professors organized groups of experienced meditators in Jerusalem, Yugoslavia, and the United states with the specific purpose of focusing attention on the area of conflict at various intervals over a 27-month period.
During the course of the study, the levels of violence in Lebanon decreased between 40 and 80 percent each time a meditating group was in place. The average number of people killed during the war each day dropped from 12 to three, and war-related injuries fell by 70 percent.
Another great example is a study that was conducted in 1993 in Washington, D.C., which showed a 25 percent drop in crime rates when 2,500 meditators meditated during a specific periods of time with that intention.
"Every individual’s energy affects the collective field environment. The means each person’s emotions and intentions generate an energy that affects the field.
A first step in diffusing societal stress in the global field is for each of us to take personal responsibility for our own energies. We can do this by increasing our personal coherence and raising our vibratory rate, which helps us become more conscious of the thoughts, feelings, and attitudes that we are feeding the field each day.
We have a choice in every moment to take to heart the significance of intentionally managing our energies. This is the free will or local freedom that can create global cohesion."
– Dr. Rozman
The Global Coherence Initiative (GCI)
The GCI in an international cooperative effort to help activate the heart of humanity and facilitate a shift in global consciousness.
It’s primary focuses are to invite people to participate by actively adding more heart-coherent love, care, and compassion into the planetary field.
The second is scientific research on how we are all energetically connected with each other and the planet, and how we can utilize this interconnectivity, which is very real, to raise our personal vibration to assist in creating a better world.
The hypotheses of the researchers and scientists behind this process are as follows:
The Earth’s magnetic fields are a carrier of biologically relevant information that connects all living systems
Every person affects this global information field. Large numbers of people creating heart-coherent states of love, appreciation, care, and compassion can generate a more coherent field environment that benefits others and helps off-set the current planetary discord and incoherence
There is a feedback loop between human beings and Earth’s energetic/magnetic systems
Earth has several sources of magnetic fields that affect us all. Two of them are the geomagnetic field that emanates from the core of the Earth, and the fields that exist between Earth and the ionosphere. These fields surround the entire planet and act as protective shields blocking out the harmful effects of solar radiation, cosmic rays, sand, and other forms of space weather. Without these fields, ice as we know it could not exist on Earth. They are part of the dynamic ecosystem of our planet
Think about the current state of our planet. We are definitely not in coherence, with all of the violence, war, hate, and greed that still plague our planet, we have a lot of work to do.
We do not yet know how these thoughts, emotions, and feelings are affecting the entire planet, and what type of information these experiences are encoding into once electromagnetic fields, and how it is interacting with that of the Earth’s.
Things are changing, however. There is definitely a shift within people who are desiring a better experience here on planet Earth.
These energetic fields are known to scientists, but there are still many unknowns. Solar activity and the rhythms taking place on Earth’s magnetic fields have an impact on health and behaviour. This is firmly established in scientific literature.
Scientific literature also firmly establishes that several physiological rhythms and global collective behaviours are not only synchronized with solar and geomagnetic activity, but that disruptions in these fields can create adverse effects on human health and behaviour.
"When the Earth’s magnetic field environment is distributed it can cause sleep problems, mental confusion, usual lack of energy or a feeling of being on edge or overwhelmed for no apparent reason.
At other times, when the Earth’s fields are stable and certain measures of solar activity are increased, people report increased positive feelings and more creativity and inspiration.
This is likely due to a coupling between the human brain, cardiovascular and nervous system with resonating geomagnetic frequencies."
The Earth and ionosphere generate frequencies that range from 0.01 hertz to 300 hertz, some of which are in the exact same frequency range as the one happening in our brain, cardiovascular system, and autonomic nervous system.
This fact is one way to explain how fluctuations in the Earth’s and Sun’s magnetic fields can influence us. Changes in these fields have also been shown to affect our brain waves, heart rhythms, memory, athletics performance, and overall health.
Changes in the Earth’s fields from extreme solar activity have been linked to some of humanity’s greatest creations of art, as well as some of its most tragic events.
We know how these fields affect us, but what about how we affect these fields?
That’s the real question here. GCI scientists believe that because brain wave and heart rhythm frequencies overlap the Earth’s field resonance, we are not just receivers of biologically relevant information, but also feed information into the global field, thus creating a feedback loop with the Earth’s magnetic fields.
"Research is indicating that human emotions and consciousness encode information into the geomagnetic field and this encoded information is distributed globally.
The Earth’s magnetic fields act as carrier waves for this information which influences all living systems and the collective consciousness."
This research, which is still in its infancy, has great ramifications. It will further push along the fact that our attitudes, emotions, and intentions actually matter, a lot, and that these factors within the realm of non-material science can affect all life on Earth.
Coherent, cooperative intention could impact global events and improve the quality of life on Earth. Practicing love, gratitude, appreciation, and bettering ourselves as individuals is one out of many action steps towards changing our planet for the better.
So What Can You Do?
So, next time you are upset, angry, or frustrated, try observing yourself and how you react. It’s great practice to try and lose your buttons so they cannot be pushed, and work on your personal development.
You have to do whatever you can to feel good, which could include exercise, eating healthy, minimizing electronics time, spending time with friends, animals, and more.
You could practice being less judgemental, and work on your intentions by figuring out if they are coming from a ‘good’ place. You could be more grateful, you could help others, and you can treat others how they want to be treated.
There are a number of tools you could use, like meditation, for example, to assist you with these action steps. Bottom line, if you are at peace with yourself, and have control over your emotions, you are helping the planet and others around you. If you are constantly angry, harming others or have negative intentions, you could be doing the exact opposite.
To further your research on this topic, an excellent place to start is the at the Institute of HeartMath.
The Institute of HeartMath is an internationally recognized nonprofit research and education organization dedicated to helping people reduce stress, self-regulate emotions, and build energy and resilience for healthy, happy lives.
Donald Trump Twenty-Four Months On… January 3 2019 | From: JonRappoport / Various
It’s been twenty-four months since I first posted this. Would love to hear your thoughts on this article and President Trump two-years on. Sound off in the comments…
I’ve written many words about the man and what he’s been doing. To repeat a few of them, his two most important achievements are: he’s contributing, in a major way, to the ongoing destruction of the credibility of big media; and he kept Hillary Clinton out of the White House.
Concerning the media - I am tremendously enthusiastic about what Trump has done. I pop champagne corks on that one. He’s provided a public service for the ages.
We would be light years beyond where we are now, if the world of conventional journalism hadn’t sold its soul, its morality, its intelligence, and its hunger for getting to the bottom of things so long ago. In his own improvisations and riffs, Trump has turned the media stars on their heads looking out of their asses.
He has been merciless. He has worked acrobatic tricks worthy of a Salvador Dali.
When they thought he was here, he was there. When they thought they had him pinned against the wall, he vanished and there was no wall. When they thought he was done, he was starting.
When they assumed they were occupying a higher position, he was poking them in the solar plexus of their pretensions and exposing them as rank amateurs.
They go sober-serious, he laughs. They deride and mock him, he reminds them they’re supposed to be professional. They scream and go ballistic, he walks away.
He’s supposed to be in Washington, he’s in New York. He’s supposed to lay out his schedule for them, he vanishes. He shouldn’t talk to a foreign leader, he talks to a foreign leader.
The Washington Post reports the Russians hacked the election, he says the CIA is making it up.
Make no mistake about it, Globalists of every stripe and disguise infect Washington like the plague. Their goals, reputations, connections, and paychecks are on the line.
They want to neutralize Trump by any means possible. He has hammered the TPP, and said he’ll cancel it (Chuck Schumer has already said it’s dead).
Will he change the pernicious culture, which is devolving to the point where “free-everything” for nothing is considered the most illuminated version of political philosophy? He will try, but indirectly, by opening up new levels of employment.
Will he continue to slam major media control of the information flow? Yes. In that regard, he has already done more than any president in modern history.
And if language is important (and it is), his communication with the American people, in its direct colloquial style, is a distinct departure from the polished, empty, grotesque media/politician mechanical mind-numbing bullshit that has all but taken over the landscape.
Will he try to curtail the divide-and-conquer “race-war” mentality that has been heavily promoted over the last eight years? Again, his basic strategy is: give people jobs. Renew the economy. Float all boats.
Will Trump curtail open borders and reduce the reality of terrorists and criminals entering the US? Will he knock aside the unproven claims of global warmists and erase the absurd and dangerous carbon-tax plan?
Will he rebuild the fading infrastructure of this country? Will he put Common Core out of its misery? I believe he will make progress in all these areas. How much progress? Impossible to predict.
Will he refuse to launch wars and covert ops of Empire? Will he bring massive numbers of US troops stationed abroad back home, kick the neocons out on their asses, and scale back the enormous influence of the military-industrial complex, which, after JFK, encircled America with its dream of a forever World Empire?
This would be one of the most important actions he could launch as president. And the effort is like trying to turn an oil tanker around in a small space.
To the degree he rebuilds the military, he’ll keep pouring $$ into the maw of the military-industrial machine. I think it’s possible that he and his advisors see, from a purely pragmatic viewpoint, that American Empire has reached an end-point. It is a failure. It can’t go further.
The blowback on America has outflanked its lists of Empire-conquests. However, until Trump shows he’s really going to try to cancel the neocon American Empire, and means it, I’m not making any assumptions whatsoever.
Is Donald Trump more than a puppet in the hands of Globalists? I believe he is more than that.
Is he a mere tool who was handed the election by Globalists who realized Hillary Clinton was too sick and deranged to stay the course in the White House? I believe he is not a mere tool in their hands, even if they ended up supporting him.
Does he want the job of president ONLY for the purpose of feathering his personal nest and stroking his own ego? I don’t think that’s the case now, if it ever was.
However, unraveling his myriad business interests is necessary, in order to discover whether his decisions as president add to his wealth.
Handing over those businesses to his family isn’t a barrier against self-aggrandizing policies. Trump is, after all, a real estate hustler from way back.
One question in this regard: Trump appears ready to give US corporations a tax holiday, so they can bring back huge amounts of money they’ve stashed overseas, for the express purpose of buying shares of their own companies.
This practice has been a way CEOs can make their operations look good (share prices go up) while actually producing nothing new.
As a reader of mine suggested (and I ask), will this Trump policy of share-buying do nothing to rejuvenate those businesses, thus creating no new jobs?
And will this policy enable Trump’s family to buy shares in whatever piece of the Trump empire is publicly traded, pushing up its stock price? This needs serious attention.
Will Trump roll back the many local incarnations of the UN’s criminal Agenda 21 blueprint for closely monitored, extensively planned technocratic towns and cities?
I’m not sure he’s even aware of this massive incursion on life in America - aside from sanctuary cities fronted by virtue-signaling liberal snowflakes and paid operatives. He will take steps to reduce those bastions of hope and change.
Is it possible that, when all is said and done, Trump’s most important action will have been his merciless attack on major media - and by extension, their Globalist handlers?
Yes. And by my measure, he would then have achieved a step toward freeing information and truth from its century-long prison of mind control. The consequences of such a liberation could be titanic. In the long run, Trump is far less important than the millions of people who could wake up from their deep slumber.
I believe Trump’s plan to bring employment back to America will involve a kind of FDR/New Deal program of trillion-dollar government contracts to rebuild the infrastructure.
This is by no means free-market America. If his plan gets through the Congress, many new jobs will be created, yes. On the other hand, the $$ power of the federal government will increase. It’s never a great idea to give the feds more control as the number-one employer in the nation.
I think Trump favors jobs, all jobs, and will go to extremes to create them. This includes giving the green light to tech giants to keep carrying out contracts to expand the Surveillance State.
Will he root out and eliminate the power of vicious gangs in inner cities - gangs who are holding residents hostage in their own communities? I believe he’ll make at least a minimum effort. Even if a president is motivated, that’s a very tall order.
I assume that as a businessman he has committed criminal acts of one kind or another. Do they rank as high as the pay-for-play Clinton Foundation and the mass obliteration of Libya, two of Hillary Clinton’s favorite operations? No. Not even close.
Will Trump favor big-corporate cronies with the gift of government contracts? I would think so.
Will he make deals and side-deals, some of which go beyond the literal bounds of law, to advance his presidential agenda? I would certainly think so. What president hasn’t?
Could everything I’m mentioning in this article go by the boards, because Trump’s enemies create sudden disasters for him to manage - disasters which dwarf all other issues and programs? Absolutely.
Could Trump himself make a fatal error that brings his house down? For example, could his advisors convince him to make a wide-ranging deal with Russia that includes the extradition of Edward Snowden to stand trial in America? Maybe.
Could Trump be convinced to start a dangerous war somewhere, perhaps in response to a planned false-flag operation designed for that very purpose? It’s possible.
Bill Clinton said this in 1995 and received a standing ovation. Donal Trump said it in 2016 and he is a racist?
"The problem with the liberal left and the media trying to make issue with President Donald Trump’s speeches and his executive actions is that, many times in the past, Democratic leaders have done exactly the same thing, only they were never perceived as racist or bigots. Yet, for whatever reason, that is the face put down on Donald."
Does he see that so-called liberals, who are really socialists and Globalists and technocrats, have come very close to taking over this country, under the banner of “share and care” and “empathy” and “love” - behind which they hide an endless supply of venom for those people who believe in a) working for their own rewards; b) individualism; and c) independence of thought?
I think he plans to approach that gigantic reality with jobs and more jobs; his blanket solution. Put America back to work. Is that a real solution? Yes, it certainly helps.
But here we are talking about the culture, and what he can possibly say to the American people to restore a sense of traditional values (life, liberty, and the pursuit of happiness) that doesn’t come across as vapid sentimentality.
He is a clever man. I believe he wants to sidestep a direct confrontation with “the values issue.” Instead, he wants to cure the genuine desperation many Americans feel because they can’t find decent work. He wants to create a boom in the domestic economy that floats all boats.
I can’t fault him for that. However, a major part of the US economy has long been predicated on jobs that either produce nothing or produce toxic outcomes. Those engines aren’t going to go away.
I believe Trump can make progress in decimating the political-correctness disease. I believe he can help reverse the obsession with parsing people’s words and finding “hidden racist content.” And the issue where all this rubber meets the road is: immigration.
His opponents will keep saying that anything less than wide open borders is Hitlerian. His point is: there is a threat and a danger.
Letting in felons; letting in potential terrorists and actual terrorists; letting in people who hate America and want everything they can get for free in America; letting in people who take jobs from Americans (including legal immigrants); letting in people who overburden the economy via all the free services they can obtain - this is wrong, this is suicide, this is crazy.
It has nothing to do with racism.
If he succeeds in reducing this immigration threat - wall or no wall - he will go a significant distance in proving that protecting America has nothing to do with hatred.
At the same time (and I have to stress this again), he can’t decide to keep forwarding Empire abroad, thus exacerbating the desire for revenge against America among many people who feel the destructive force of the US military machine.
If he turns into just another jingoist, he’s finished. And he should be.
What about draining the swamp in Washington? This is another case of trying to turn around an oil tanker in a small space. He needs to provide vivid examples.
For starters, he should pursue, with all speed, the gathering of specific evidence for the prosecution of Hillary and Bill Clinton, vis-à-vis the Clinton Foundation and its nefarious activities. No stone should be left unturned. That would set a new tone.
For people who need a heavy dose of who and what the Clintons are, I recommend immersing yourself in everything the late Christopher Hitchens wrote and said about them. (I’m sure Hitchens would hate a Trump presidency.)
If I were in charge of everything from the beginning of the Republic in the 18th century (!), my goal would have been to make a hundred Republics with severely limited governments on this continent - with virtually no foreign entanglements of any kind (political or commercial) - instead, opting for self-sufficiency as the primary value.
But that’s another story for another time. Meanwhile, I see a glint of light here, and I see risks and possibilities, and I see that perhaps we can make steps toward ridding America of the festering woes that have beset it: Empire, on the one hand; hideous liberalism masking a technocratic Globalist takeover that would sink us, on the other hand.
At no time over the past 30 years of working as a reporter have I felt all is lost. At no time have I felt that the forces arrayed against us are too great or too smart. At no time have I felt that all doors are closed. I take the long view.
Many things can happen to wake people up - mainly themselves when they finally feel their way of operating and living has become self-defeating.
Rather than opting for pure hope now, I believe Trump’s feet should be held to the fire. He made promises. Those promises are clear. We should see authentic efforts from him in those directions.
I’m aware that some readers can only accept extreme views of Trump or any politician. Wonderful or terrible. Messianic or hideous. That’s not what I’ve presented here. I’ve presented what I see. So be it.
Start Doing These Nine Things For Yourself Every Day To Immediately Improve Your Life + Alan Watts On How To Make Yourself A Better Person January 2 2019 | From: Medium / UpliftConnect You can ensure your own success over the priorities of others by doing these things for yourself every single day.
“If you don’t design your life, then someone else may just design it for you, and you may not like their idea of balance.” - Nigel Marsh
Successful people know the importance of taking care of themselves first, and don’t let their lives get so off track that they aren’t constantly improving. You owe it to yourself and to those around you to be the best version of yourself, and let’s be honest; we could all use a little improvement.
Here are a few super-simple habits and routines that are easy to implement but could dramatically improve your life this year:
1. Start Practicing a Gratitude Attitude
“Be thankful for what you have, you’ll end up having more. If you concentrate on what you do not have, you will never have enough” - Oprah Winfrey
Adopting a gratitude attitude is really about changing your perception of the world around you. If you find yourself believing that opportunities are far and few and unlikely to come across, this attitude adjustment may be just what you need.
Having sincere gratitude allows us see endless possibilities and realize that we are actually surrounded by opportunities. In order to achieve your dreams you need to believe in it; gratitude allows you to believe in your dreams and visions which eventually allow you to reach your full potential.
2. Take a Breather
During a hectic day, taking a break is usually the last thing on our minds. But even champion athletes need some bench time every once and a while, and so do you.
According to Sharon Salzberg, the author of Real Happiness at Work, “Without some breathing space in the face of constant demands, we won’t be creative, competent, or cheerful.”
The little time taken off from work is well worth the investment. For starters, put everything down for a few minutes and take a walk.
It might not seem like a big deal, but according to Shawn Anchor, author of The Happiness Advantage, taking the time to get outside can be very advantageous and by spending only twenty minutes outdoors you can enhance your mood, expand thinking space and improve your working memory.
I promise, whatever you were working on before your little breather will still be there when you get back - and you might even have your next big idea when you return.
3. Make Time For Meditation
If you haven’t already jumped on the Zen Bandwagon, it’s about time you stop making excuses and just start meditating.
Studies have shown that meditation can help to reduce depression and anxiety, increase memory and awareness, may grow your empathy for others and can boost your immune system.
How and when you meditate is completely up to you; do what works into your schedule and what you are most likely to be able to develop into a routine (remember, the easier the task, the easier it is to make it a habit).
The Conscious Life is a great resource for beginner meditators, answering questions like what to do if you find yourself falling asleep, explaining various breathing exercises and suggestions on time of day and surrounding environment.
The best part? You can actually do this while sitting at your desk in the office.
4. Design Your Life Around Happiness
Happiness can seem like such an abstract concept. After all, a Hallmark card or Dove chocolate wrapper doesn’t exactly give you a concrete way to create a happier life.
But according to Stanford’s famous “Designing Your Life” class, you can actually home in on what happiness means to you, and restructure your life around it. Instead of just abstractly chasing happiness, they suggest you journal it daily.
Start by writing down the specifics - when you were happy, what you were doing, why did it make you happy, etc.). If you notice reoccurring themes or patterns, start changing your goals or routines to incorporate them.
5. Do Good for Others
“If you go out and make some good things happen, you will fill the world with hope, you will fill yourself with hope.” Multiple scientific studies have shown that paying it forward not only makes others feel better, but creates long-lasting feelings of joy within yourself, and can provide that much-needed boost to your overall mood.
University of Pennsylvania Professor, Martin Seligman, notes: “We scientists have found that doing a kindness produces the single most reliable monetary increase in well-being of any exercise we have tested.”
Bring some donuts into work. Offer people coffee. Offer to help with a project. Do what you can to get the whole team beaming, and they’ll do the same for you.
6. Cultivate an Entrepreneurial Mindset
You don’t have to own a business (or even work in a startup) to be an entrepreneur - being an entrepreneur is a mindset, and if you aren’t thinking that way already, it’s time to get on board.
“Being entrepreneurial is essentially about thinking and doing something that we have not done before. It is about assessing a situation, designing alternatives, and choosing a new way - or perhaps a combination of ways.”
You do not need to invent a new app to be innovative - just start thinking outside of the box.
Start trusting your instincts and thinking bravely - you have the entrepreneur in you, you just have to be willing to give it a try.
"Insanity: doing the same thing over and over again and expecting different results.”
- Albert Einstein
If you have been trying to succeed at something for a while now and it hasn’t been working, or, even more important, it isn’t making you happy, it is time to try something else.
It does not mean that you are a failure. It means that you are smart enough to realize when something isn’t working out and that you have enough dignity to do something to make yourself happy.
8. Tech Isn’t Always Helpful
Arianna Huffington once said that we take better care of our smartphones than we do ourselves, and she was right. The average smartphone user checks his or her device every six and a half minutes. That’s 150 times a day.
The media mogul had to reinvent her life after collapsing from exhaustion, and she found that unplugging from her devices was a key component to finding happiness.
Checking your email and phone constantly creates unnecessary stress and can eat away at your happiness.
So if you don’t need to use it, put your phone in a drawer till the end of the day. If having it is necessary for work, limit the amount of times you check it to once every half hour. I do, and it’s made a huge difference.
9. Practice Being Your Future Self
Quite simply, to become that ideal, future version of yourself, you need to practice being it this year.
According to Peter Bregman, CEO and leadership expert, in Harvard Business Review, “You need to spend time on the future even when there are more important things to do in the present and even when there is no immediate apparent return to your efforts.
Whether you want to get in better shape or start a business, it’s not going to happen overnight. Instead of waiting for this change, start prioritizing and scheduling bite-size improvements today, no matter how busy you are
Alan Watts On How To Make Yourself A Better Person
Can we actually transform ourselves?
We humans have been concerned with transforming our minds for a very long time.
With all the problems facing the world today we seem bent on an urgent need to improve ourselves so we can transform the world. Yet, can we in fact improve our minds, or ourselves? Or is it rather a case of being a vicious circle?
Great philosopher and Zen expert, Alan Watts, says:
"If I am in need of improving, then the person doing the improving is the very person needing the improving!”
Alan Watts wrote more than 25 books and articles on subjects important to Eastern and Western religion, introducing the then-burgeoning youth culture to The Way of Zen.
Open your mind with this profound and mind bending talk from this potent teacher.
“Cut The Noise”: My 2018 Holiday Post January 1 2019 | From: VigilantCitizen
If I had to sum up 2018 in one word, it would be “noisy”. Because, well, 2018 was a year full of noise.
And I’m not only referring to the constant noise emanating from the multiple devices that surround us. I’m also talking about the “weaponized noise” that is polluting mass media.
1. Any sound that is undesired or interferes with one’s hearing of something.
2. Irrelevant or meaningless data or output occurring along with desired information.
The general population consumes, on a daily basis, a great amount of mass media for information and entertainment. This content is purposely interwoven with a great amount of noise which only exists to anger, confuse and divide.
Here are some specific examples that you can find online:A clickbaity headline carefully crafted to be infuriating; A meme circulating on Facebook distorting a divisive issue; A Reddit post based on a strawman argument discrediting an issue or a person; An accusatory tweet custom-made to stir up outrage and controversy.
In the grand scheme of things, none of these things are important yet they succeed in taking an incredible amount of time, energy and attention from people. More importantly, they contribute to creating a toxic social climate.
In 2019, we need to realize one important fact: Most of this noise is manufactured.
Indeed, “weaponized noise” is a new form of propaganda. It is used to polarize issues and to cause a wedge between groups of people. The end game is simple: Divide and Conquer.
They want to pit us against each other. Liberals versus conservatives; Whites versus Blacks; Men versus women; Whatever versus whatever else.
We are being programmedto hate each other, and as a consequence, completely unable to unite.
Indeed, seeing the masses united towards a common goal is the ultimate fear of the elite. The best way to keep people under control is through perpetual division.
To achieve perpetual division, you need to foment irrational hate. And to achieve irrational hate, you need to turn people into debased individuals who cannot resist their most destructive impulses.
In Their Image
As the public space becomes angrier, a culture of vengeance and retribution has emerged where people actively root for the destruction of those they don’t agree with.
Are we going in the right direction here? Are those the values we truly want to live by? If not, whose values are we adopting? Think about it.
In my article The Sick, Twisted Messages in “Chilling Adventures of Sabrina”, I explained how this Netflix series glorified vengeance against those we don’t like.
Indeed, in the series, tormenting someone through witchcraft is characterized as “fun”. Furthermore, Satanism is sold as a way to be “free to love and hate”.
We are far from “love thy neighbor”. Is it a coincidence that, as the public space turns into a hateful, spiteful cesspit, a belief system endorsing these heinous sentiments is being openly promoted?
Is the elite providing the masses with the perfect philosophical backdrop to justify indulgence in their basest impulses without any guilt?
Cutting Through the Noise
The Vigilant Citizen is not about adding to the noise, it is about cutting through it. It is not about taking a side, shouting slogans and generating more noise, it is about taking a step back, shutting up and observing what is happening.
Instead of promoting division, this site is about unity through the understanding of universal truths.
2018 marked the tenth year of existence of The Vigilant Citizen and, throughout this decade, I’ve been highlighting a clear pattern of elite programming.
In the past decade, we’ve seen a growing number of people actively seeking the truth and questioning mass media programming. This powerful movement of truth seekers has rejected the toxicity and the depravity of the elite and has reconnected with the good, pure and essential things in life.
Of course, the elite does not want to see this happening. This is why their propaganda is getting desperate.
This is why they are bombarding us with weaponized noise. And this is why they are actively attacking and censoring those who expose the truth.
While mass media has always been tightly controlled, the internet allows the free circulation of information. And they want this to stop.
Staying Strong in 2019
Big tech companies have been hard at work purging the internet from content that goes against the elite’s agenda through various means: Reduced social media exposure, removal from search engine results and demonization.
This site has suffered from all of these things. However, it remains alive through adaptation to a hostile environment.
One thing that I had to realize is that relying on big tech companies for exposure and revenue was a big mistake. For this reason, I undertook several steps toward complete independence.
One of these steps was creating a Patreon page where VC readers can contribute a small amount per month to help the site cover costs and fund new content. Many good sites and good people have disappeared from the internet and I won’t allow The Vigilant Citizen to go away. Not on my watch.
To the current VC patrons, I’d like to extend a big thank you for your support and your generosity this year. You are the backbone of this site and your contribution allows me to keep publishing articles about issues that very few dare writing about. Each new patron is a step towards independence and towards a site that is totally ad-free.
While I’m at it, I’d also like to thank everybody who contributed to this site in other ways:
Thank you to those who enrich articles with their enlightening comments; Thank you to those who share articles on social media to help spread the word; Thank you to those who send in messages with tips, symbolic pics and helpful information; Thank you to those who participate in the VC Forums. You’re all greatly appreciated.
Throughout this year, a variety of topics were discussed on this site and many of them were rather disturbing. While I realize that this stuff can generate a sense of dread and disgust, I find it crucial to fully expose it.
Why? Because it is right there in our collective faces. This site is about mass media and super-viral videos, not obscure stuff. And lots of it is directed at young people.
That being said, that doesn’t mean that we need to wallow in their filth. Once their sickness is identified, the next step is to move towards mental, physical and spiritual health. And what better time than the holiday season to go into full healing mode?
What better time to completely cut the noise and enjoy the silence of nature? What better time to purge hate and replace it with love towards friends, family, and community?
What better time to do things that makes us a better person, in all ways possible? Because, in the end, that’s what being a vigilant citizen is all about. Merry Christmas, happy new year and see you in 2019!
Faking Medical Reality December 31 2018 | From: JonRappoport “It is simply no longer possible to believe much of the clinical research that is published, or to rely on the judgment of trusted physicians or authoritative medical guidelines. I take no pleasure in this conclusion, which I reached slowly and reluctantly over my two decades as an editor of The New England Journal of Medicine.” - Marcia Angell, MD
“The secret of acting is sincerity. If you can fake that, you’ve got it made.” - George Burns
The faking of medical reality is, at bottom, an operation designed to bolster the power of the medical cartel, one of the most important forces on the planet.
What do doctors rely on? What do medical schools rely on? What do medical journals and mainstream medical reporters and drug companies and the FDA rely on?
The sanctity of published clinical trials of drugs. These trials determine whether the drugs are safe and effective. The drugs are tested on human volunteers. The results are tabulated. The trial is described in a paper that is printed by a medical journal.
This is science. This is rationality. This is the rock. Without these studies, the whole field of medical research would fall apart in utter chaos.
Upon this rock, and hence through media, the public becomes aware of the latest breakthrough, the newest medicine.
Through doctors in their offices, the public finds out what drugs they should take - and their doctors know because their doctors have read the published reports in the medical journals, the reports that describe the clinical trials.
Or if the doctors haven’t actually read the reports, they’ve been told about them.
It all goes back to this rock.
And when mainstream advocates attack so-called alternative or natural health, they tend to mention that their own sacred profession is based on real science, on studies, on clinical trials.
One doctor told me, “The clinical trials and published studies are what keep us from going back to the Stone Age.”
So now let me quote an article in the NY Review of Books (May 12, 2011) by Helen Epstein, “Flu Warning: Beware the Drug Companies.”
“Six years ago, John Ioannidis, a professor of epidemiology at the University of Ioannina School of Medicine in Greece, found that nearly half of published articles in scientific journals contained findings that were false, in the sense that independent researchers couldn’t replicate them.
The problem is particularly widespread in medical research, where peer-reviewed articles in medical journals can be crucial in influencing multimillion- and sometimes multibillion-dollar spending decisions.
It would be surprising if conflicts of interest did not sometimes compromise editorial neutrality, and in the case of medical research, the sources of bias are obvious.
Most medical journals receive half or more of their income from pharmaceutical company advertising and reprint orders, and dozens of others [journals] are owned by companies like Wolters Kluwer, a medical publisher that also provides marketing services to the pharmaceutical industry.”
“The FDA also relies increasingly upon fees and other payments from the pharmaceutical companies whose products the agency is supposed to regulate.
This could contribute to the growing number of scandals in which the dangers of widely prescribed drugs have been discovered too late. Last year, GlaxoSmithKline’s diabetes drug Avandia was linked to thousands of heart attacks, and earlier in the decade, the company’s antidepressant Paxil was discovered to exacerbate the risk of suicide in young people.
Merck’s painkiller Vioxx was also linked to thousands of heart disease deaths. In each case, the scientific literature gave little hint of these dangers.
The companies have agreed to pay settlements in class action lawsuits amounting to far less than the profits the drugs earned on the market.
These precedents could be creating incentives for reduced vigilance concerning the side effects of prescription drugs in general.”
Also from the NY Review of Books, here are two quotes from Marcia Angell, former editor-in-chief of The New England Journal of Medicine, perhaps the most prestigious medical journal in the world. (“Drug Companies and Doctors: A Story of Corruption”)
“Consider the clinical trials by which drugs are tested in human subjects.
Before a new drug can enter the market, its manufacturer must sponsor clinical trials to show the Food and Drug Administration that the drug is safe and effective, usually as compared with a placebo or dummy pill.
The results of all the trials (there may be many) are submitted to the FDA, and if one or two trials are positive - that is, they show effectiveness without serious risk - the drug is usually approved, even if all the other trials are negative.”
“In view of this control and the conflicts of interest that permeate the enterprise, it is not surprising that [drug] industry-sponsored trials published in medical journals consistently favor sponsors’ drugs - largely because negative results are not published, positive results are repeated in slightly different forms, and a positive spin is put on even negative results.
A review of seventy-four clinical trials of antidepressants, for example, found that thirty-seven of thirty-eight positive studies were published.
But of the thirty-six negative studies, thirty-three were either not published or published in a form that conveyed a positive outcome.”
It turns out that the source of the informational pipeline that feeds the entire perception of pharmaceutical medicine is a rank fraud.
It would be on the order of an intelligence agency discovering that the majority of its operatives were actually working for the other side.
And then continuing on with business as usual.
Sometimes the body is dead even though it keeps on walking. It can smile and nod and perform basic functions - a zombie - but it is doing so only because certain implacable criminals back it up and give it a machine-like force.
Starfield concludes that 225,000 people are killed by the medical system in the US every year - 106,000 by FDA-approved medicines. That latter figure would work out to over a MILLION deaths per decade.
A Final Note: The august editors of medical journals have a game they can play. Suppose a drug company has just finished writing up the results of a clinical drug trial and has submitted the piece to a journal for publication.
The editor knows the company carried out a half-dozen other such trials on the same drug…and they didn’t look good. The drug caused wild fluctuations in blood pressure and blood sugar.
There were heart attacks. Strokes. But this ONE study, the one submitted for publication, looks very positive.
The editor knows if he prints it and forgets about “ethics,” the drug company will order re-prints of the piece from him and distribute them to doctors all over the world, and to reporters, professors, government officials.
The drug company will order and pay for so many re-prints, the medical journal can make $700,000 from publishing THAT ONE STUDY. Let’s see.
In one hand, the editor sees: I won’t publish it = no money. In the other hand, he sees: I’ll publish it=$700,000. What to do?
Faking Medical Reality
Here is yet another way to do medical studies that guarantee a waterfall of lies will spread out far and wide. Another way to make the studies look good when they aren’t.
Let’s say you went into a school to see if it was a good place for your child to acquire a real education. And you were shown overall performance records of the students on standardized tests, and these records looked quite impressive.
Upon inquiring a little further, though, you came across an interesting point. The head of the school believed that some students just didn’t perform well on tests - and so he had excused them from taking any exams.
The World Health Organization (WHO) was founded with the aim of building a healthier future for people all over the world. Whether it’s the effects of smoking, the Swine flu pandemic or a nuclear disaster, the WHO is the body we rely on to advise on and resolve a public health crisis.
But can it be trusted?
Trust Who documents filmmaker Lilian Franck’s quest to discover what lies behind the altruistic façade of the world’s largest public health body. What she uncovers is an alarming picture of corruption and opacity.
This powerful investigative doc shines a light on how industry lobbies have infiltrated the WHO and asks whether the organisation can be trusted to keep the public healthy.
Shocked, you said to him, “Your performance records are a sham. They don’t reflect the truth. You’ve stacked the deck.”
And he replied, “Not at all. I’ve merely kept statistics on those pupils who have the ability to take tests. That’s the important population. The others shouldn’t be tested at all. In this venue, they don’t count.”
Keep that analogy in mind as we proceed.
I want to alert you to a staggering medical practice in clinical trials of psychiatric drugs.
It’s called “placebo washout.”
Basically, it works this way. Before a drug company starts to test the effectiveness of a new medicine they want to market, they bring together all the volunteers - and they give them a sugar pill.
They tell them, “We’re going to give you a sugar pill.”
After a ten-day period on the placebo, the researchers weed out the people who improved, got better, feel better. They dump them from the ensuing clinical trial. Bye bye.
They don’t want these people around for the real clinical trial that is to follow.
Of course, they claim there are good reasons for this washout strategy. But the fact is, eliminating these volunteers from the study makes it far more likely that the drug being tested will look good, when it shouldn’t.
It’s real. They give everybody a sugar pill, and then they dismiss all those who got better on it.
Then they get down to the actual clinical trial. They divide the remaining volunteers into two groups. Those who will receive the drug, and those who will be given another placebo.
Nobody is told which group they’re going to be in. That’s the whole point. Blinding the study enables researchers to compare the number of people who get better on the drug with those who get better on the placebo.
You see, it’s common knowledge that some people will get better on anything. That’s why they form the two groups. They have to prove (to the FDA) the drug is performing better than the sugar pill.
General estimates vary on what percentage of people get better on placebos. 35-45%, some researchers say, is a rule of thumb. Sometimes the % is higher.
But wait! The researchers ALREADY kicked out the people who got better on the sugar pill during the 10-day preliminary washout!
Well, in the actual clinical trial, where half the people get the placebo and half get the medicine, some people who get the placebo - armed with the hope that they might be getting the medicine - will feel better, even though they’re only swallowing sugar pills.
And the researchers must show that more people who are getting the drug are feeling better than those who are getting the placebo.
That’s the whole reason for this type of clinical trial.
“See, 47 people who took the drug feel better. And only 22 people who took the sugar pill feel better. Therefore, the drug really works.”
Sure it works. Because you already kicked out all the people who felt better on a placebo in the washout phase.
In effect, you did a screening. You “cut out the competition.”
It’s like saying, “We have a great runner on our team. His times in the 100-meter dash are exceptional…there’s only one thing. In track meets, we insist he run only 80 meters and you have to imagine it’s 100.”
The FDA, which approves all drugs for public use, knows all about the placebo washout con job. Researchers know this. Shrinks know this. Drug companies know this. Even some medical reporters know this.
And yet, the practice goes on.
Placebo washout is on the order of saying, “Yes, we tested the new plane and it performs magnificently. Of course, we didn’t put it into the air. We rolled it across the runway.”
If there are any psychiatrists out there who are reading this, any researchers who want to defend placebo washout, I suggest we set up a debate with Dr. Peter Breggin, psychiatrist and author. But I warn you. Buckle up. It’ll be a bumpy ride.
Placebo washout. Rigging the game. Stacking the deck. The bigger the lie and the more obvious it is, the harder it is to believe that’s what’s you’re looking at. Until you LOOK.
In my 30 years as a reporter, I’ve come across maybe 100 scandals that could cause a significant sector of the medical cartel to burst into flames and blow away in the wind. This is one of those.
Of course, media, government, and drug corporations make sure such a thing never happens. And when I say media, I’m including publications you’d think would love to watch a really good fire. Turns out they have no stomach for it.
NOTE: In case you’re still a little shaky on this scam, let me lay it out this way:
A drug company has a new drug, Gx, for depression. It’s not on the market yet. For that they need FDA approval, and the approval rests on the results of a clinical trial the company is going to launch.
The company signs up 500 volunteers, all of whom meet mainstream criteria for a diagnosis of clinical depression.
The company brings together the 500 volunteers and administers them a sugar pill (placebo) for 10 days. Everybody knows it’s a sugar pill.
After 10 days, the company discovers which of the 500 people responded well to the pill: placebo effect. Let’s say 80 people did. They feel better. Boom. They’re dumped from further consideration. They’re gone.
Why? Because chances are very good that, were they allowed on to the next phase, those among them who ended up with the sugar pill would have said, “Wow, I feel better. I feel less depressed.”
And THAT means the people who were given the actual drug, Gx, would be “up against stiffer competition” from the group who took the placebo.
After those 80 people were booted from the placebo washout phase, with 420 volunteers left, they were divided into 2 groups of 210 each, and then 210 got the drug, Gx, and 210 got a sugar pill.
None of the volunteers knows what they’re getting. This phase of the trial goes on for 6 weeks. At the end of that period, the study is “unblinded,” and everyone knows who got which pill.
Now, among the placebo group of 210, it turns out that 60 showed significant improvement, and among the group of 210 who got Gx, 85 showed improvement.
The researchers conclude, “Those on Gx performed significantly better than those on placebo. This drug is good.”
But had those original 80, who were kicked to the side of the road after the placebo washout phase, been included in this later phase, the conclusions of the researchers could have turned out quite badly for the drug and the drug company.
Gx could have performed no better than the sugar pill. It could have done worse.
The Luciferian Vatican Empire Is Imploding & As Many As 8 Million Children Are Kidnapped And Trafficked Into Sex Slavery Every Year By Global Pedophile Networks – Of Which Many Politicians Are Members December 30 2018 | From: Geopolitics / NaturalNews / Various
The Pennsylvania attorney general has disclosed that the Vatican hierarchy is fully into the massive cover-up of dozens of sex crimes against over 1,000 children in dioceses within that State alone. But as despicable as it is, this is just one of many unfavorable disclosures made against the Vatican.
According Pennsylvania AG Shapiro, some priests even maintain archives of their pedophilic exploits which the Vatican hierarchy is fully aware of.
“There are specific examples where when the abuse occurred, the priests would go, the bishops would go and lie to parishioners, lie to law enforcement, lie to the public, but then document all the abuse in secret archives that they would share oftentimes with the Vatican,” Shapiro said, noting that the papers show that the Vatican was not only aware of the wrongdoings of the Pennsylvania priests but “were involved in cover-up.”
Victim Jim Faluszczcak, of Buffalo, NY, breaks down as Pennsylvania AG Josh Shapiro discusses Grand Jury Report on Child Sex Abuse in Catholic Dioceses in Pennsylvania August 14, 2018
“When asked if the cover-up goes “all the way up to the Pope,” Shapiro shied away from implicating Pope Francis or any of his predecessors in sweeping the potentially bombshell revelations under the rug for over 70 years.
The transgressions were studied in a 900-plus-page report by a grand jury, the redacted version of which was made public by Shapiro on August 14.
The report covers six of the state’s dioceses, while two others were investigated earlier.
So far, authorities have charged two priests named in the report. Shapiro blamed Pennsylvania’s “weak laws” for the lack of more prosecutions – the state’s short statute of limitations prevents the authorities from pursuing charges against dozens of others, he explained.
Additionally, over 100 priests suspected of child abuse and listed in the grand jury report have already died.
Of the two people charged, one is a former priest and a known sexual predator who already pled guilty, and the other will go on trial this fall.”
A series of articles published by the International Tribunal of the Crimes of Church and State detail some of the major offensives against Bergoglio aka Pope Francis.
A European Court has issued a Summary Judgement against twelve accused members of the Ninth Circle sacrificial cult after none of the accused contested the criminal charges brought against them.
“Pope Francis”, Jorge Bergoglio, is named in the August 10 Judgement of the Brussels-based International Common Law Court of Justice, which reads in part;
“By refusing to respond to the Court’s Summons the accused are declaring their implied guilt pro confesso, as if they have confessed to the charges brought against them.
Accordingly, the Judgement requested by the plaintiffs is hereby granted, and all twelve of the accused are declared to be guilty of a monstrous criminal conspiracy to abduct, traffic, ritually torture and murder children.
A Bench Warrant is hereby issued for the immediate arrest and imprisonment of the accused prior to their final sentencing.”
Besides Jorge Bergoglio, the convicted cult members include Irish Catholic Cardinal Sean Brady and Archbishop Diarmuid Martin, Vatican Secretary of State Pietro Parolin, prominent European politicians and businessmen, and two top officials of the World Council of Churches, including Anglican Bishop Mark MacDonald of Canada. (For a complete list of the guilty see the July 12, 2018 posting at www.itccs.org )
The decision of the Court, which successfully convicted and deposed former Pope Benedict of crimes against humanity in February, 2013, has sent immediate shock waves through the Vatican.
A source within the Curia, the Roman College of Cardinals, claims that Cardinal Francis Arinze of Nigeria is now the front runner candidate in an impending “palace coup” that will remove Pope Francis/Jorge Bergoglio in the coming weeks, despite the upcoming papal visit to Ireland on August 25.
The Last Naked Emperor: What’s Really Behind Pope Francis’ Irish Road Show
"When facing imminent defeat, a Prince must present a public face of confidence and appear to be powerful in order to assure his wavering subjects and confound the hopes of his adversaries." - Nicolo Machiavelli, The Prince
A TRINITY OF CHILD KILLERS: Ninth Circle cult members Jorge Bergoglio (left) and World Council of Churches officials Olav Fykse Tveit and Anglican Bishop Mark MacDonald of Canada
"I pray every day for Bergoglio to die. He is the greatest threat to the Church in its history." – Catholic Cardinal Raymond Burke to fellow Knights of Malta members, October 2017
"After he came to office, Pope Francis realized how much he needed the Vatican money men to sustain his controversial rule.
So he feigned an inquiry into the IOR (Vatican Bank) to conceal the extent of its looting and protect the usual gang of thieves under a smokescreen of liberal rhetoric.
But the looting is massive. Even the Russian oligarchs have used the IOR to hide the billions they stole from their country. From Vladimir Putin on down, lots of people justifiably want Francis taken out." – Italian journalist to the author, June 19, 2018
Like a mythic curse, a violent madness has descended on my homeland. From the village of Knock to Dublin’s sprawl along the Liffey, Ireland is being militarized and regimented as if the civil war has returned.
More than a thousand poor families and their children have been shoved into police prisons, roadways are being cordoned off and homes are being searched by the Gardai, and a “terrorist watch” network is harrassing suspected dissenters.
Why? Apparently because a convicted criminal who thinks he is a god came to town, at a cost to an already-impoverished country of 32 million Euros. But the reason for the madness runs deeper.
The Pope Francis Road Show arrived in Ireland on August 25, with all the usual media-contrived gloss and fake ecstasy of any Vatican carnival routine. But even church commentators agree that this latest papal visit was unusual by the degree of security and sheer armed might that will surround Jorge Bergoglio.
As a particularly obtuse cleric in Kerry remarked to a reporter last week; “Why would a pope require such protection from his own people?”
Well saints preserve us, numb nuts! Maybe massive criminality and institutionalized child torture has something to do with it! Or how about that mass grave of dismembered baby corpses in Tuam, Ireland, concealed by a direct order from Jorge Bergoglio himself?
But leaving crimes against the innocent aside, as we usually do, there is the little matter that the Church of Rome is collapsing from within, especially and ironically in its traditionally most “devout” regions.
We saw that displayed dramatically in Chile last year when twenty two catholic churches were burned to the ground and protesters besieged Pope Francis in Santiago.
Ireland, another third world economic basket case, is as riddled with discontent towards Rome as is Chile. One Dublin commentator told me recently; “All them cops around the pope will be shielding him from the worshipers, not the protesters. Lots of catholics despise the guy.”
One of the top despisers is Cardinal Raymond Burke from America, the Knight of Malta who has said openly that he wants Pope Francis to die. Burke heads the Dump Bergoglio faction in the Roman Curia that is angling to have Cardinal Francis Arinze of Nigeria, or a similar conservative, named as the new Pontiff once Bergoglio is forced out.
This faction is guided not so secretly by the convicted felon former Pope Benedict, Joe Ratzinger, still hiding out in the Vatican ever since we forced him there in February 2013.
Church insiders tell us that Ratzinger is not acting alone but has Russian backing, since Vladimir Putin wants among other things all of his country’s looted currency returned from the cellars of the Vatican Bank. Ratzinger will so oblige the Russkies in return for their help in winning him back the papal tiara.
Ah, the oldest game in history: the tangled web of Vatican corruption. And of course there’s more. Encouraged by our common law prosecutions and attempted arrest of Jorge Bergoglio in Geneva on June 21 of this year, human rights lawyers in America, Argentina and Spain are now seeking a new international arrest warrant against him that they feel can only succeed once he is removed from office.
Bergoglio’s Dirty War association with the Argentine military junta, his membership in the child-killing Ninth Circle cult, his alienation of traditional Cardinals and his kowtowing to Vatican Bank mobsters have all combined to unite his many enemies into the common cause of removing him. Hence the armed camp around him.
Back in the fifteenth century, Nicolo Machiavelli made a good living out of advising popes. His chief remedy for a Pontiff under seige was to generate the kind of permanent appearance of confidence and humilty that Jesuit-trained Jorge Bergoglio is so adept at feigning.
But Machiavelli was ultimately a realist, as is a political survivor like Bergoglio. The latter knows only too well that in a time of crisis even the smallest threat can undo the most powerful ruler: including the threat of an idea.
And the idea that 'We the People' have the power and obligation to be the law and arrest those who are killing our children has mushroomed and taken hold across our world: including in Ireland.
It is that idea, so fatal to any tyrant, that must in the latter’s mind be stamped out, either by guile or terror. And Jorge Bergoglio is an expert at both.
Bergoglio does have a talent for speaking the right line for the right audience, so much so that you will start to think that he’s agreeing with you.
But this is what Jesuits do when they’re dragged into a corner.
There’s no form of Vatican apology that will assure us that all of this will never happen again. They should all be hanged in the nearest lamppost, or better be locked inside a nuclear reactor, so that nothing of their remains shall ever come back to haunt us in the future.
It’s only a matter of time when the majority of the population will finally understand the hypnotic rituals they were subjected to by the Black Army of the Luciferian Vatican Empire, which has the full control of the competing media networks, opposing political parties, fiat financial system, and the entire school indoctrination system, that should lead to the achievement of real freedom in a planet of unfettered abundance for all.
As Many As 8 Million Children Are Kidnapped And Trafficked Into Sex Slavery Every Year By Global Pedophile Networks – Of Which Many Politicians Are Members
According to official statistics that you’ll never hear reported by the mainstream media, as many as 800,000 children in the United States, and eight million children globally, are being kidnapped and trafficked into sex slavery every single year as part of a massive pedophilia network that spans the entire world.
And though it might not be comfortable to think about, many high-level politicians on both sides of aisle actively participate in, and partake of, this unimaginable evil.
Earlier this year, The International Tribunal for Natural Justice (ITNJ) met for three days to launch its Judicial Commission of Inquiry into Human Trafficking and Child Sex Abuse, the purpose of which is to investigate and bring to the forefront this prolific scourge of child sex abuse all around the world, much of it satanically ritualistic in nature.
One of the speakers at this event was Chief Counsel Robert David Steele, a former CIA officer who opened the Plenary Session of this first Judicial Commission of the Tribunal.
He spoke about how child torture, child murder, and child organ harvesting are now “accepted” practice within the highest levels of government all across the globe, as well as within non-governmental organizations (NGOs), multinational corporations, academia, and “civil” society.
“This scourge persists because it is allowed to exist by the complicit authorities,” Steele stated during his roughly 13-minute speech, which you can watch below:
High-Level Pedophiles Perform Ritual Satanic Abuse Involving the Torture and Murder of Infants in Order to Produce “Adrenalized Blood” that they Consume for Energy
Steele says he’s convinced that most of the organizations and institutions that facilitate these sex crimes against children started out with “the best of intentions,” but were eventually infiltrated by pedophiles who transformed them into something else. Regardless, such crimes are taking place every single day, often by people who are presented to the public as “authorities” and “civil servants.”
And it’s not just that these wicked abominations are abducting innocent children in order to have sex with them. In many cases, there’s ritual satanic abuse taking place in which children are purposely traumatized before being murdered, allowing satanic pedophiles to drink their blood and eat their flesh like vampires.
“It appears that pedopredation – including the attendant torture and murder of infants to produce adrenalized blood via ritual Satanic abuse – is in some cases considered an elite ‘privilege’ whereupon these echelons are permitted to practice such perversity with impunity,” Steele explained during his speech, pointing out that it’s the people we see every day on television, in movies, and in government buildings who are engaging this these unspeakable evils.
Why this is so important to bring to the public’s attention is that pedophilia is a type of “initiation rite,” according to Steele, to draw new members into the “deep state” and “shadow government.”
High-level government officials who participate in pedophilia activities such as those previously mentioned quickly become puppets who are fully controlled by their invisible overlords, which use the deviant activities of their puppets as blackmail in order to fulfill various other evil agendas.
“The center of gravity for taking down the deep state, pedophilia is both the induction glue, pedophilia is how the deep state recruits and controls people,” is how Steele concluded his speech.
“It is also the Achilles heel of the deep state.”
Be sure to read the full report by Health Impact News about all of this, which contains other powerful interviews by other whistleblower folks who were sex slaves themselves.
Why Confronting Israel Is Important: The Jewish State Is No Friend December 29 2018 | From: Unz / OccupationMovie / Various
I am often asked why I have this “thing” about Israel, with friends suggesting that I would be much more respected as a pundit if I were to instead concentrate on national security and political corruption.
The problem with that formulation is that the so-called “special relationship” with Israel is itself the result of terrible national security and foreign policy choices that is sustained by pervasive political and media corruption, so any honest attempt to examine the one inevitably leads to the other.
Most talking heads in the media avoid that dilemma by choosing to completely ignore the dark side of Israel.
Israel - not Russia - is the one foreign country that can interfere with impunity with the political processes in the United States yet it is immune from criticism.
It is also the single most significant threat to genuine national security as it and its powerful domestic lobby have been major advocates for the continuation of America’s interventionist warfare state.
The decision to go to war on false pretenses against Iraq, largely promoted by a cabal of prominent American Jews in the Pentagon and in the media, killed 4,424 Americans as well as hundreds of thousands Iraqis and will wind up costing the American taxpayer $7 trillion dollars when all the bills are paid.
That same group of mostly Jewish neocons more-or-less is now agitating to go to war with Iran using a game plan for escalation prepared by Israel which will, if anything, prove even more catastrophic.
And I can go on from there. According to the FBI, Israel runs the most aggressive spying operations against the U.S. among ostensibly “friendly” nations, frequently stealing our military technology for resale by its own arms merchants.
Its notable successes in espionage have included the most devastating spy in U.S. history Jonathan Pollard, while it has also penetrated American communications systems and illegally obtained both the fuel and the triggers for its own secret nuclear weapons arsenal.
Israel cares little for American sovereignty. It’s prime ministers Ariel Sharon and Benjamin Netanyahu have both boasted how they control the United States. In 2001, Israel was running a massive secret spying operation directed against Arabs in the U.S.
Many in the intelligence and law enforcement communities suspect that it had considerable prior intelligence regarding the 9/11 plot but did not share it with Washington.
There was the spectacle of the “dancing Shlomos,” Israeli “movers” from a company in New Jersey who apparently had advanced knowledge of the terrorist attack and danced and celebrated as they watched the Twin Towers go down.
Jewish power, both in terms of money and of access to people and mechanisms that really matter, is what allows Israel to act with impunity, making the United States both poorer and more insecure.
A well-funded massive lobbying effort involving hundreds of groups and thousands of individuals in the U.S. has worked to the detriment of actual American interests, in part by creating a permanent annual gift of billions of dollars to Israel for no other reason but that it is Israel and can get anything it wants from a servile Congress and White House without any objection from a controlled media.
Israel has also obtained carte blanche political protection from the U.S. in fora like the United Nations, which is damaging to America’s reputation and its actual interests.
This protection now extends to the basing of U.S. troops in Israel to serve as a tripwire, guaranteeing that Washington will become involved if Israel is ever attacked or even if Israel itself starts a war.
The current U.S. Ambassador to the U.N. Nikki Haley is little more than a shill for Israel while America’s Ambassador in Israel David Friedman is an open supporter of Israel’s illegal settlements, which the U.S. opposes, who spends much of his time defending Israeli war crimes.
And here on the home front Israel is doing damage that might be viewed as even more grave in Senator Ben Cardin’s attempt to destroy First Amendment rights by making any criticism of Israel illegal.
The non-violent Israel Boycott movement (BDS) has already been sanctioned in many states, the result of intensive and successful lobbying by the Israeli government and its powerful friends.
So if there is a real enemy of the United States in terms of the actual damage being inflicted by a foreign power, it is Israel.
In the recent Russiagate investigations it was revealed that it was Israel, not Russia, that sought favors from Michael Flynn and the incoming Trump Administration yet Special Counsel Robert Mueller has evidently not chosen to go down that road with his investigations, which should surprise no one.
Noam Chomsky, iconic progressive intellectual, has finally come around on the issue of Israel and what it means. He has always argued somewhat incoherently that Israeli misbehavior has been due to its role as a tool of American imperialism and capitalism.
At age 89, he has finally figured out that it is actually all about what a parasitic Israel wants without any regard for its American host, observing on “Democracy Now” that:
“Take, say, the huge issue of interference in our pristine elections. Did the Russians interfere in our elections? An issue of overwhelming concern in the media. I mean, in most of the world, that’s almost a joke.
First of all, if you’re interested in foreign interference in our elections, whatever the Russians may have done barely counts or weighs in the balance as compared with what another state does, openly, brazenly and with enormous support.
Israeli intervention in U.S. elections vastly overwhelms anything the Russians may have done…
I mean, even to the point where the prime minister of Israel, Netanyahu, goes directly to Congress, without even informing the president, and speaks to Congress, with overwhelming applause, to try to undermine the president’s policies – what happened with Obama and Netanyahu in 2015.”
Politicians are terrified of crossing the Jewish lobby by saying anything negative about Israel, which means that Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu always gets a pass from the American government, even when he starves civilians and bombs hospitals and schools.
Netanyahu uses snipers to shoot dead scores of unarmed demonstrators and the snipers themselves joke about their kills without a peep from Washington, which styles itself the “leader of the free world.”
Just recently, Israel has declared itself a Jewish State with all that implies.
To be sure, Israeli Christians and Muslims were already subject to a battery of laws and regulations that empowered Jews at their expense but now it is the guiding principle that Israel will be run for the benefit of Jews and Jews alone. And it still likes to call itself a “democracy.”
A recent television program illustrates just how far the subjugation of America’s elected leaders by Israel has gone. British comedian Sacha Baron Cohen is featured on a new show called “Who is America?” in which he uses disguises and aliases to engage politicians and other luminaries in unscripted interviews that reveal just how ignorant or mendacious they actually are.
Several recent episodes remind one of a February 2013 Saturday Night Live skit on the impending confirmation of Chuck Hagel as Secretary of Defense. A Senator asks Hagel. “It is vital to Israel’s security for you to go on national television and perform oral sex on a donkey… Would you do THAT for Israel?”
A “yes” answer was, of course, expected from Hagel. The skit was never aired after objections from the usual suspects.
Baron Cohen, who confronted several GOP notables in the guise of Colonel Erran Morad, an Israeli security specialist, provided a number of clues that his interview was a sham but none of the victims were smart enough to pick up on them.
Cohen, wearing an Israeli military uniform and calling himself a colonel, clearly displayed sergeant’s stripes. Hinting that he might actually be a Mossad agent, Cohen also sported a T-shirt on which the Hebrew text was printed backwards and he claimed that the Israeli spy agency’s motto was “if you want to win, show some skin.”
Cohen set up Dick Cheney by complimenting him on being the “the king of terrorist killers” before commenting that “my neighbor in Tel Aviv is in jail for murder, or, as we call it, enhanced tickling.”
Morad went on to tell Cheney that he once waterboarded his wife to check for infidelity and then convinced the former Vice President to sign a “waterboarding kit” that “already had” the signatures of Benjamin Netanyahu, Ariel Sharon and Demi Lovato.
Another more spectacular sketch included a Georgia state senator Jason Spencer who was convinced to shout out the n-word as part of an alleged video being made to fight terrorism.
After Cohen told Spencer that it was necessary to incite fear in homophobic jihadists, Spencer dropped his pants and underwear, before backing up with his exposed rear end while shouting “USA!” and “America!”
Spencer also spoke with a phony Asian accent while simulating using a selfie-stick to secretly insert a camera phone inside a Muslim woman’s burqa.
In another series of encounters, Cohen as Morad managed to convince current and ex-Republican members of Congress - to include former Senate majority leader Trent Lott - to endorse a fictional Israeli program to arm grade school children for self-defense.
Cohen’s footage included a former Illinois congressman and talk radio host named Joe Walsh saying: “The intensive three-week ‘Kinderguardian’ course introduces specially selected children from 12 to 4 years old to pistols, rifles, semiautomatics and a rudimentary knowledge of mortars. In less than a month - less than a month - a first-grader can become a first grenade-er.”
Both controversial Alabama judge Roy Moore and Walsh were fooled into meeting Cohen to attend a non-existent pro-Israel conference to accept an award for “significant contributions to the state of Israel.”
Representative Dana Rohrabacher, meanwhile, also was interviewed and he commented that, “Maybe having young people trained and understand how to defend themselves and their school might actually make us safer here.”
And Congressman Joe Wilson observed that “A 3-year-old cannot defend itself from an assault rifle by throwing a ‘Hello Kitty’ pencil case at it.”
Cohen’s performance is instructive. A man shows up in Israeli uniform, claims to be a terrorism expert or even a Mossad agent, and he gains access to powerful Americans who are willing to do anything he says.
How Cohen did it says a lot about the reflexive and completely uncritical support for Israel that many American politicians - particularly Republicans - now embrace.
This, in a nutshell, is the damage that Israel and its Lobby have done to the United States.
Israel is always right for many policymakers and even palpably phony Jews like Colonel Morad are instantly perceived as smarter than the rest of us so we’d better do what they say.
That kind of thinking has brought us Iraq, Libya, Syria and the possibility of something far worse with Iran.
Israel routinely interferes in American politics and corrupts our institutions without any cost to itself and that is why I write and speak frequently regarding the danger to our Republic that it poses.
It is past time to change the essentially phony narrative. Israel is nothing but trouble. It has the right to defend itself and protect its interests but that should not involve the United States.
One can only hope that eventually a majority of my fellow American citizens will also figure things out.
It might take a while, but the ruthless way Israel openly operates with no concern for anyone but itself provides a measure of optimism that that day is surely coming.
New Zealand Passes Laws To Make Medical Marijuana Widely Available + Cannabis Is A Revolutionary, Healing Plant December 28 2018 | From: TheGuardian / NaturalNews / Various
Legislation comes ahead of a referendum on recreational marijuana use in next two years.
The legislation will also allow terminally ill patients to smoke illegal pot without fear of prosecution
New Zealand’s government has passed a law that will make medical marijuana widely available for thousands of patients over time, after years of campaigning by chronically ill New Zealanders who say the drug is the only thing that eases their pain. Related:Law Changes May Triple Hemp Plantings
The legislation will also allow terminally ill patients to begin smoking illegal pot immediately without facing the possibility of prosecution.
The health minister, David Clarke, said thousands of New Zealanders were living with chronic and end-of-life pain and the evidence that marijuana could safely help ease their suffering was sound.
The law would also pave the way for New Zealand companies to manufacture medicinal cannabis products for both the local and international market, an industry which is being touted as a potential game-changer for deprived Māori communities on the east coast of the North Island, who hope to turn the thriving illegal industry into a thriving legal one.
“People nearing the end of their lives should not have to worry about being arrested or imprisoned for trying to manage their pain,” Clarke said.
“This is compassionate and caring legislation that will make a real difference to people … they can use illicit cannabis without fear of prosecution.”
A Life of Its Own aims to provide clarity and understanding of one of Australia’s most stigmatized and controversial issues – medicinal cannabis.
Award-winning journalist, Helen Kapalos, takes the audience on a wide-ranging voyage of discovery about medicinal cannabis, addressing the complex issues facing its use.
The film was inspired during the making of a network news TV story which detailed a young man's difficult decision to use cannabis for his terminal illness and to ease the debilitating nausea he experienced following chemotherapy – made all the more poignant because the young man’s father served for decades as a drug-squad police chief.
In the weeks after the story was aired thousands of people came forward speaking of their own experience with medicinal cannabis. The story had unwittingly unearthed a silent majority - personal stories of patients suffering a range of illnesses, from intractable epilepsy to rare genetic diseases.
Against the anecdotal evidence of benefits, the film discusses the lack of clinical evidence, the limitations of present drug regulation, the rise of a black market in medicinal cannabis, and the ongoing social stigma.
The testimony of medical professionals, scientists, lawyers and politicians brings a balance to the debate. Of particular impact is a rare insight into the medicinal cannabis research being carried out in Israel.
This country is now recognized as a world leader in the development of specialized strains of medicinal cannabis, and their use in the treatment of a wide range of maladies.
Currently the climate around medicinal cannabis is shifting, with Australia moving towards limited reform. A Life of Its Own demonstrates there is still a gap between legislation, and the reality for many people whose lives are affected by the issue.
Around the world the debate is being mobilised by those who've experienced success from the plant as medicine - with calls to make the wider community aware of its therapeutic value.
The measures come ahead of a planned referendum on recreational marijuana use, which the government has pledged to hold within two years, as part of their confidence and supply agreement with coalition partner the Greens.
The new law allows much broader use of medical marijuana, which was previously been highly restricted and subject to approval by the health minister.
The campaign to make marijuana legal applauded the government for passing the legislation within their first year in office.
“New Zealanders will take this as encouragement that we don’t need to be stuck in the past,” said Sandra Murray, campaign manager for the #makeitlegal campaign.
“We are now only two steps behind the rest of the world when it comes to sensible cannabis laws and with the upcoming referendum, we are on track to become an example of how to get it right.”
Marijuana use is common in New Zealand and police largely turn a blind eye to small, recreational use of the drug, with some politicians even admitting to using it in their youth.
The opposition National party said the government had decriminalised cannabis “by stealth”, and slammed the move as “lazy and dangerous”.
“We support medicinal cannabis but strongly oppose the smoking of loose leaf cannabis in public. Smoked loose leaf is not a medicine,” said the Nationals’ spokesperson on health, Shane Reti.
Patients wanting to use marijuana for conditions like chronic pain will have to wait a year until a new set of regulations, licensing rules and quality standards are put in place.
There are many misconceptions about the cannabis plant: The plant’s medicinal uses have been covered up, and our own government suggests that cannabis has no medicinal value. But the truth is that cannabis can do more than just give people a “high.”
Cannabis and hemp offer a wide variety of uses both as medicine, as material and as a path towards healing our planet.
Science continues to demonstrate that the cultivation of hemp and cannabis plants is good for the environment, and studies have consistently confirmed the plant’s medicine uses.
Cannabis Can Heal the Planet
As Derek Henry, founder of Healing The Body, explains in a new video how the cannabis plant has a wide array of industrial uses - and is more eco-friendly than a lot of our more “modern” options.
For example, parts of the plant can be used to make paper, fabric and other goods.
“The soft inner core of the plant stem, also known as the hurd, is used in the production of animal bedding, mulch, chemical absorbent, fiberboard, insulation, and concrete (also known as “hempcrete”).
The bast fiber has been used to make rope, netting, canvas, carpet, biocomposites, non-wovens, clothes, shoes, and bags. Finally, the stalk has been used for biofuel/ethanol, paper products, cardboard, and filters,” Henry explains.
While hemp and cannabis may not be able to replace conventional materials in entirety, in many cases, it presents a more eco-friendly and sustainable option.
Not only do these attributes make cannabis an attractive resource for consumers, the plant’s ability to renew and detoxify soil makes it a great choice for farmers.
As Henry explains, the cannabis plant requires less water than many conventional crops, helps detoxify soil and even prevents soil erosion. More, it doesn’t require pesticides.
As Henry contends, when these benefits are combined with the myriad of uses for cannabis, it’s clear that the plant boasts many environmental benefits.
Cannabis offers benefits both as a medicine and a nutritional supplement. There are a number of ways in which cannabis can be used as medicine.
Some of the plant’s most popular uses include relieving pain (from a number of causes, including arthritis), reducing inflammation in autoimmune diseases, treating headaches and relieving nausea, mitigating depression and anxiety, treating glaucoma and more.
Hibbit turned to cannabis as a last-ditch effort to save his life, after radiation, chemotherapy and surgery failed to stop his cancer. As of 2015, he had a clean bill of health.
The medicinal aspects of cannabis are said to come from its cannabinoid compounds. Tetrahydrocannabinol (THC) and cannabidiol (CBD) are two of the most widely recognized and studied cannabinoids, but there are many others.
But the health benefits of cannabis don’t end with its medicinal capacity. As Henry notes, hemp hearts (or hemp seeds) are an edible part of the plant that offer a host of nutritional benefits.
Hemp seeds are a complete plant protein and contain all the essential amino acids your body needs. Further, the seeds are a good source of essential fatty acids, including omega-3s, vitamins, minerals and fiber.
“As a result of these nutritional assets, hemp seeds can help support the immune system, cardiovascular system, brain function, skin health, and digestive health,” Henry states.
You can learn more about the health benefits of cannabis at CBDS.news.
Mass Arrests Versus Deep State Operatives Imminent & Trump Thinks Americans Will Engage In An Armed Revolt If Deep State Tries To Remove Him From Office December 27 2018 | From: Geopolitics / Infowars / Various
Various events leading to the US President Donald Trump’s decision to withdraw an estimated 2,000 US troops from Syria and at least half of the 14,000 from Afghanistan are creating a very positive picture about the long sought mass arrests of people involved in the systematic destruction of resource rich countries, and the overall deterioration of the quality of life all over the planet.
The rest of these current events are merely smokescreen to “stabilize” the long and precariously untenable situation that the Deep State is in, ever since the internet infrastructure came online.
If one remembers a post to this website that the “intel cowboys” worldwide have integrated their efforts to undermine the abusive Elite’s unwarranted power to subjugate all of humanity, or at least what would remain of it after a Great Holocaust via mass vaccinations and the elaborate poisoning of the food systems, under an AI-based slavery known as the Technocratic dictatorship.
There is now a conclusive body of evidence that Donald Trump was indeed hired by these intelligence cowboys to take on their battle right into the open through the White House, while they remain under the cloak of what is now known as the QAnon revelations, which are now being actively suppressed by tech giant Google and even the Mozilla Foundation[?].
… which plunges everyone there in panic. That was just one of many attempts at starting open WW3 this year alone.
All throughout the early part of Trump’s term in office, he was always fed with false information about chemical attacks in Syria, yet all Trump did was to give instructions to bomb specific targets in the country with the least damage.
Such measures, of course, raised all defense related stocks in various exchanges.
But, for the first time in the US Naval history, all US Aircraft Carriers are now docked at their home ports [here].
Snapshot of the US Aircraft Carriers current location, as of December 19, 2018. Click on the image above to view a larger version in a new window
This runs counter to the constant shadow skirmishes in the South China Sea during the time prior, and into the first few months of the Trump administration.
So, what is really the reason behind the recent Canadian arrest of a Huawei CFO all about?
If we closely examine the Chinese response to the event, they are hitting hard, not on the Americans, but on the Canadian operatives right inside China instead.
And this fiasco was initiated right after Xi Jinping and Donald Trump had a meeting on the sidelines of the G20 Summit 2018 in Argentina.
This was where Macron and his much older wife descended from their plane without the courtesy of a proper welcome except from airport ground crew.
Yes, there’s still the issue of the “Chinese hackers stealing US tech,” but then again, all of these are merely smokescreen as there are no arrests made against these so called hackers.
Not to mention that everyone is continually spying and stealing from everyone else, a standard staple since war was turned into an art form.
Indeed, the ongoing US-China trade war is sending the Deep State global stock markets in tatters.
“As the Dow Jones Industrial Average confronts its ugliest December loss since 1931, the time of the Great Depression, there is another notable way to put the severity of this persistent bout of losses into historical context.
In market lore, October of 1987 is a period that remains infamous. On Oct. 19, the Dow sank 22.6% in a single session, marking its steepest percentage drop ever, with trading during that period under pressure all month until the final crash.
There’s a similar downtrend that is taking hold in December, despite the seasonal tendency for that month to enjoy a pre-Christmas updraft, typically known as a Santa rally, with institutional investors finding the month a good time to buy looking ahead to the new year.
Here’s how the December moves have shaped up:
The S&P 500 has had an average daily move of negative 0.80%
The Dow has had average daily move of negative 0.78, as of 2:30 p.m. ET trade Friday
The Russell 2000 index has had an average daily move of negative 1.05%
For those equity benchmarks, that is the worst performance since that dreaded month more than 30 years ago, based on market levels at 2:30 p.m. Eastern Time.”
Comment:Read about the Alliance that has been working behind
the scenes for decades to take down the 'Cabal' within the work of David Wilcock.
Some of those reading this may be confused because the cabal-controlled mainstream media is doing everything within it's
power to denigrate Trump - as he is part of the effort to take the Illuminati down once and for all.
In that regard, Trump is reportedly contemplating of firing Federal Reserve Chair Powell, another Deep State stooge, for being “too aggressive” in hiking interest rates that are causing the market’s recent slump further.
This is a complex issue for the White House, of course, considering the historical foundation of the entire Western financial system.
Aside from the well-documented historical assets of Indochina being used to constantly prop up the Deep State banking system, the Chinese may be impatiently holding the $1+ trillion bag for the Americans, but it is the Philippines, which is unwittingly foregoing its rightful place in the sun when it lent to the Vatican and the US its historical assets primarily in the form of gold under the threat of force, more than a hundred years ago.
It was too painful indeed for Sec. of DOD Mattis to accede to the instruction of President Trump to finally return the Balangiga Bells where it belongs, and to acknowledge the genocidal action of the US against the inhabitants of Samar Island, Philippines, at the turn of the 20th Century.
One of the Balangiga Bells was rung as a signal for the Philippine patriots to start the ambush against the American occupiers, which led to the latter’s deaths that precipitated in the countermeasure aimed at turning Balangiga, Samar Island into a “howling wilderness.”
The Philippines fought the Americans after the latter immediately assumed occupation of the islands when the Spaniards were losing their battle against local revolutionaries.
Duterte’s specific request for the return of the bells was delivered in his State of the Nation 2017, to the shock of the US Ambassador in attendance.
To see and administer the ending of American occupations worldwide is too much for Mattis to bear.
What’s Behind the Latest Accelerated Scramble for Disclosure and the End of US Hostilities Worldwide?
For almost two years, US President Donald Trump tried to use conventional methods to deal with the Deep State Congress and State Department, but all he got was constant failures and the now infamous Russiagate.
The latest decision for a complete withdrawal from Syria by Trump was brought about by the direct confirmation of Turkey President Erdogan that ISIS is already 99% neutralized, a fact reluctantly admitted to by Bolton, Pompeo, and Mattis - the threesome insisted that US forces still needed to prevent an ISIS resurgence in the region.
It must be said that the US withdrawal from Syria is inevitable due to the US bankruptcy, and obviously was also part of what was agreed upon by Trump and Putin during their “candid and useful” one-on-one meeting in Helsinki last July 16th, 2018.
Another turning point for Trump is the California Wildfire, which was very unique in its speed and coverage, prompting those who have a functioning gray matter to doubt the mainstream narrative of just another proof of “global warming.“
The directed energy weapon’s attack on Paradise, California, is now reported as a desperate Deep State attack on off-world beings, who have been living among us for decades in order to guide humanity in the proper use of nuclear technology, immediately in the aftermath of the last World War where several atomic bombs of increasing intensity were detonated in some Pacific atolls and inland elsewhere.
Trump was made aware of off-world technologies very early on from his own uncle, John George Trump, who was a known physicist in his time.
The National Academy of Engineering described Trump as “a pioneer in the scientific, engineering and medical applications of high voltage machinery”.James Melcher, Trump’s lab director, is quoted as saying:
“John, over a period of three decades, would be approached by people of all sorts because he could make megavolt beams of ions and electrons – death rays. … What did he do with it? Cancer research, sterilizing sludge out in Deer Island [a waste disposal facility], all sorts of wondrous things. He didn’t touch the weapons stuff.”
So, when Trump peppered his inaugural speech with “technologies of tomorrow” he does know what he was talking about.
“We stand at the birth of a new millennium, ready to unlock the mysteries of space, to free the Earth from the miseries of disease, and to harness the energies, industries and technologies of tomorrow."
As for the Russia-US “deteriorating” relationship due to the unilateral abrogation of the INF treaty by the US, it’s just another smokescreen to feed the warmongers and the military industrial complex one last time, before it is transformed into an agent of positive, significantly advanced infrastructure churning out free energy and gravity defying transport systems that will end the petrodollar/perpetual war-based economy.
Deep State Expert: Trump Has All The Goods On Everyone
The US military withdrawal from Syria will turn out to be the watershed event that will pave the way for lasting peace worldwide, where not a single element of the Deep State can have a piece of the action.
The sealed indictment for the month of November alone totaled 5,233, bringing the overall figure to 66,568 between October 30, 2017 and November 30, 2018, according to pacer.gov data.
Trump Thinks Americans Will Engage In An Armed Revolt If Deep State Tries To Remove Him From Office
45 knows the swamp is coming for him and is prepared to fight.
President Trump told a prominent person during a phone call last week that he thinks the American people will revolt if the deep state tries to remove him from office via impeachment or any other method because Americans are “too well armed”.
According to our sources, Trump thinks that Democrats are so intent on stopping America’s recovery that they will set off a destabilizing crisis on the border, an economic collapse or even civil war as a means of ejecting him from the Oval Office.
However, Trump believes that both the U.S. military and the American people would not stand for such a scenario and would rise up against it and that there would be a “revolt” because Americans are “too well armed”.
The phone call was further discussed during a meeting between three people, one of whom was Roger Stone and another being the same person who spoke directly to Trump.
Other prominent individuals close to the president have confirmed that what Trump said during the call was his ongoing state of mind over the past several weeks, if not more, and that the phone call wasn’t unique in that sense.
The conversation was prompted following criticism from some figures on the right that Trump was not following through on his main campaign promises, specifically with regard to the wall.
The comments line up with previous public statements made by Trump about how the American people would respond if he were to be impeached.
“I’m not concerned, no,” the president told Reuters reporters last month during a conversation in the Oval Office. “I think that the people would revolt if that happened.”
A third person who attended the meeting at which the phone call was discussed said he was very fatalistic about the destiny of the Trump presidency and the country.
Alex Jones spoke with all three individuals who attended the meeting over the last few days.
Trump himself is apparently extremely taken aback at the level to which the country has been sold out by embedded groups within the government, particularly with regard to Chinese influence.
The president also now suspects that the Federal Reserve is working with the deep state to plunge the economy as a way of crushing his re-election hopes, if he makes it that far.
However, Trump expressed his confidence that the American people would choose the right side and have his back, which in turn sends a strong message to the establishment forces who are plotting his demise.
When a friend makes a mistake, most people would not immediately call that person a name or tell them that they are useless, but rather would offer support and ideas to help avoid such mistakes in the future.
Yet, when it comes to one’s own mistakes, it’s easier to be an enemy, verbally and mentally flagellating oneself to exhaustion, than it is to become a good friend to yourself.
The person we may find it hardest to be kind and sympathetic to is, surprisingly, ourselves. Yet being a friend to ourselves provides the only viable basis for living an emotionally fulfilled life.
These binding forces are not dependent upon personal knowledge or beliefs. By simply taking the ACTION to perform the ritual, the effects and results are achieved, and therefore the people who performed the ritual are bound to whatever the ritual is designed to do.
Christmas is saturated with occult symbolism linked to dark magic that is designed to bind you to the Christmas contract. This contract is used by the Dark Forces to drain your energy and enslave your soul.
However, when you become aware of it and remove your consent and stop performing the ritual known as Christmas, the magic spells of the Christmas contract cannot harm you anymore. Be aware that magic can be used for good or evil purposes.
If you have a hard time believing that magic is real, read my informative article titled How Words Can Be Used as Magic Spells. This article gives you a short introduction to how magic works. If you plan to celebrate Christmas, it would be wise to mediate before doing so.
During meditation, tell the Universe that you refuse to give your consent to the Dark Forces. Furthermore, tell the Universe that you are getting together on December 25th to spend time with your family and friends, not to celebrate Christmas.
When you say these things, your mind generates energy signatures and then projects them out into the Universe. These energy signatures tell the Dark Forces that you are aware of their Christmas contract and refuse to give them your consent.
If the Dark Forces do not honor your decision and harm you, they would violate your free will and therefore would have to face the consequences for their actions. All thoughts, intentions, and actions are known by the Universe and there is no escaping its laws.
I will be writing my own article about the hidden secrets of Christmas in about a week, so if you are interested in the occult version of Christmas, keep an eye out for it. - PL Chang
Is Christmas really magic mushroom, sun and Saturn worship in disguise?
Christmas has come around again, and as we all scurry about hanging lights and stars everywhere, and adorning our trees with red and white ornaments, how many of us reflect on the occult origins of Christmas? How many of us realize that this merry festival has roots, in fact, in ancient traditions of magic mushrooms, Saturn worship and sun worship?
Jesus again pictured in religious artwork with magic mushrooms [beneath his feet]
Today’s Christmas is truly a hodgepodge of ancient rituals and celebrations, with roots as far back as 4000 years to the Mesopotamians. This is not surprising, for Christianity itself is a borrowed religion, built on top of previous Coptic (Egyptian), Mesopotamian and Babylonian religions.
Christmas really has nothing to do with the alleged historical birthday of a human called Jesus. Let’s take a look at some of the traditions which have formed Christmas, so we can gain a deeper understanding of its symbolism.
The Christmas-Magic Mushroom Connection
John Allegro was a free-thinking Dead Sea Scrolls scholar and archeologist. In 1970 he wrote a fascinating and highly controversial book entitled The Sacred Mushroom and the Cross, whose subtitle was A Study of the Nature and Origins of Christianity within the Fertility Cults of the Ancient Near East. In it he put forth the unique idea that Christianity was an expression of an ancient cult which worshipped sex and mushrooms.
To straight-laced scholars and prim-and-proper Christian apologists, this idea was simply too much for them to contemplate, but Allegro (left) provided an impressive amount of evidence to back his claims.
He showed how the mushroom – specifically the red-and-white magic mushroom Amanita muscaria – came up again and again in Christian art.
He explained how the Eucharist – where Christians believe the bread wafer is transformed into the body of Christ – is a re-enactment of the sacred ceremony of ingesting the flesh of the Amanita magic mushroom.
Allegro argued that the entire story of the Jesus in the Gospels was a code for the ancient journey of conscious self-exploration, the hallucinogenic “trip”.
You can imagine how the majority of people reacted to his “sex-and-mushroom cult” theory in 1970 in England!
Yet his ideas have merit. James Arthur and others after Allegro further developed the idea of the Christmas-magic mushroom connection.
Amanitas are also linked to fertility and sex; they have a sexual appearance, representing both the male and female. At different stages of their growth life cycle, they resemble a phallus, breast and yoni.
It is interesting to note that Jesus pictured in religious artwork with amanita mushrooms around him. Is the red-and-white Santa Claus or St. Nicholas a modern representation of the village shaman who had the knowledge of pharmacopeia? Is the holy grail actually the mature Amanita with its edges curled up?
Is the Amanita magic mushroom the fabled Holy Grail?
Were Amanitas the source of power and insight for the old ruling class of priests? And perhaps most importantly, what part does the Amanita play in humanity’s origins and the extraterrestrial Annunaki who were mining for “gold”? These are interesting questions to ponder as you decorate your tree in red-and-white with mushroom ornaments this year.
Note: Masonic and other insider have stated that the 'Holy Grail' actually has nothing to do with a cup or grail, that it is a veiled reference to the 'Royal Bloodlines'.
The Christmas-Sun Worship Connection
Thanks to groundbreaking research of investigators like Jordan Maxwell (whose work was the basis of one major segment of the hit movie Zeitgeist), people have begun to become aware of the link between Christmas and sun worship.
At its core, the Illuminati and secret societies that run the world are deeply into black magic, which, defined, is the use of mostly unseen and unknown forces to gain power and control over others. The Illuminati are black magicians.
They utilize certain powers and then, through their control of the media and academia, put out disinformation and lies to prevent people from believing in and accessing those very powers, lest their power base be eroded.
A typical Christian art interpretation of Jesus. Note the sun cross at the back
Christmas is all about the birth of the “son”. But what if it is actually the birth or rebirth of the “sun”? A sun that goes through a “spring”, ascends to a height (summer solstice), then goes through a “fall” (autumn)? Christianity tells us that Jesus the son is our savior. Yet literally speaking the “sun” is our savior; without the sun there would be little or no life on Earth.
So it is only natural that sun worship was practiced by early cultures all over the world, especially in the keys days following the winter solstice, when the sun disappears over the horizon in northern latitudes for 3 days. Jesus was dead for the 3 days. Is this the symbolic “death” of the sun?
December 25th is the first day when the son or sun makes his triumphant return. Many people make fun of early religions and brand them as primitive, without actually realizing that Christianity itself has either stolen or built upon (depending on your viewpoint) these exact traditions.
Is it purely a coincidence that the date of Christmas is always December 25th every year, exactly 3 days after the 22nd (or night of the 21st), the date of winter solstice? Is it another coincidence that Jesus is pictured everywhere throughout Christian art on top of a sun cross, showing the sun’s journey through the 4 seasons every year? Is Christmas an elaborate ritual to lure back the “prodigal sun” from death?
The Christmas-Saturn Worship Connection
Finally, we come to the Saturn connection. The Christmas-Saturn connection is far from the only connection Saturn has with many modern (dark) activities. Saturn is the ancient roman god of time, harvest, law, tyranny and death. In the ancient Greek pantheon he was Chronos, meaning time, and from which we get words like chronological.
Saturnalia was an ancient Roman festival in honour of the deity Saturn, held on 17 December of the Julian calendar and later expanded with festivities through to 23 December. The holiday was celebrated with a sacrifice at the Temple of Saturn, in the Roman Forum, and a public banquet, followed by private gift-giving, continual partying, and a carnival atmosphere that overturned Roman social norms: gambling was permitted, and masters provided table service for their slaves.[1] The poet Catullus called it "the best of days."
For those investigating the global conspiracy, Saturn has particular significance. Why? Because Saturn – and what it represents – is the object of worship of some of the secret societies that are running the planet today. Indeed, the worship of Saturn is a theme running through the priest, the lawyer and the academic classes, as can be seen by the use of gowns and square mortarboards in the color of black – Saturn’s color.
To quote Jordan Maxwell:
“When you graduate from high school you come out processionally with a black robe … and wear the square mortarboard on top of your head. The square mortarboards are, of course, used by the Freemasons for their plaster, so that is why you wear a square mortarboard when you graduate, ultimately becoming an Alumni. It all has to do with Freemasonry; it all has to do with the control of education in this country.”
In the early first centuries A.D., Saturn had a very strong presence in the most powerful city in the world: Rome. Every year from December 17th to 25th, there was a wild, licentious festival in his honor, named Saturnalia.
For these 8 days of the year, people would cut loose in a period of utter lawlessness; Roman courts were closed and Roman law dictated that no one could be punished for damaging property or injuring people during the festival.
There was widespread intoxication, people running around naked, rape and orgies. There was even human sacrifice – a theme that continues to underly some of the strange, dark rituals practiced by today’s ruling elite at places like Bohemian Grove.
According to some sources, Christmas was invented to compete with the pagan celebrations like Saturnalia, because it was just so popular. It was a successful strategy. Over time, the Church adopted many pagan rituals in their attempt to make Christianity more attractive to converts.
What Does Christmas Mean to You?
Ultimately, we all imbue our lives and activities with our own sense of meaning. You can decide what Christmas means to you.
However, it is always good to be aware of the occult origins and hidden symbolism of traditions and events, for as Confucius said, the world is ruled by signs and symbols, not words or law. Symbols communicate directly with our subconscious and guide our lives from behind the scenes, so choose consciously to which things you give your attention and energy.
These Five Traits Can Only Be Found In Genuine Empaths
& Psychic Abilities Everyone Can Unlock December 24 2018 | From: iHeartIntelligence / UniverseInsideYou
We all possess interesting characteristics, and genuine
empaths are no different. However, the traits that make them unique are
rather astounding.
The trademark trait of empaths, or what everyone knows about them, is all in the name- empath.They exhibit empathy
“It’s been argued that empathy conferred an evolutionary advantage to
humans. Since we’re tribal creatures, empathizing with others increased
our sense of commitment to the community and to those in it.
Additionally, it permitted us greater understanding of not just our own
feelings, but those of others,” writes Peg Streep in PsychologyToday.
While empaths are undeniably gifted in this area, they are so much more than this one aspect.
Here are 5 unique traits that make every empath special:
1. They Mirror The Emotions Of Others
There are certain brain cells which are responsible for us feeling
compassion, and relating to the joy, fear, and love of others. These
brain cells are referred to as ‘mirror neurons.’
Empaths are believed to
have hyper-responsive mirror neurons, making it possible for them to
deeply understand the feelings of another person.
Dr. Judith Orloff warns that we should be aware of those who display a lack of empathy. “Psychopaths, sociopaths, and narcissists are thought to have what science calls ’empathy deficient disorders.’
This means they lack the ability to feel empathy like other people do,
which may be caused by an under-active mirror neuron system.”
No one wants to be around someone who is constantly negative, but for empaths, it is much more than simple dislike.
There is a phenomenon called emotional contagion where “one person’s emotions and related behaviors directly trigger
similar emotions and behaviors in other people.”
For example, an infant
crying in a hospital will set off other babies to cry. Or, if someone is
having a bad day and displaying anger and aggression, others around
them will do the same. What does this mean for empaths?
Orloff states, “Empaths need to choose positive people in their lives so
they’re not brought down by negativity. Or, if, say a friend is going
through a hard time, empaths should take special precautions to ground
and center themselves.”
Enduring the full effect of the world and those in it can be
physically and mentally exhausting for empaths.
You will notice they
have to take time for themselves, where they are on their own, in their
own space. Even if that space is nature, which it often is.
Besides needing this time to recover and reinvigorate themselves,
empaths actually crave alone time. As Orloff explains, “Research has
shown that introverted empaths tend to have a higher
sensitivity to dopamine than extroverts. Basically, they need less
dopamine to feel happy. That could explain why they are more content
with being alone.”
Whether it is a video on the news, a disturbing image on social
media, or even a texted photo, empaths can’t watch or look at it. It’s
not that they are avoiding the realities of this world, but they already
are aware, and when they have to see these things it makes them feel
like they are seeing it in person.
Empaths get the full effect. While
most people can see these things with a sense of detachment, that simply
isn’t an option for empaths.
In fact, if you are an empath, you’ve probably unfollowed a few
people because of the things they share. It’s never a bad thing to take
care of yourself, and you get to choose what you allow into your life.
“You’re too sensitive.”
“You cry too much.” “You’re too emotional.” Empaths spend a lot of time
hearing these phrases throughout their childhood, and sometimes even
well into adulthood.
Instead of support, empaths often have to go down a road of scrutiny.
They learn that there is a cycle of growth we all have to go through -
we let the world in (we get hurt), we block the world out (we hurt
ourselves), and return to letting the world in again (but with
boundaries in place.)
Empath sensitivity and heightened emotional awareness is not a bad
thing, and it is certainly not a weakness. It takes real strength to
feel everything so deeply. Do you have any empaths in your life? Share this article with them and show them how much they mean to you.
Psychic Abilities Everyone Can Unlock
Since the start of recorded history, psychic abilities have been documented, exposing the supernatural gift that some possess to look beyond the physical world and reach into the spiritual one.
Throughout the past, our mental abilities have been a topic of mystery; often being attributed to certain individuals’ ability to control matter simply by thought, giving birth to numerous supernatural theories related to Alchemy and prophecies, communicating with non-physical entities, travelling outside of one’s physical body, supernatural healing, supernatural levels of strength, hypnosis, telekinesis and much more.
We know fo sure that the mind is capable of extraordinary things, but yet we have been surprised again and again by it.
Perhaps, the unknown capabilities of the human brain are yet to be found, feats of unnatural mental abilities becoming common practice in the future. In this video, we'll discuss a small fraction of the known psychic abilities we as human all possess and simply need to develop in order to use them. Let's start.
Here’s What The Big Tech Companies Know About You & Sundar Pichai Lies To Congress About Google Tracking Location Of Users December 23 2018 | From: VisualCapitalist / Infowars
The novelty of the internet platform boom has mostly worn off.
Now that companies like Facebook, Amazon, and Alphabet are among the world’s most valued companies, people are starting to hold them more accountable for the impact of their actions on the real world.
From the Cambridge Analytica scandal to the transparency of Apple’s supply chain, it’s clear that big tech companies are under higher scrutiny. Unsurprisingly, much of this concern stems around one key currency that tech companies leverage for their own profitability: personal data.
What Big Tech Knows
Today’s infographic comes to us from Security Baron, and it compares and contrasts the data that big tech companies admit to collecting in their privacy policies.
While the list of data collected by big tech is extensive in both length and breadth, it does take two to tango.
For many of these categories, users have to willingly supply their data in order for it to be collected. For example, you don’t have to fill out your relationship status on Facebook, but millions of users choose to do so.
Did I Opt Into This?
The majority of the data categories on the list make sense – it’s a no-brainer that Amazon has your credit card information, or that Google knows what websites you visit. Even the least tech-savvy person would likely understand this.
However, there are definitely some categories of data that get collected and stored that may sound unnerving to some people:
Facebook knows your political views, religious views, and even your ethnicity
Xbox users will have their skeletal tracking data collected through the Kinect device
Facebook also knows your income level, which it finds out through partnerships with personal data brokers
Platforms collect your documents, email, and message data – though some of this is just metadata
Facebook and Microsoft store facial recognition data, based on the pictures you upload
Remember, this is just what companies admit to collecting in their privacy policies – what else do you think they know?
Pichai Lies To Congress About Google Tracking Location Of Users
Falsely claims users can opt out.
Google CEO Sundar Pichai lied to Congress during testimony today when he claimed that users could opt out of Google’s location tracking services, a claim that the Associated Press previously found to be false.
During his appearance in front of the the House Judiciary committee for a hearing entitled: Transparency & Accountability: Examining Google and its Data Collection, Use and Filtering Practices, Pichai claimed that users had control of what information Google stored about them.
“For Google services, you have a choice of what information is collected, and we make it transparent,” Pichai said, adding, “We give clear toggles, by category, where they can decide whether that information is collected, stored, or – more importantly – if they decide to stop using it.”
However, this is categorically untrue.
As an investigation by the Associated Press back in August confirmed, Google is tracking the location of its users even when the location tracking option is turned off.
“An Associated Press investigation found that many Google services on Android devices and iPhones store your location data even if you’ve used a privacy setting that says it will prevent Google from doing so,” the news agency reported.
Even with the option to pause location history turned off, “Some Google apps automatically store time-stamped location data without asking,” states the report.
Google’s maps app stores a snapshot of your location whenever you open it, daily weather updates on Android also record your rough location and Google searches also pinpoint and store your precise latitude and longitude down to a single square foot.
Before Pichai gave his testimony, he was confronted by Alex Jones and Roger Stone.
Anti-censorship activists who accuse Google of working with the Chinese government to out political dissidents have also made their presence felt at the hearing.
The Incredible Impact of Kindness On Humanity
December 22 2018 | From: UpliftConnect
Love in Action: Every day somewhere in the world, an innocent child dies from starvation, a family is threatened by war or disaster and flees their home with their pets and children to find refuge, a mother becomes ill from polluted water, a small boy shelters under a bridge in the snow, and a grandma in the remote mountains dies from lack of medical expertise.
In fact, every second, one person somewhere on the planet, dies from starvation. It is estimated that one in every six people don’t get enough food to eat and this year 36 million people and children will die from hunger.
The UNHCR, the United Nations Refugee Agency says there are 68.5 million people displaced worldwide. Of these 25.5 million are refugees. And each day, 44,400 people flee their homes due to conflict and persecution.
While these figures are breathtaking in their enormity, these are the lives of ordinary people, just like you and I. People who want to live a peaceful, happy life with their families.
We all want the same things, to love, be loved, to care for our families, to work and to play. Yet, every day an unbelievable amount of people die from a lack of the most basic human needs so many of us take absolutely for granted.
On the 70th celebration of Human Rights Day, we can reflect on how we can each dig deeper into our hearts and stand up to make a bigger difference in the world. It is a day to recommit ourselves to protecting the safety and fundamental human rights of all people.
Instead of becoming hopeless and depressed about the sheer enormity of the plight of so many, we must instead focus on what we can do.
Because in fact we can do so much and even helping one family or one child is a fantastic difference. If 7.2 billion people all did something to help each other, that adds up to something extraordinary.
“If you think you are too small to make a difference, try sleeping with a mosquito".
Each one of us has the capacity and power to make a change. And when we are fuelled by kindness and a heartfelt desire to help our brothers and sisters, anything is possible.
Most people, given the chance, want to help and do good in the world. They just don’t know how to go about it. Yet, kindness can underline our parenting, our relationships, our work, and our daily interactions.
Every day we can align with our hearts, and take a small step to support world peace, by reaching out into our community, sharing ourselves and our skills or resources and helping just one person.
This simple act of kindness will grow and ripple out further than we can imagine.
The Ripple Effect of Kindness
All over the world, people are answering the call of kindness. You can too.
Ordinary people are setting up amazing charities, like backpacker Maggie Doyne, the then 19-year-old who was moved to save one street urchin in Nepal.
She used her life savings to buy land so she could build an orphanage which now houses over 50 children. Ten years later, she has made an enormous impact on the lives of so many children, altering their future forever.
Or yoga teacher Atira Tan, who found a passion within her to save the thousands of children and women who are victims of the sex trade in Nepal.
Her choice to make a difference has saved and rehabilitated hundreds of women, who she now trains and employs as part of her charity Art 2 Healing to be able to support other women and children who have been enslaved by sex traffickers.
Each one of us can do something, even if it’s the simple act of sponsoring a child or donating regularly to a charity.
Many hands coming together change the world. Spiritual teacher Andrew Harvey implores us in his incredible book, The Hope, to respond to global challenges with the transforming power of love and compassion.
Even the smallest of gestures can have a profound impact and a knock-on effect
“Strengthened by prayer, practice and inspiration, turn now to your life and the people in it. Everyone, especially in a time like ours, has friends who are in grief, or ill, or looking for a job, or are in real financial difficulty.
Commit now to ringing one of them up, and ask him or her what you could do to make their burden easier. Do this soon and be happy that you can.
When we fill our hearts with the gratitude for the gifts in our own life, we have the fuel to support others. Andrew Harvey shares the importance of a commitment to spiritual practice in keeping our hearts inspired with love and wisdom and aligned with the ‘”pure deep love” that is longing to use us as its instrument in the world.
“Make a commitment today, even if you are in financial difficulties, to tithe between five and ten percent of what you earn to a cause of your choice.
I recommend choosing one particular cause that deeply moves you and sticking to your commitment, whatever happens; over time, tithing like this will give you a great and healing sense of being of use and the cause you are helping will become more and more precious and personal to you, and you will want, naturally and simply, to do more.
Standing Up for Human Rights
This year’s Human Rights Day advocates for everyone to stand up for their rights and those of others–civil, economic, political and cultural rights.
Additionally, the day aims to enlighten us about how our rights are a foundation of sustainable development and peaceful societies. The 2018 commemoration of Human Rights Day marks the beginning of a year-long celebration of 70 years since the international community adopted the declaration. We celebrate all our inalienable rights and freedoms, including a right to education, a decent living, health care and a right to live free from any form of discrimination among others.
Let’s build a beautiful world for all, where all children feel safe, everyone has enough to eat and communities are strong and united.
1080 Was Added To Water Supplies By Germany In WW2 As A Chemical Weapon Says A US Manufacturer – But The New Zealand Authorities Are Dropping It Aerially Into Our Waterways
December 21 2018 | From: EnviroWatchRangitikei / Various
This statement is made within correspondence in 1994 by an Eltham resident (NZ) to a US manufacturer of 1080 (details supplied in the document at the end of the article).
The person was trying to ascertain the level of risk to environment and health regarding an imminent drop of 1080 poison into a Taranaki National Park.
It is interesting to note that the replies to all the risks the person raises in their questions are risks that are now deemed quite safe & have become normalized (to the authorities at least that is – many people are now very concerned, witness the recent hikoi & continual NZ wide protests going on).
Here are the questions and answers enlarged for reading:
Nowadays we are told that 1080 targets pests and we are given the impression that little if any other form of wildlife is affected. In fact nothing could be further from the truth.
A person told me recently in the Manawatu that she was told no birds would die in the bush nearby when it was 1080'ed however to her surprise she found a dead bird after the area was treated.
Of course we now know that this is a common occurrence by the testimony of many people who find multiple dead birds after drops, photograph them & post them online.
And of course we have the various documentations that we’ve published here of multiple finds, with latterly the estimate by a Landcare scientist of 10,000 birds in a South Island drop.
Just search ‘birds, 1080’ in our search box to find more.
We are regularly told that 1080 breaks down to harmlessness in water. A scientist told me the other day it is so diluted it isn’t a problem, repeating the cup of tea mantra we hear so regularly.
We also learned recently it was added to water to poison ships rats and we heard from the former Greens co-leader that there are question marks over the official testing on 1080 concentrations in water.
This is very enlightening. No wonder the data sheets tell us not to allow it into waterways.
However NZ it seems makes up their own rules on that one. No research to prove their point, they just tweaked the rules.
Here is a link to the information regarding the development of 1080 by Germany for use as a chemical weapon in water supplies.
Not approved in the US! “Very very restricted & controlled areas” only. And here it is chucked around like a veritable lolly scramble.
The baits aren’t picked up off public walkways and neither are the poisoned animals collected & disposed off, frequently left to rot in the water where eels and other meat eaters can feed off them (Watch Poisoning Paradise on that one).
Remember the Hunua Ranges drop recently? A Court injunction to stop that one failed & during the proceedings DoC lawyers asked (and were granted) that the opposing lawyers not be allowed to question the DoC scientist.
Now doesn’t that say something? Let’s not forget Bill Benfield’s revelation either that a drop in the Hunuas in the ’90s left the water filters packed with 1080 pellets. Good one DoC. And none of the public ever got to hear about it.
Previously I’ve noted the frequent discovery of pellets on tracks, drops going on around tourists, pellets dumped near people fishing, on it goes. The veritable lolly scramble again.
The Disintegration Of Western Society December 20 2018 | From: PaulCraigRoberts / Various
Radical feminists are now being banned by Twitter not because they hate men, which is perfectly OK as far as Twitter is concerned, but because they object to “transwomen.”
What is a “transwoman?” As far as I can understand, a “transwoman” is a male with a penis who declares himself to be a women and demands his right to use women’s toilette facilities anong with the women who are using them.
There you have it. Yesterday it was feminists who were exercising their special society-bestowed privileges to censor.
Today it is the feminists who are being censored.
As this insanity of “Western Civilization” continues, tomorrow it will be the transwomen who are censored and banned.
What precisely is afoot?
My readers, who have partially and some wholely escaped from The Matrix, understand that this is the further fragmentation of American [Western] society.
Identiy Politics has set men, women, blacks, Jews, Asians, Hispanics, and white people against one another. Identity Politics is the essence of the Democratic Party and the American liberal / progressive / left.
Now, with the creation of “new” but otherwise nonexistent “genders,” although they are honored as real by the controlled whores who masquerade as a “Western media,” we witness radical feminists being silenced by men pretending to be women.
I sympathize with Meghan Murphy, but she brought this on herself and on the rest of us by accepting Identity Politics. Identity Politics gave Meghan a justification for hating men even, as she failed to realize, it provided the basis for moving her into the exploitative class that must be censored.
Where does this end?
It has already gone far enough that the American population is so divided and mutually hostile that there is no restraint by “the American people” on government and the elite oligarchs that rule. “The American people” are no longer a reality but a mythical creature like the unicorn.
The film, The Matrix, is the greatest film of our lifetime.
Why? Because it shows that there are two realities. A real one of which only a few people are aware, and a virtual one in which eveyone else lives.
In the United States today, and throughout “Western Brainwashed Civilization,” only a handful of people exist who are capable of differentiating the real from the created reality in which all explanations are controlled and kept as far away from the truth as possible.
Everything that every Western government and “news” organization says is a lie to control the explanations that we are fed in order to keep us locked in The Matrix.
The construction of a make-believe reality guarantees the US military/security complex’s annual budget of $1,000 billion dollars of taxpayers’ money even as Congress debates cutting Social Security in order to divert more largess to the pockets of the corrupt military/security complex.
Readers ask me what they can do about it. Nothing, except revolt and cleanse the system, precisely as Founding Father Thomas Jefferson said.
Is Thomas Jefferson Alive and Well In Paris?
If this report is correct, pray the revolt spreads to the US.
Philosopher: Yellow Vest Movement Is “Historic,” Unlike Any Other Protest December 19 2018 | From: Infowars / Various
People from both left and right have lost faith in the political elite and the media.
French philosopher Alain de Benoist says that the yellow vest movement that started in France and is now spreading to other European countries is “historic” and unlike any other protest.
Speaking to Hungarian daily Magyar Hirlap, Benoist noted how protesters are driven by two factors – cultural insecurity which is driven by mass migration and social insecurity which is driven by the soaring cost of living.
He notes that when these two factors blend, a “rebellion” is inevitable.
“Immigration has become an increasingly unbearable problem in recent years and people know that more people are coming. In addition, social tension is growing as rich people are richer and the poor are poorer,” said Benoist.
The philosopher notes that the movement is unlike any other because it unites people with shared grievances from both sides of the political spectrum.
“This is a historic event because it is different from any other protest we have seen in recent years. It was launched from the bottom, completely independent of the parties and trade unions, and it can not be categorized either clearly right or left,” said Benoist.
He added that the huge support from the French population, 70 per cent in some polls, is a telling factor and a sign that people have completely lost faith in the political elite and the media.
“What they see on TV or in the newspapers is completely different from what they experience in their daily lives,” said Benoist, adding that “democracy” and “liberalism” are no longer synonymous with each other because the EU is an illiberal authoritarian body.
Meanwhile, in another sign that the French government is keen to accomodate protesters’ demands, French Prime Minister Edouard Philippe admitted that massive mistakes were made in responding to the demonstrations and that, “We did not listen enough to the French people.”
“I remain convinced that they want this country to be transformed,” he added.
While French protesters again gathered in major cities this past weekend, perhaps the most incendiary clashes occurred in Belgium, where around 5,000 demonstrators rallied against mass immigration.
Officers resorted to using water cannons and tear gas during the clashes. One incident caught on tape shows a man being tear gassed directly in the face before falling to the ground as police shove him aside.
New Study Reveals Surprising Truths About Conspiracy Theories December 18 2018 | From: CollectiveEvolution
The largest study of conspiracy theories has revealed some interesting and telling facts about how people feel about authority, who really runs the government, and even what demographics are most likely to believe in alternative truths.
The study polled people from 9 different countries over a six-year period and was performed by researchers at the University of Cambridge and YouGov, funded by the Leverhulme Trust.
This study is the deepest ever conducted on the subject and marks the first time academics have explored questions of conspiracy beliefs, social trust, and news consumption habits across different countries.
The Facts:
A new study from YouGov and Cambridge University reveals some telling facts about people who believe in conspiracy theories. For example, 44% of people believe only a small group of people control government regardless of who's elected.
Reflect On:
Are we waking up to the truths in our world, even though media, education and pop culture tells us we're crazy to think differently? Are we seeing a grand awakening?
The timing of this study is interesting as many people are turning away from mainstream ‘facts’ and instead are exploring information from independent sources that often provide a completely different narrative than that of controlled mainstream media outlets.
In this day and age, as more narrative-breaking truths come forward, some have been suggesting that those who believe in conspiracy theories are unstable and often suffering from some sort of mental illness.
It’s not all that surprising when you consider the goal is to keep people uninformed, but the game is becoming more obvious.
Before we continue, yes, some conspiracy theories are false and way out there, but many aren’t. Time and time again we continue to see ‘conspiracy theories’ turn out to be true.
Yet we continue to judge alternative information harshly as collectively we aren’t learning our lessons.
Think of Snowden for example. People had claimed ‘Big Brother’ was watching and tracking everything we did for years, but it wasn’t until Snowden came forward and proved it that people actually started to realize it was true all along.
Instead of viewing all of those who believe in ‘conspiracies’ as unstable, if you took a more honest and neutral look at it, you might realize most are stable, well educated and intelligent individuals who happened to figure out they were being deceived and thus have performed their own research.
Interestingly, pop culture, education, and even government sneer at these people and instead focus on those who are ‘educated’ and who, quite frankly, vote a specific way, as the stable ones.
Classic conditioning of the masses to avoid people from learning truths that would deeply shake those in power.
The Results of The Study
More than 11,500 people were surveyed online by YouGov across nine countries: France, Germany, the UK, Hungary, Italy, Poland, Portugal, Sweden, and the USA. Results were weighted to be representative of each country.
I cover some of my favorite and most telling results, as well as add my commentary in the video below. Beneath the video, you can follow along by text. Some of the results are quite telling in my opinion. Be sure to subscribe to our YouTube channel for more videos too.
15% of Brexit leave voters and 11% of remain voters in Britain believed that, regardless of who was officially in charge in government, the world was run by a secret global cabal of people who control events together.
44% of people in the UK believe that “even though we live in what’s called a democracy, a few people will always run things in this country anyway”.
Mistrust of authority was high in the UK, with 77% of people trusting journalists “not much” or “not at all”; 76% distrusting British government ministers; and 74% distrusting company bosses.
Friends and family, by contrast, were trusted by 87% and 89% of respondents respectively, potentially adding credence to news sources shared by social media contacts.
Remain voters were more likely (50%) to use social media regularly for news than leave voters (34%), and more likely to read a newspaper website (by 41% to 18%). Of those who got their news from social media, Facebook was used frequently by more leave voters than remainers (74% leave, 65% remain), while the opposite was true of Twitter (39% remain, 28% leave).
Sweden gave the least amount credit to conspiracy theories, with 52% believing one or more of the theories polled by the researchers, as opposed to 85% for Hungary. In the US that figure was 64% and in France 76%. Sweden also happens to have a giant problem with free speech… they regularly prosecute and jail people for having unpopular opinions.
We live in a fast-changing world. Not just in our evolution of technology and landscape, but in our collective consciousness.
People are figuring out, on a mass scale, that things aren’t what they seem in this world and our evolution in individual consciousness is driving deep questioning into what is actually going on in our world.
It may appear like a chaotic time, but it’s a necessary step in breaking down old beliefs and paradigms that allow us to give our power away to a small group of elite individuals who rule our entire world.
Now is the time for individual empowerment to create a strong collective.
We do not rise under one country, government or belief system, but under an understanding and state of consciousness within that allows us to see we must take responsibility for our own lives and live from our hearts.
As we practice this and let go of the way of the old, we will continue to see an incredible dismantling of a power structure that does not have our best interest at heart.
Each of us holds the key to changing within. If we focus there, things will continue to shift.
How To Open Your 7 Chakras As Explained In a Children's Show 
In one such operation, the perpetrators would target certain geographical blocks of the city, and, for instance, cause everyone in that area to be in a bad mood. 
The Internet Just Crowdfunded the Release of 4,358 CIA Mind Control Documents
Key Point: Of course, MI6 has its fingerprints all over FISAgate (e.g. fraudulent Steel dossier), but more importantly so does GCHQ. This little data point indicates that the Brits are really conducting spying and surveillance on the US government 24/7, which they are. 
Teach Someone Something New or Learn a New Skill 
The Earth’s magnetic fields are a carrier of biologically relevant information that connects all living systems
Global Alliance Moving For A Checkmate Versus The Deep State
The Christmas-Sun Worship Connection
CURRENT AFFAIRS
We need to understand that there’s no person out there who will complete us.
But as the evidence mounts up, it is time for medical education to take nutrition seriously so that GPs and psychiatrists of the future know as much about its role in good health as they do about anatomy and physiology. 
